NCD991278540_19990817_Weyerhaeuser Company_FRBCERCLA SAP QAPP_Final Sampling and Analysis Plan for Ecological Sampling-OCR

CDM Federal Programs Corporation
A Su/Jsidiary of Camp Dresser & McKee Inc.
consulring Building 3, Suite 150
engineering 1526 Cole Boulevard
construcrion Golden, CO 8040 1
operations Tel: [phone] Fax: [phone]
August 17 , 1999
Ms. Jennifer Wendel_
Regional Project Manager
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Region IV
Waste Management Division
Atlanta Federal Center
61 Forsyth Street
Atlanta, GA 30303-3104
Project: RAC Contract No. 68-WS-0022
RECEIVED
AUG 18 1999
SUPERFUND SECTION
Work Assignment No. 004-RICO-04 I B
DCN: 3280-004-PP-SAMP-05570
Subject: Final Sampling and Analysis Plan for Ecological Sampling, Roanoke River Site
Dear Ms. Wendel:
CDM Federal Programs Corporation (CDM Federal) is pleased to submit this Final Sampling
and Analysis Plan for the referenced work assignment.
If you have any questions or comments regarding this Work Plan, please feel free to call. We
look forward to continuing to support EPA on this work assignment.
Sincerely,
CDM FEDERAL PROGRAMS CORPORATION
Q (\ '---= D ,~CL.__ CJ\. ~z_~
Brenda L. Beatty G
Ecologist
Attachments
cc: L. Wellman, USEPA Region IV
Ken Mallary, USEPA Region IV
Sharon Th oms, USEPA Region IV
Linda George, USEPA Region IV
Bobby Lewis, USEPA Region IV
Dan Thoman, USEPA Region IV
Ken Seeley, NOAA
Mark Sprenger, US EPA ER T
Mike Horne, USFWS
Tom Augspurger, USFWS
Doug Rumford, State of North Carolina
Lynne France, CDM Federal Atlanta
Document Control
I
:1
I :1
'
:1
1:1
11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I ' I
I
I
I
I
I
m
RESPONSE ACTION CONTRACT RECEIVED
FOR REMEDIAL, ENFORCEMENT OVERSIGHT, AND NON-TIMfALJG 1 B
CRITICAL REMOVAL ACTIVITIES AT SITES OF RELEASE OR 1999
TI-IREATENED RELEASE OF HAZARDOUS SUBSTANC8SLJPERFUNO SECT/
IN EPA REGION IV ON
U.S. EPA CONTRACT NO.68-W5-0022
FINAL
SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS PLAN
FOR
ECOLOGICAL SAMPLING
ROANOKE RIVER SITE
PL YMOUTI-1, NORTH CAROLINA
PART I -FIELD SAMPLING PLAN
PART II -QUALITY ASSURANCE PROJECT PLAN
Work Assignment No.: 030-RICO-041 B
Document Control No.: 3280-030-PP-SAMP-05570
August 17, 1999
Prepared for:
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Region IV
Atlanta, Georgia
Prepared by:
COM Federal Programs Corporation
1526 Cole Boulevard, Suite 150
Golden, CO 80401
•. ,1 ,.. RESPONSE ACTION CONTRACT
• ,: ,\.'·' 1 FOR REMEDIAL, ENFORCEMENT OVERSIGHT, AND NON-TIME
CRJTICAL REMOVAL ACTIVITIES AT SITES OF RELEASE OR
THREATENED RELEASE OF HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
IN EPA REGION IV
U.S. EPA CONTRACT NO. 68-WS-0022
TITLE AND APPROVAL SHEET
DRAFT
SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS PLAN
FOR
ECOLOGICAL SAMPLING
ROANOKE RJVER SITE
PLYMOUTH, NORTH CAROLINA
Work Assignment No.: 030-RJCO-041 B
Prepared by: ~\..,~ Cl.9----.... ~C-S:-=es
Srenda Beatty '
Ecologist ·
Datc8 I 1 Cf)
Reviewed by :___\:~!L'-'"::'---'~d._::::v::::_....:J::::,£!cd,...;,,d:::::,;q::JJ..:Y.._ Date: ~ \ \ C\' \
' Tony Gendusa
Aquatic Ecotoxicologist
Review~d b : ~~ U1Z Date
. • ~Rose Mary Gustin
1 RAC Region IV Quality Assurance Manager
Issued by:~,__±-'~---Date:_8_,_
1
/;_~1--'-t'f~f_
~/
Region IV Program Manager
Approved by:.~. ______________ Date.: ______ _
Jennifer Wendel
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
I
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'.I I
I
I
I
'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . I -I
I. I PROJECT OBJECTIVES ............................................... 1-2
1.2 PROJECT SCHEDULE AND DELIVERABLES.......... . .... 1-2
SITE BACKGROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 2-1
2.1 SITE DESCRIPTION AND HISTORY .................................... 2-1
2.2 SITE GEOLOGY AND HYDROGEOLOGY ................................ 2-7
SAMPLING PROGRAM, RATIONALE, AND LOCATIONS ....................... 3-1
3.1 WETLAND SOIL SAMPLING .......................................... 3-1
3.1.1 WETLAND SOIL SAMPLING RA Tl ON ALE ........................ 3-1
3.1.2 WETLAND SOIL SAMPLE NUMBER AND LOCATIONS ............. 3-2
3.2 RIVER SEDIMENT SAMPLING ......................................... 3-3
3.2.1 SEDIMENT SAMPLING RATIONALE ............................. 3-3
3.2.2 SEDIMENT SAMPLING NUMBER AND LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . ... 3-4
3.3 BIOTA SAMPLING ................................................... 3-5
3.3.1 BIOTA SAMPLING RATIONALE .....
3.3.2 BIOTA SAMPLING NUMBER AND LOCATION
FIELD ACTIVITY METHODS AND PROCEDURES ..... .
4.1 SITE MOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION ...... .
4.2 EQUIPMENT, SUPPLIES, AND CONTAINERS .. .
4.3 WETLAND SOIL SAMPLING PROCEDURE ..... .
. ....... 3-5
....... 3-7
........ 4-1
. ..... 4-1
. 4-2
. 4-2
4.4 RIVER SEDIMENT SAMPLING PROCEDURE ............................ 4-3
4.5 BIOTA SAMPLING ................................................... 4-5
4.6 FIELD LOGBOOK DOCUMENTATION .................................. 4-5
4.7 PACKAGING AND SHIPPING OF SAMPLES ............................. 4-7
4.8 EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION . . . . . . . . . .............. 4-7
4.9 MANAGEMENT OF INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTES ................. 4-7
PROJECT MANAGEMENT . . . . ........................... 5-1
5.1 PROJECT ORGANIZATION ................. 5-1
5.1.1 MANAGEMENT ORGANIZATION ............................... 5-1
5.1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ORGANIZATION ......................... 5-3
5.1.J REPORT ORGANIZATION ...................................... 5-4
5.2 BACKGROUND AND PURPOSE ........................................ 5-4
5.3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION·.................... . ....... 5-5
5.4 QUALITY OBJECTIVES AND CRITERIA FOR MEASUREMENT ............ 5-5
5.4.1 DA TA QUALITY OBJECTIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5-5
5.4.1.1 Step I: State the Problem ................................. 5-7
5.4.1.2 Step 2: Identify the Decision ....... 5-8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
5.4.1.3 Step 3: Identify the Inputs to the Decision .................... 5-8
5.4.1.4 Step 4: Define the Boundaries of the Study ................... 5-9
5.4.1.5 Step 5: Develop a Decision Rule ........................... 5-9
5.4.1.6 Step 6: Specify Tolerable Limits on Decision Errors ........... 5-11
5.4.1.7 Step 7: Optimize the Design for Obtaining Data .............. 5-13
5.4.2 DATA MEASUREMENT OBJECTIVES ........................... 5-13
5.4.2.1 Quality Assurance Guidance .............................. 5-13
5.4.2.2 Precision, Accuracy, Representativeness, Completeness, and
Comparability Criteria ................................... 5-14
5.4.2.3 Field Measurements ..................................... 5-16
5.4.2.4 Laboratory Analysis .................................... 5-17
5.5 SPECIAL TRAINING REQUIREMENTS ................................. 5-18
5.6 DOCUMENTATION AND RECORDS ................................... 5-19
6.0 MEASUREMENT AND DATA ACQUISITION .. · ................................ 6-1
6.1 SAMPLE PROCESS DESIGN ........................................... 6-1
6.2 SAMPLING METHODS REQUIREMENTS ................................ 6-1
6.2.I SAMPLING EQUIPMENT AND PREPARATION .................... 6-1
6.2.2 SAMPLE CONTAINERS ........................................ 6-3
6.2.3 SAMPLE COLLECTION, HANDLING, AND SHIPMENT ............. 6-3
6.3 SAMPLE HANDLING AND CUSTODY REQUIREMENTS ................... 6-3
6.3.1 FIELD SAMPLE CUSTODY AND DOCUMENTATION ............... 6-4
6.3.1.1 Sample Labeling and Identification .......................... 6-4
6.3.1.2 CLP Routine Analytical Service Paperwork Req\1irements ....... 6-7
6.3.1.3 Sample Packaging and Shipping ............................ 6-9
6.3.1.4 Field Logbook(s) and Records ............................. 6-9
6.3 .1.5 Photographs ............................................ 6-9
6.3.2 CORRECTIONS TO AND DEVIATIONS FROM
DOCUMENTATION ............................................ 6-9
6.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL SAMPLES ................................. 6-10
6.4.1 FIELD DUPLICATES .......................................... 6-10
6.4.2 EQUIPMENT RINSATE BLANKS ................................ 6-10
6.4.3 PRESERVATIVE BLANKS ..................................... 6-11
6.5 INTERNAL QUALITY CONTROL CHECKS ............................. 6-11
6.6 FIELD INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION PROCEDURES AND FREQUENCY ... 6-11
6.7 ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR SUPPLIES ........................ 6-12
6.8 DATA MANAGEMENT ............................................... 6-12
7.0 ASSESSMENT AND OVERSIGHT ............................................ 7-1
7.1 ASSESSMENTS AND RESPONSE ACTIONS .............................. 7-1 ' 7.2 REPORTS TO MANAGEMENT ......................................... 7-1
II
I
I
I
I
I
m
n
D
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I ~·
ti
I
11
I
I '
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
iH
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
8.0 DATA VALIDATION AND USABILITY
8.1 VALIDATION PROCESSES ... .
8.2 DATA EVALUATION ....... .
9.0 REFERENCES .................... .
111
... 8-1
································8-1
································8-1
·································9-1
I
LIST OF FIGURES I
FIGURE I
2-1 Site Location -Lower Roanoke River Site I
I
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
iv I
I
I \I
ii
:.1
'
ii
I
' I
I I
I
I
I
I ' I I
' I .
I
0
'
I
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE
3-1 Number of Samples, Sample Identification, And Sample Collection Parameters
5-1 Sample Containers, Preservation, And Minimal Volume/weight Requirement
5-2 Data Evaluation And Validation Criteria (I)
5-3 Sample Reporting Limits (I)
V
I
LIST OF PLATES I
PLATE I
Plate I Lower Roanoke River Planned Sampling Locations I
I
D
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
VI I
I
I 11
I
:,
' ii
\I
ii
11
I
I
' I
' I
I
I
I
I
I
0
D
1:
I'
I,
I
CLP
COM Federal
DQO
EPA
ES!
FWS
GPS
IDW
NCDEHNR
PARCC
PPE
QA
QAPP
QC
QMP
QP
RI/FS
SAP
SESD
SIP
SOP
TAL
TCL
LIST OF ACRONYMS
Contract Laboratory Program
COM Federal Programs Corporation
Data Quality Objectives
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Expanded Site Investigation
U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service
Global Positioning System
Investigation-Derived Wastes
North Carolina Department of Environment, Health, and Natural Resources
Precision, Accuracy, Representativeness, Completeness, and Comparability
Personal Protective Equipment
Qua I ity Assurance
Quality Assurance Project Plan
Quality Control
Quality Management Plan
Quality Procedures
Remedial Investigation/Feasibility Study
Sampling and Analysis Plan
Science and Ecosystem Support Division
Site Inspection Prioritization
Standard Operating Procedures
Target Analyte List
Target Compound List
VII
1.0 INTRODUCTION
CDM Federal Programs Corporation (CDM Federal) has been tasked by the U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA), Region IV, to develop a sampling plan for the biota sampling to be
conducted in support of an ecological risk assessment for the Roanoke River Site. This
document serves as both the Sampling and Analysis Plan (SAP) and Quality Assurance Project
Plan (QAPP) for this investigation. Specifically, the biota sampling program includes the
collection of media for toxicity testing, and the collection of co-located media and biota tissue
samples for chemical analysis. This SAP defines the field investigation and support that CDM
Federal will provide to EPA for this project. The following sections are included in this SAP:
Section I -Introduction
Section 2 -Site Background
Part I: Field Sampling Plan
Section 3 -Sampling Program, Rationale, and Locations
Section 4 -Sampling Methods and Procedures
Part 2: Quality Assurance Project Plan
Section 5 -Project Management
Section 6 -Measurement and Data Acquisition
Section 7 -Assessment and o·versight
Section 8 -Data Validation and Usability
Section 9 -References
Appendix A -Standard Operating Procedures
Appendix B -Target Analytc List for Inorganics and Target Compound List for Organics
P:IROANOKEIRIFS_SAPIECO_SAPIFINALSAP\FNL_SAP.Wl'D 1-1
I
I
I
I
I
H
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
'
I
I
I
1.1 PROJECT OBJECTIVES
The objective of this work assignment is to provide technical support to the EPA, Region IV, in
the planning and collection of abiotic media and biota for use in an ecological risk assessment as
part of a Remedial Investigation/Feasibility Study (RI/FS) for the Lower Roanoke River. This
will include two aspects of sampling: 1) sediment sampling along the Roanoke River to ascertain
the nature and extent of contamination (addressed in a separate SAP/QAPP), and 2) sediment,
wetland soils, and biota sampling to ascertain potential toxicity of river sediments, and uptake of
site-related contaminants into local biota. In addition, media sampling will be coordinated to
meet both objectives, and to avoid duplication of effort and to minimize costs.
1.2 PROJECT SCHEDULE AND DELIVERABLES
The sampling described in this SAP is scheduled to be performed during August 1999.
Deliverables for this project will consist of an RI/FS report including a human health risk
assessment and an ecological risk assessment. The RI report, including the ecological and
human health risk assessments, will be submitted as described in the RI/FS Support Work Plan.
This report is estimated to be completed approximately six months after receipt of validated
• analytical data and toxicity test results.
l':\ROANOKE\R!FS_SAP\ECO _ SAl'\FINALSAP\FNL_SAP. WPD 1-2
2.0 SITE BACKGROUND
2.1 SITE DESCRIPTION AND HISTORY
Site Location
The investigation site includes approximately 5. 7 miles of the Roanoke River from a point
upstream of the Weyerhaeuser Plant site near the town of Plymouth, North Carolina to
Albermarle Sound. The location of the site is shown on Figure 2-1. In the area of Plymouth, the
river is bounded to the north by swamp and wooded wetlands. To the south, the river is bounded
by the town of Plymouth, including two major industrial facilities: the Weyerhaeuser Plant and
the Georgia-Pacific Hardwood Sawmill. The Weyerhaeuser Plant, an active wood and paper
products manufacturing facility, is located on State Road 1565 in Martin County, North Carolina.
The Georgia-Pacific Hardwood Sawmill, an inactive facility, is located on Plywood Drive within
the city limits of Plymouth, Washington County, North Carolina.
The Roanoke River is classified as a "Class C" River with an "Sw" or Swamp Water
supplemental classification. Class C waters are protected for aquatic life propagation and
survival, fishing, wildlife, secondary recreation, and agriculture. Swamp waters have low
velocities and other characteristics which are different from adjacent streams. Albermarle Sound
is classified as "Class B Sw" denoting primary recreation and other usages denoted by Class C.
Welch Creek is a tributary to the Roanoke River that enters the river on the south side,
immediately adjacent to the Weyerhaeuser Plant. Contamination (dioxins, furans, mercury,
chromium, copper, nickel, and zinc) has been documented in the Welch Creek sediments,
wastewater solids, and soils and sediments of the adjacent wetlands. Welch Creek is being
investigated in association with the Weyerhaeuser Plant Site.
l':\ROANOKE\RIFS_SAP\ECO _SAl'\FINALSAP\FNL_SAP. WPD 2-1
I
I
m
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
11
I
:
'11
ii
I
I
I I
I
I I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
D
I
11
1:.
I
I:
1:
I
Site History-
This discussion of site history provides ownership and waste management histories of the
Weyerhaeuser Plant and Georgia-Pacific Hardwood Sawmill facilities, believed to be the main
sources of contamination in the Lower Roanoke River, The Weyerhaeuser Company has been
the owner/operator of the Weyerhaeuser Plant since 1957 when the company merged with
Kieckhefer-Eddy Company, The Kieckhefer-Eddy Company, which began operations at the
facility in 1937, also manufactured pulp and container board products, Several potable water
wells are maintained on-site and all process and sanitary wastewater is discharged to the
Roanoke River via an NPDES-pcrmitted wastewater treatment plant Solid waste is recycled or
disposed at appropriately-permitted landfill sites either on or off site,
The forest products division of Weyerhaeuser treated lumber with a chromaled copper arsenate
process that produced approximately 6000 pounds of treatment sludge per year, In addition, a
mercury cell chlorine production plant was operational at the paper company facility from 1952
to 1965, The chlorine plant was located immediately adjacent to the Roanoke River, and a series
of floor drains collected spilled process fluid and directed it toward a trench leading to the
Roanoke River, Spent materials containing mercury used in the former Chlorine Plant were
disposed ofin an un-lined landfill located on the Weyerhaeuser property, This landfill and the
area of the former Chlorine Plant arc being investigated by Weyerhaeuser under an
Administrative Order with EPA
From approximately 1937 through 1957, process wastewater from pulp and/or paper operations
was discharged directly to the Roanoke River, From 1957 to 1968, the wastewater was
discharged to Welch Creek from an outfall located L6 miles from the confluence of Welch Creek
and the Roanoke River, From 1968 to 1987, the wastewater was discharged to Welch Creek
from an outfall located 2,3 miles from the confluence of Welch Creek and the Roanoke River,
Since 1988, all wastewater has been discharged lo the Roanoke River approximately ½ mile
downstream from the Weyerhaeuser Plant, Beginning in 1968, all wastewater has been treated in
P:\ROANOKE\RI FS _ SA P\ECO _ SA P\FINA LSAP\FNL _SAP. W PD 2-2
a series of on-site wastewater treatment ponds. An NPDES permit was obtained in 1975. Prior
to 1975, a State permit was issued for the discharges to Welch Creek in November of 1969.
The Georgia-Pacific Hardwood Sawmill was owned and originally operated by the Atlas
Plywood Company. Information is not available regarding Atlas' operations and waste
management practices. Georgia-Pacific reportedly bought the facility in 1950, and operated the
facility until 1980. Site operations involved debarking, sawing, and planing rough hardwood
timber from logs. Surface treatment of some finished lumber took place using a conveyor belt
and dip vat. The sawmill facility was permanently closed after a 1983 fire destroyed the sawmill.
Georgia-Pacific sold the property to Decatur Partnerships, and the site was leased to Outerbanks
Contractors who used a portion ofthe"site as an asphalt plant.
Surface water runoff from the Georgia-Pacific Hardwood Sawmill site has resulted in chemical
impacts to the Roanoke River. Sediment samples collected in 1995 contained elevated levels of
lead, arsenic, pentachlorophenol, and dioxin. These chemicals can probably be attributed to the
facility. EPA Region IV is currently conducting an RI/FS of the Georgia-Pacific Sawmill
Facility.
Previous Investigations -Related Sites
Previous investigations that have included environmental sampling in the site area include those
conducted at both the Weyerhaeuser and Georgia-Pacific sites and ecological studies of the
Lower Roanoke River and Alberrnarle Sound.
Previous investigations at the Georgia-Pacific Hardwood Sawmill site include a Preliminary
Assessment conducted by the North Carolina Division of Health Services in 1985; a Phase I
Screening Site Inspection (SSI) conducted by NUS Corporation in 1989; a Phase II SSI
conducted by Greenhome & O'Mara Inc. in 1991; a Site Inspection Prioritization (SIP)
conducted by Dynamac Corp in 1994; and an Expanded Site Inspection (ES!) conducted by
P:\ROANOKE\RI FS _ SAP\ECO _ SA P\FINALSAP\FNL _ SAP. WPD 2-3
I
I
I
D
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I I
' I
I
I
I
I
I
I '
D
u
North Carolina Department of Environment, Health and Natural Resources in 1995. Currently,
EPA Region IV is conducting an Rl/FS of the site.
The previous studies have concluded that surface water runoff from the Georgia-Pacific site has
resulted in contamination of the Roanoke River (Greenhorne and O'Mara Inc., 1991 ). Sediment
samples collected during the 1995 ES! indicate the presence of elevated levels of aluminum,
arsenic, iron, lead, pentachlorophenol, (3-and/or 4-) methyl phenol, benzo (b/k) fluoranthene, the
dioxin isomers 2,3,7,8-tetrachlorodibenzodioxin (2,3,7,8 -TCDD), 1,2,3,7,8-
pentachlorodibenzodioxin, 1,2,3,4, 7,8-hexachlorodibenzodioxin, octachlorodibenzodioxin, and
2,3,7,8-tetrachlorodibenzofuran (2,3,7,8 -TCDF). Detectable concentrations of contaminants
were not found in surface water samples.
Previous investigations at the Weyerhaeuser Plant site have focused on Welch Creek, the former
chlorine plant, and the forn1er landfill. The site conceptual model for the site (RMT, 1998)
includes the discharge of contaminated groundwater into the Roanoke River. In addition, a
discharge trench from the chlorine plant to the river has been identified. This trench may have
been used for disposal of spent brine that may have contained low levels of mercury (RMT
1998).
Previous Investigations -Ecological Assessments
In addition to the site-specific investigations, there have been ecological studies on the river and
Albermarle Sound which focused on the effects of the contaminants that the two facilities
released into the river. In 1996, the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service (FWS) presented the results
of a study of fish-eating birds (i.e., osprey) nesting in the mouth of the lower Roanoke River and
western Albcrmarle Sound (Augspurger, 1996). The results of the study include:
2,3,7,8-TCDD and 2,3,7,8-TCDF were detected in all samples from western Albermarle
Sound. These analytes and 1,2,3,7,8-PCDD comprise the largest fractions of total toxic
P:\ROANOK E\Rl FS _ SAP\ECO _ SA P\FINALSAP\FNL _SAP. Wl'D 2-4
•
•
•
equivalents (dioxin) (TEQs).
TCDD TEQs in osprey eggs from the study area (geometric mean 33 pg/g; range I 6 to
68 pg/g) were significantly higher than TEQs for eggs from the control area (geometric
mean< 5.0 pg/g).
Mercury in osprey eggs from western Albermarle Sound (geometric mean of 0.02 ug/g)
was significantly lower than mercury in the control area (geometric mean of 0.06 ug/g).
Annual average clutch size, young fledged per active nest and young fledged per
successful nest appear normal and did not differ appreciably from productivity of
ospreys breeding within the control area.
There was no significant relationship between reproductive success and TCDD TEQs
for western Albermarle Sound ospreys.
Also in 1996, FWS presented the results of a study investigating dioxins and furans in wood
duck eggs from the Lower Roanoke River (Beeman and Augspurger, 1996). The results of the
study include:
The 2,3,7,8-TCDD isomer was found in all eggs sampled from the Roanoke River, but
not from the reference area. The 2,3,7,8-TCDF was found in all eggs from the Roanoke
River as well as the reference area.
Twenty percent of the clutches sampled had levels ofTCDD TEQs that were at or above
those reported in the literature to be associated with reproductive impainnent in wood
ducks.
There was no relationship demonstrated in the current study between hatching success
or survivorship and residue analysis.
Previous Investigations -Sampling Reconnaissance
A sampling reconnaissance visit was conducted by SESD, ERT, and COM Federal during March
1999 to conduct preliminary sediment sampling for chemical analysis, and to determine if target
aquatic species were present in sufficient numbers for planned sample collection. A total of 12
river sediment and wetland soil samples were collected at 4 transects along the Roanoke River,
from upstream of the Weyerhaeuser Facility to the Albermarle Sound. Samples were analyzed
P:\ROANOK E\Rl FS _ SA Pl ECO_ SA P\FJNA LSA PIFNL _ SAP. WPD 2-5
I
I
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
for metals, extractable organics, pesticides, and dioxins. Findings of the site visit include:
• Aluminum in sediments is elevated up to three orders of magnitude higher than Region
IV sediment screening level values throughout the length of the river that was sampled.
Other metals that slightly exceeded Region IV sediment screening level values included
copper, lead, nickel, and zinc.
Seven of the 12 sediment samples were analyzed for dioxins. Of these, two of the
highest concentrations occurred in wetland soils near Welch Creek and downstream of
the Georgia-Pacific facility.
The highest concentration of pesticides (i.e., DDT) occurred in wetland soils
downstream of the Georgia-Pacific facility.
Previous Investigations -Sampling Assessment Visit
A site sampling assessment visit was conducted during May 1999 to identify sedimentation/
depositional locations where representative sediment samples can be collected, and to conduct
preliminary chemical analysis on sediment samples collected in the river and wetlands at four
transect locations. Findings of the site visit include:
The river can be characterized as a low energy flow system that is driven greatly by tidal
influence near the sound. Upstream flow is controlled by a series of dams. The flow of
the river at the time of the visit was approximately 6,000 to 8,000 cubic feet per second.
Most of the sediments within the river are very fine grained and can be described as clay
to silty clay with high organic matter content. Suspended sediments are deposited
primarily along the banks of the river. Unconsolidated sediment depths range from Oto
greater than 20 feet. The center of the river channel has little or no fine sediment and has
a sand bottom because this is the highest energy part of the river. Periodic barge traffic
also keeps the fine-grained material in the center channel in suspension.
The Weyerhaeuser site and the Georgia-Pacific facilities are located on an outside bend
of the river. The Weyerhaeuser facility has a bulkhead along the river which reduces
sedimentation next to the site. These locations are not depositional environments. Any
contaminated sediments entering the river at these locations are likely to disperse and be
transported downstream. The depositional environment for this section of the river is
along the banks, primarily inside bends, and the sound.
P:\ROA NOKE\Rl FS _ SAP\ECO _ SA P\FIN ALSAP\FN L _SAP. WPD 2 ·6
•
•
2.2
Elevated concentrations (i.e., greater than Region IV sediment screening level values) of
dioxins (reported as TEQs) were found in all sediment and wetland samples for which
data have been received (i.e.,.8 of 12 samples). ·
DDT was found in elevated concentrations in one of the wetland samples .
Aluminum was elevated up to three orders of magnitude above Region IV screening
level values throughout the river; and other metals, such as copper, lead, nickel, and zinc
in sediments were elevated at various locations along the river.
SITE GEOLOGY AND HYDROGEOLOGY
The geology in the vicinity of the Lower Roanoke River consists of approximately 50 feet of
sand interbedded with silt, clay, and peat overlying the Yorktown Formation, a sandy
fossiliferous clay. The Yorktown Formation overlies the Castle Hayne Formation, which occurs
at a depth of approximately 120 feet below ground surface. The Castle Hayne Formation is
composed of limestone, sandy limestone, and sand and comprises the primary source of potable
water in the area. The Yorktown Formation grades from a greenish-gray sand at the top to a
greenish-gray clay at the bottom. The clay unit of the Yorktown Formation has a minimum
thickness of IO feet with typical values of hydraulic conductivity for marine clay ranging
between IO·' to-I 0-9 emfs. Given its thickness and low hydraulic conductivity, the clay unit
should act as an effective confining unit between the shallow sandy deposits and.the underlying
Castle Hayne Formation, providing protection of the regional water supplies drawn from the
Castle Hayne Formation.
The bulkhead at the Weyerhaeuser plant contains sheet piling which is tied into the confining
clay layer. However, during the RJ which is being conducted in the area of the former Chlorine
Plant, EPA is attempting to determine if the groundwater is discharging to the Roanoke River in
this area.
P:\ROANOKE\RIFS_SAP\ECO _SAP\FINALSAP\FNL_SAP.WPD 2-7
I
I
D
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ii
ii I :I
i :
I
I
I
'
I
I
'
I
I '
I
D
I
1:
'
11
I!.
II,
I',
I
SAP PART 1: FIELD SAMPLING PLAN
P:\ROANOKE\RJ FS _ SA l'\ECO _ SAP\FINALSA l'\FN L_ SAP. IVl'D 2-8
3.0 SAMPLING PROGRAM, RATIONALE, AND LOCATIONS
This SAP for the Roanoke River site has been developed to provide rationale and procedures that
will be followed during the collection of abiotic and biotic media for the characterization of
potential exposures and risks to ecological receptors. Sampling is proposed for wetlands soils,
for sediments within the river, and for representative aquatic biota. The following sections
present the proposed sampling locations and supporting rationale for each sample type.
3.1 WETLAND SOIL SAMPLING
As part of this field investigation, wetland soils just inland from the river banks will be collected
at various locations along the length of the river, starting with a reference location approximately
four miles upstream of the Weyerhaeuser and Georgia/Pacific facilities, and extending to the
mouth of the Roanoke River as it enters Albermarle Sound. The following subsections describe
the rationale, number of samples, and locations for the wetlands soil sampling.
3.1.1 WETLAND SOIL SAMPLING RA TIO NALE
The primary focus of the wetland soil sampling will be to collect samples to determine whether
potential contamination in wetland soils results in direct toxicity to soil invertebrates, and to
estimate bioaccumulation by invertebrates and frogs. The latter will be used to develop site-
specific food chain models. This sampling will include the collection of wetland soils both
upstream and downstream of the Weyerhaeuser and Georgia/Pacific facilities; to facilitate a
comparison of site conditions to local background conditions. At each sample lcoation, a volume
of wetland soils will be collected, homogenized, and split for toxicity testing and chemical
analysis. One portion of the wetland soils will be sent to a laboratory for earthwom1 toxicity
testing and tissue analysis, and a second portion of wetland soils will be sent to a laboratory for
chemical analysis for metals, extractable organics, pesticides/PCBs, dioxins, and total organic
carbon. The data collected will be used to determine if wetland soils at the site are toxic to
P:IROANOKEIRIFS_SAPIECO _SAP\flNALSAPIFNL_SAP.WPD 3-1
I
m
R
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:1
i II
I
'I I
I
;
I
I
I
I
I
i I
'
I
I
I
I
' I
I
I
I I
I !
D
'
D
1:
I
representative soil invertebrates. and the resultant earthworm tissue data and soils analytical data
will be used as exposure input parameters for food chain models to estimate potential risks to
higher trophic-level receptors.
3.1.2 WETLAND SOIL SAMPLE NUMBER AND LOCATIONS
A total of 5 wetland soil sample stations will be located in wetlands adjacent to the Roanoke
River, including one reference location. This will result in the collection of sufficient soil
volume to be split for both a bioassay and chemical analysis. This will include 5 samples to be
sent to a laboratory for the earthworm bioaecumulation bioassay, and 6 samples (i.e., 5 samples
and one duplicate) to be sent to a laboratory for chemical analysis. The number and types of
samples and sample analyses are shown on Tables 3-1 and 3-2.
Wetland soil samples will be collected from five locations just offshore from five of the sediment
sampling transects that have been identified for the nature and extent sampling to characterize the
river. The approximate locations of the wetland soil samples are shown on Plate I. Exact
locations will be determined by the Site Manager in the field and may vary slightly from· the
locations provided on Plate ·I. In general, the transects have been selected to represent areas
upstream from the Weyerhaeuser and Georgia/Pacific facilities, at each of the two facilities,
downstream of Georgia/Pacific, and at the mouth of the Roanoke River. Within each of these
areas, wetland soil sample results from the sample reconnaissance conducted by EPA in the
spring of 1999 were considered in the selection of sample locations. In particular, one of the
reconnaissance wetland sample locations (WHO I BSD) had the highest reported dioxin
concentration (110 ng/kg TEQ) among the samples analyzed, and a second wetland sample
(GP03CSD) had the highest reported concentrations of DDT (88 ug/kg) and the second highest
dioxin concentration (9 I ng/kg TEQ) among the samples analyzed. Both were selected as
sample locations for this SAP (numbered 308 and 303, respectively). Using the selected
sediment transects as a general location, wetlands samples will be collected slightly inland,
where the vegetation density indicates that flood waters would be slowed down, resulting in the
P:\ROANOK E\RI FS _ SA P\ECO _ SA P\FIN ALSAP\FNL _SAP. WPD 3-2
greatest deposition of sediment, and within the I 0-year floodplain. Wetland soil samples will be
split, and one portion submitted to a laboratory for conducting an earthworm bioaccumulation
bioassay, and a second portion will be submitted to a laboratory for chemical analysis. The
earthworm tissues at the completion of the bioaccumulation bioassay will be analyzed for
SVOCs, dioxins, target analyte list (TAL) metals, and pesticides/PCBs, while soils will be
analyzed for these constituents plus TOC, as listed in Table 3-1.
3.2 RIVER SEDIMENT SAMPLING
As part of this field investigation, river sediments will be collected at various locations along the
length of the river, starting with a reference location approximately four miles upstream of the
Weyerhaeuser facility, and extending to the mouth of the Roanoke River as it enters Albermarle
Sound. The following subsections describe the rationale, number of samples, and locations for
the river sediment sampling.
3.2.1 SEDIMENT SAMPLING RATIONALE
The primary objective of the river sediment sampling is to determine whether contamination in
river sediments results in direct toxicity to benthic macroinvertebrates, to estimate
bioaccumulation in benthic macroinvertebrates for use in site-specific food chain models, and to
compare with measured tissue concentrations in fish and clams. This sampling will include the
collection of river sediments both upstream and downstream of the Weyerhaeuser and
Georgia/Pacific facilities to facilitate a comparison of site conditions to local background
conditions. Split samples will be collected at each location and sent to laboratories for
conducting bioaccumulation tests using a benthic macroinvertebrate such as Hexagenia (mayfly
larvae), for conducting toxicity testing using a benthic macroinvertebrate such as Hya/el/a
(amphipod), and for chemical analysis, as indicated in Tables 3-1 and 3-2. The data collected
will be used to determine if river sediments are toxic to benthic macroinvertebrates, and whether
uptake and bioaccumulation are occurring in selected aquatic receptors.
P:\ROANOKE\RIFS_SAP\ECO_SAP\FINALSAP\FNL_SAP.Wl'D 3-3
I
I
I
D
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ti
ii
I
I
I
I
I
' I
I
I
I '
I
I
I
u
a
D
Ii
3.2.2 SEDIMENT SAMPLING NUMBER AND LOCATION
A total of 6 river sediment sample stations will be located in the Roanoke River, including one
reference location. This will result in the collection of sufficient volume of sediment to be split
for Hexagenia bioaccumulation tests, Hyalella toxicity tests, and chemical analysis. The
number and types of samples and sample analyses are listed in Table 3-1.
The approximate locations of the river sediment samples are presented on Plate I. Exact
locations will be determined by the Site Manager in the field and may vary slightly from the
locations provided in Plate I. In general, the transects were selected to represent areas upstream
from the Weyerhaeuser and Georgia/Pacific facilities, at each of the two facilities, downstream of
Georgia/Pacific, and at the mouth of the Roanoke River. Within each of these areas, river
sediment sample results from the sample reconnaissance conducted by EPA in March of 1999
were considered in the selection of sample locations. In particular, one of the reconnaissance
sediment sample locations (GP03ASD) had elevated dioxin concentrations (62 ng/kg TEQ).
This sample location (i.e., 408) is included in this SAP for sediment and biota collection. In
addition, during the Sampling Assessment visit in May 1999, two locations were noted to have
petroleum-related contamination, as evidenced by black staining in the sediment cores and an
oily sheen when pulled through the water column. These areas were found offshore of the
former chlorine plant and near Welch Creek. These sediment locations ( i.e., 424 and 419) arc
included in this SAP for toxicity testing using Hyalella. All sediment samples will be collected
in sufficient volume to split for chemical analysis; for conducting a bioaccumulation test using
Hexagenia, and for conducting the toxicity tests where specified. Sediment samples will be
analyzed for the constituents indicated in Table 3-1.
3.3 BIOTA SAMPLING
As part of the field investigation, biota samples will be collected at selected locations along the
length of the river, in the adjacent wetlands, and at background locations. The following
P:\ROANOKE\RIFS_SAP\ECO_SAP\FINALSAP\FNL_SAP.WPD 3-4
subsections describe the rationale, number of samples, and locations for the biota sampling.
3.3.1 BIOTA SAMPLING RATIONALE
The primary objective of this effort is to collect target biota samples to determine whether
contamination in river sediments and wetland soils is resulting in exposure and uptake into biota.
Target species for sample collection include:
•
•
a benthic fish, such as channel catfish, carp, or sucker
a forage fish, such as redear sunfish or bluegill
Rangia clams
frogs (species to be determined by ERT)
The benthic fish was selected because it is considered in direct contact with river sediments,
where contaminants such as dioxins are likely to be partitioned. Site-specific tissue
concentrations from benthic fish will be used to confirm exposure and bioavailability, and used
in a food chain model to evaluate potential exposures to larger fish-eating predators. The forage
fish was selected because it is considered a prey item for fish eating birds, such as osprey and
heron, as well as prey for some smaller mammals and certain fish and reptile predators. Site-
specific tissue concentrations from forage fish will also be used to confim1 exposure and
bioavailability, and used in a food chain model to evaluate potential exposures to fish-eating
birds. The Rangia clam was selected because they are abundant in the Roanoke River, they are
sedentary and long-lived, and they are a food item for numerous animals. Site-specific tissue
concentrations from the clams will be used in a food chain model to evaluate potential exposures
to ecological receptors. Frogs were selected because they are in contact with wetland soils and
river sediments as adults, or contact with aquatic media as larvae (tadpoles), and are an important
food item for many higher trophic level receptors. Site-specific tissue concentrations from the
frogs will be_ used in a food chain model to evaluate potential exposures to ecological receptors.
3.3.2 BIOTA SAMPLING NUMBER AND LOCATION
P:\ROANOK E\RI FS _ SA P\ECO _ SA P\FINALSAP\FNL _ SAP. WPD 3-5
I
I
n
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I '
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
m
I
I
1,
I I':
I
A total of20 biota samples will be collected within the river, wetlands areas, and background
locations. This total number of samples includes five samples each of a benthic fish, a forage
fish (rcdear sunfish or bluegill, based on abundance), Rangia clams, and frogs. The number and
types of samples are shown on Tables 3-1 and 3-2.
Biota samples will be collected in conjunction with soil/sediment samples at the following five
general locations:
a background location, approximately 4 miles upstream from the Weyerhaeuser facility,
in the vicinity of 432
downstream of Welch Creek, in the vicinity of 419
between the Weyerhaeuser and Georgia-Pacific facilities, in the vicinity of 413
downstream of the Georgia-Pacific facility, in the vicinity of 408
at the mouth of the Roanoke River, as it enters Albermarle Sound, in the vicinity of
402
The general locations of all samples are identified on Plate I. Exact locations will be determined
in the field by the site manager and may vary slightly from the locations provided on Plate 1.
The sampling strategy will focus on the location and collection of biota samples first, in the
general reaches of the river designated by the targeted sample locations, followed by the
collection of nature and extent samples (including the extra volume of media needed for the
ecological assessment) in those reaches. The samples will be analyzed for SVOCs, TAL metals
(total), pesticides/PCBs, and dioxins, as listed in Table 3-1.
P:\ROANOKE\RJ FS _ SAP\ECO _ SA P\FIN A LSAP\FN L_ SAP. WPD 3-6
ii
II
I
II
I
:1
I
I ii
I
' I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I I
I
I '
I
I
I
D
'
I
I
4.0 FIELD ACTIVITY METHODS AND PROCEDURES
COM Federal will provide technical assistance to the EPA Region IV Science and Ecosystem
Support Division (SESD) and ERT in performing the following sampling-related tasks at the
Lower Roanoke River Site:
• site mobilization/demobilization;
• procurement of equipment, supplies, and containers;
• wetland soil sampling;
• river sediment sampling;
• biota sampling;
• completion of field logbook documentation;
• packaging and shipping of environmental samples;
• equipment decontamination; and
• management of sampling wastes.
It is anticipated that ERT will conduct the frog sampling, SESD will conduct the clam and fish
tissue sampling, and COM Federal will conduct the sediment and soil sampling, and provide
assistance to ERT and SESD where requested.
Where applicable, the subsections in this section reference the Environmental Investigations
Slandard Operaling Procedures and Quality Assurance Manual (EPA, May 1996) (EPA SOPs).
The relevant portions of this document are included in Appendix A.
4.1 SITE MOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION
SESD will identify and provide all necessary personnel, equipment, and materials for
mobilization and demobilization to and from the site for the purpose of conducting soil/sediment
and biological sampling. COM Federal will provide support for the mobilization as requested by
EPA. It is anticipated that equipment and supplies will be stored in EPA vehicles or at the
Georgia-Pacific plant, which will be used as the staging area for the investigation. SESD will
P:\ROANOKE\RIFS_SAP\ECO _SAP\FINALSAP\FNL_SAP. WPD 4-1
I I ii
!
I
!I I
I
I
I
I I
I I
I
·i,
I
i
I
I
I a
I
D.
utilize a portable decontamination area to decontaminate all sampling equipment.
4.2 EQUIPMENT. SUPPLIES, AND CONTAINERS
SESD will provide all equipment and supplies necessary for field activities, including those
required for sampling, health and safety, equipment and personnel decontamination, and general
field operations. All equipment and supplies will be stored in SESD vehicles or in a secured
location at the Georgia-Pacific facility.
All sample containers will be pre-cleaned and traceable to the facility that performed the
cleaning. Sampling containers will not be cleaned or rinsed in the field. A discussion of
required containers and preservatives is included in Section 6.2.2 of this SAP and in Table 4-1.
4.3 WETLAND SOIL SAMPLING PROCEDURE
A total of 11 wetland soil samples will be collected from five locations in wetlands adjacent to
the Roanoke River, including one reference location. This total number of samples includes 5
samples to be sent to a laboratory for the earthworm bioaccumulation bioassay, and 6 samples
(i.e., 5 samples and one duplicate) to be sent to a laboratory for chemical analysis. A double
volume of wetland soil will be collected at each sample location, thoroughly homogenized in the
field, and split prior to submittal for the bioaccumulation test and for chemical analysis.
Thorough homogenization is required since the soil sample from one location will be used for
multiple tests and analyses. It is assumed that homogenization will not significantly alter the
bioavailability or toxicity of chemical constituents in the soil. One rinsate blank sample will also
be collected for these soil samples. One volume of the soil sample will be submitted to a
laboratory (to be determined by ERT) for the earthworm bioaccumulation test. The second
volume of soil will be sent to the EPA Region IV laboratory and analyzed for T AL metals, TCL
SVOCs, TCL pesticides/PCBs, dioxins/furans, TOC, and grain size distribution. In general, EPA
Region IV SOPs (Appendix A) will be followed while collecting wetland soil samples. These
P:\ROANOK EIRI FS _ SAPIECO _ SAPIFINALSAPIFNI ._ SAP. WPD 4-2
I
:I
\I
I
'
!I
I
11 . I
11 I
I '
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
' I
' 0
1.
samples will be submitted for analyses as described in Section 6.0. The methods are identified in
Table 4-1.
The wetland soil samples will be collected from Oto 6 inches below ground surface by using a
hand auger or shovel. The sampling device will be advanced by hand to a depth of one foot,
with the zero to one foot interval comprising the sample. The soil sample will be placed into a
container for homogenization. Homogenization will be performed with a stainless steel spoon.
4.4 RIVER SEDIMENT SAMPLING PROCEDURE
To maximize efficiency, an attempt will be made to concurrently collect biota samples (i.e., fish
and clams) at five of the sediment sample locations selected for nature and extent
characterization, as indicated on Plate I. The successful location and collection of targeted fish
and clam samples will determine whether additional sediment samples will be required at
locations other than those selected for nature and extent sediment characterization. If river biota
samples can be collected at or near locations sampled for nature and extent, river sediment
samples need not be resampled for chemical analysis. However, if biota samples are not located
within 200 feet (clams) to 500 feet (fish) of the selected sediment sample location, an additional
co-located sediment sample for chemical analysis will be required for that biota sample. This
will be determined in the field by the site manager and documented in the field logbook. Double
or triple volumes of sediments will be collected at each location (i.e., the nature and extent
location, or alternative sediment location, co-located with biota samples), thoroughly
homogenized, then split to accommodate multiple tests and analyses, as follows:
•
•
•
•
At the background location, triple volume of sediment will be collected; one for chemical
analysis, one for the Hexagenia bioaccumulation test, and one for the Hyalella toxicity test;
At 424, double volume of sediment will be collected; one for chemical analysis, and one for
the Hya/el/a toxicity test;
At 419, triple volume of sediment will be collected; one for chemical analysis, one for the
Hexagenia bioaccumulation test, and one for the J-fyalella_toxicity test;
At 413, double volume of sediment will be collected; one for chemical analysis, and one for
P:\ROANOK E\RI FS _ SAP\ECO _ SAP\FINALSA l'\FN L _SAP. WPD 4-3
I
I
\I
I
I
11
I
\1
I
11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
!
I
I
I I '
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
the Hexagenia bioaccumulation test;
• At 408, double volume of sediment will be collected; one for chemical analysis, and one for
the Hexagenia bioaccumulation test; and
• At 402, double volume of sediment will be collected; one for chemical analysis, and one for
the Hexagenia bioaccumulation test.
The double or triple volume of river sediment will be collected at each sample location,
thoroughly homogenized in the field, and split prior to submittal for the bioaccumulation test,
toxicity test, and chemical analysis. Thorough homogenization is required since the river
sediment sample from one location will be used for multiple tests and analyses. It is assumed
that homogenization will not significantly alter the bioavailability or toxicity of chemical
constituents in the river sediment.
. If new locations arc identified (i.e., other than those locations selected for nature and extent
sampling, in order to be co-located with biota samples), both a duplicate and equipment rinsate
blank will also be collected. In general, EPA Region IV SOPs (Appendix A) will be followed
while collecting river sediment samples. These samples will be submitted for analysis as
described in Section 6.0. The methods are identified in Table 4-1. Chemical analysis includes
T AL metals, TCL SVOCs, TCL pesticides/PCBs, dioxins/furans, and TOC.
The composite sediment samples will be collected from Oto 6 inches below ground surface by
using either an Ogeechee sediment core sampling device to be provided by SESD, or a ponar
grab sampling device provided by ERT. Sampling will be conducted in accordance with the
manufacturer's procedures. !fa complete sediment volume is not obtained, the location will be
moved several feet and re-sampled. If additional volume is required the same device will be used
to collect another sediment sample adjacent to the first location.
4.5 BIOTA SAMPLING
Five frog samples will be collected from the wetlands area in the same proximity as the
soil/sediment samples (within 200 feet). Also, five clam, five benthic fish, and five redear
P:\ROANOKE\RIFS_SAl'\ECO_SAP\FINALSAP\FNL_SAP.\VPD 4-4
I
I
I .
I .
I
I
•
I
I
I
I I
I
I
.
I
I I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
sunfish or bluegill samples will be collected from the Roanoke River in the same proximity as
the river sediment samples (within 200 feet for the clams and within 500 feet for the fish).
Rather than collecting replicate samples at each location, each sample will represent a composite
of eight individuals. This will provide an estimate of the mean concentration in biota for that
location. The biota (frog, clam, and fish) samples will be analyzed for TAL metals, TCL
SVOCs, TCL pesticides/PCBs, and dioxins/furans. In general, EPA Region IV SOPs (Appendix
A) will be followed while collecting biota samples. These samples will be submitted for
analyses as described in Section 6.0. The methods are identified in Table 4-1.
Frog, clam, and fish samples will be collected using methods and procedures provided by either
ERT (i.e., for frog sampling) or SESD (i.e., for clam and fish sampling).
4.6 FIELD LOGBOOK DOCUMENTATION
All documentation will be performed in accordance with Section 3 of the EPA SOPs (EPA, May
1996). Field logbook content is addressed in Section 3.5 of the SOPs. The relevant EPA SOPs
are included in Appendix A.
l':\ROANOKE\RI FS _ SAl'\ECO _ SAP\FINALSA l'\FN L_ SAP. Wl'D 4-5
!I
. ii
I
•
\1
\I
!
\1
I II
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
' ' I
I
I
I .
I ' I
I
' I
I n.
I
I
D
I
I I,
4.7 PACKAGING AND SHIPPING OF SAMPLES
Packaging and shipping of samples is discussed in Section 6.0 of this SAP.
4.8 EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION
Currently, equipment that is expected to require decontamination includes the stainless steel
coring device, the sediment dredge sampler, hand auger or shovel, and the bowls and spoons
used for homogenizing samples. All sampling equipment, including any identified at a later date,
will be decontaminated in accordance with Appendix B or C of the EPA SOi's (EPA, May I 996)
(Appendix A).
4.9 MANAGEMENT OF INVESTIGATION-DERIVED WASTES
The SESD Project Leader will ensure that all investigation-derived wastes (IDW) arc handled in
accordance with Section 5.15 of the EPA SOi's (EPA, May, 1996) (Appendix A). Wastes
generated from sampling activities are likely to include used personal protective equipment
(PPE), and decontamination water and other liquids. It is anticipated that IDW will be left on the
Georgia-Pacific site with IDW generated during the EPA's Georgia-Pacific site field
investigation, or transported back to SESD's facility in Athens, Georgia.
P:\ROANOKE\RIFS_SAP\ECO_SAP\FINALSAP\FNI._SAP.WPD 4-6
ii
I II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I' I
I
I I
I
I
I
I n
I
I
I
I:
1:
I
I;
1.
PART 2: QUALITY ASSURANCE PROJECT PLAN
4-7
\1
I
\I
I
!I I
:1
!I
I
ii
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I .
!
I
I
I I i
5.0 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
This QAPP supports the.RI/FS soil, sediment and biota sampling activities "that will be
performed at the Lower Roanoke River in Plymouth, North Carolina for EPA Work Assignment
No. 030-RlCO-04 l B under EPA Contract No. 68-WS-0022. It was prepared in accordance with
EPA QA/R-5 guidance for preparing QAPPs (EPA 1998), COM Federal's RAC Region Vlll
Quality Management Plan and Quality Assurance Project Plan (COM Federal 1996), and EPA
Region lV requirements. This section covers the basic area of project management, including the
project organization, background and purpose, project description, quality objectives and criteria,
special training, and documentation and records.
5.1 PROJECT ORGANIZATION
Sampling activities will be performed under the direction of EPA, Region IV, using a team
comprised ofSESD, ERT, and COM Federal. COM Federal will provide technical guidance
and assistance in the field, and will be responsible for report preparation. It is anticipated that
laboratory services for chemical analysis will be provided by either SESO, EPA' s contractual
laboratory (dioxin/furan analysis), or EPA Region !V's Contract Laboratory Program (CLP).
Toxicity and bioaccumulation tests will be conducted at a laboratory under contract to ERT.
5.1.1 MANAGEMENT ORGANIZATION
The EPA Region IV Remedial Project Managers for the site are Ms. Jennifer Wendel and Mr.
Ken Mallary.
The COM Federal Project Manager for the Lower Roanoke River Assignment is Ms. Lynne
France. For this sampling investigation Ms. France is responsible for the overall management
and coordination of the following activities:
5-1
I
\1
I I
:I
I
\I
I
ii I
I
ii
'1
I ' I
I
I
i
I
' I
I ' i
I I
I
I I
• maintaining communications with EPA regarding the status of this project;
• .. supervising production and review of deliverables;
• reviewing analytical results;
• tracking work progress against planned budgets and schedules;
• incorporating and informing EPA of changes in the Work Plan, SAP, QAP,
HASP, and/or other project documents;
• notifying the COM Federal Region VIII RAC quality assurance (QA) Manager,
Regional QA Coordinator, or local QA Coordinators immediately of significant
problems affecting the quality of data or the ability to meet project objectives;
• scheduling COM Federal personnel and material resources;
• implementing the quality control (QC) measures specified in CDM Fcderal's
QAPP (CDM Federal 1996a) for this contract, Quality Management Plan (QMP)
(COM Federal 1996b) for this contract, this QAPP, and other project documents;
• implementing corrective actions resulting from staff observations, QA/QC
surveillance, and/or QA audits;
• providing oversight of data management; and
• providing oversight of report preparation.
COM Federal will work as part of a team with EPA's SESD and ERT to complete this field
sampling effort. It is anticipated that EPA SESD personnel will manage all site activities. COM
Federal (Mr. Del Baird, and Ms. Brenda Beatty) will be responsible for providing technical
guidance and assistance in the field. Although Mr. Baird and Ms. Beatty are available to assist,
the SESD Project Leader generally will be responsible for completing the following activities:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
organizing and conducting a field planning meeting;
scheduling and conducting field work;
notifying the analytical laboratories of scheduled sample shipments and
coordinating work activities;
gathering sampling equipment and field logbooks and confirming required sample
bottles and preservatives;
maintaining proper chain-of-custody forms and shipping samples to the analytical
laboratory during sampling events;
ensuring that sampling is conducted in accordance with procedures detailed in this
QAPP and the SAP for this project and that the quantity and location of all
samples meet the requirements of the SAP; and
identifying problems at the field team level, resolving difficulties in consultation
with the QA staff, implementing and documenting corrective action procedures at
5-2
I
\I
I
I
' I I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
'
I
D
I,
I
Ii
the field team level, and providing communication between the field teams and
the EPA Remedial Project Manager.
SESD personnel also will be responsible for completing the following tasks:
•
•
•
coordination with EPA for delivery of appropriate paperwork for sample collection,
custody, and shipping;
scheduling required laboratory analytical services with SESD or CLP; and
distribution of analytical results to appropriate team members .
ERT personnel will be responsible for completing the following tasks:
• collection of frog samples; and
• arranging for the laboratory to conduct toxicity and bioaccumulation tests.
Field team members will assist the Project Leader with sampling activities, sample handling, and
overall documentation.
5.1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ORGANIZATION
The QA program is implemented by CDM Federal's Region VIII RAC QA Manager, Ms.
Gustin. She is independent of the technical staff and reports directly to the President ofCDM
Federal on QA matters. The QA Manager has the authority to objectively review projects and
identify problems, and the authority to use corporate resources, as necessary, to resolve any
quality-related problems.
The Atlanta QA Coordinator for this project, Mr. Tony Jsolda, and the RAC Region VIII
Regional QA Coordinator, Mr. George Delullo, report to Ms. Gustin on QA matters. Under Ms.
Gustin's oversight, they are responsible for the following:
•
•
•
•
Reviewing and approving the project-specific plans;
Directing the overall project QA program;
Maintaining QA oversight of the project;
Reviewing QA sections in project reports, as applicable;
5-3
i 1,1
I
11
\I
I
ii
I
'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I '
I
I
' i
D
' Ii
ii
:
I
I·
I
• Reviewing QA/QC procedures applicable to this project;
• Auditing selected activities of this project performed by COM Federal and
subcontractors, as necessary;
• Initiating, reviewing, and following-up on response actions, as necessary;
• Maintaining awareness of active projects and their QNQC needs;
• Consulting with the COM Federal QA Manager, as needed, on appropriate QA/QC
measures and corrective actions;
• Conducting internal system audits to check on the use of appropriate QA/QC measures, if
applicable;
• Arranging performance audits of measurement activities, as necessary; and
• Providing monthly written reports on QA/QC activity to the COM Federal QA Manager.
5,L3 REPORT ORGANIZATION
This QAPP is organized in accordance with EPA Requirements for Quality Assurance Project
Plans for Environmental Data Operations, EPA QA/R-5, External Review Draft Final, October
1998 (EPA 1998). Section 5.0 presents project management and introductory information.
Section 6.0 provides guidance for measurement and data acquisition. Section 7 .0 details
assessment and oversight aspects of the project, and Section 8.0 describes data validation and
usability issues. References for the entire SAP are listed in Section 9.0.
5.2 BACKGROUND AND PURPOSE
Site background information for the Lower Roanoke River Site is provided in Section 2.0 of this
SAP. The purpose and objectives of the investigation are discussed in Section 1.1 of this SAP.
The purpose of this QAPP is to provide guidance to ensure that all environmentally-related data
collection procedures and measurements are scientifically sound and of known, acceptable, and
documented quality conducted in accordance with the requirements of the project.
5.3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
5-4
;1
I
1:1
111 I
i \I
I
ii
' II
I· i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
! I
I
' ' I
I
0 '
The QAPP addresses the field work that will be performed for the RI/FS to be completed for the
site. Soil/sediment and tissue samples will be collected from locations (including background
locations) in the wetlands area and river. Samples will be analyzed for T AL metals, TCL
SVOCs, TCL pesticides/PCBs, dioxins/furans, TOC, and grain size distribution. Sampling
activities and all associated procedures are described in detail in this QAPP and the SAP.
5.4 QUALITY OB.JECTIVES AND CRITERIA FOR MEASUREMENT
This section provides internal means for control and review so that environmentally-related
measurements and data collected by SESD and CDM Federal are of known quality. The
subsections below describe the data quality objectives (DQOs) (Section 5.4. I) and data
measurement objectives (Section 5.4.2).
5.4.1 DATA QUALITY OB.JECTIVES
The DQO process is a series of planning steps based on the scientific method that are designed to
ensure that the type, quantity, and quality of environmental data used in decision-making are
appropriate for the intended purpose. The EPA has issued guidelines to help data users develop
site-specific DQOs (EPA I 994). The DQO process is intended to:
•
•
•
•
clarify the study objective;
define the most appropriate type of data to collect;
determine the most appropriate conditions from which to collect the data; and
specify acceptable levels of decision errors that will be used as the basis for establishing
the quantity and quality of data needed to support the design.
The goal of the DQO process is to "help assure that data of sufficient quality are obtained to
support remedial response decisions, reduce overall costs of data sampling and analysis
activities, and accelerate project planning and implementation."
5-5
I
11
I
' \I
ii
I
ii
I
i
ii ,,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
'
I
'
I
I
D
II
I:
I:
I
I'
The DQO process specifies project decisions, the data quality required to support those
decisions, specific data types needed, data collection requirements, and analytical techniques
necessary to generate the specified data quality. The process also ensures that the resources
required to generate the data are justified. The DQO process consists of seven steps of which the
output from each step influences the choices that will be made later in the process. These steps
include:
Step I: State the problem;
Step 2: Identify the decision;
Step 3: Identify the inputs to the decision;
Step 4: Define the study boundaries;
. Step 5: Develop a decision rule;
Step 6: Specify tolerable limits on decision errors; and
Step 7: Optimize the design.
During the first six steps of the process, the planning team develops decision performance
criteria (DQOs) that will be used to develop the data collection design. The final step of the
process involves developing the data collection design based on the DQOs. A brief discussion of
these steps and their application to this project is provided below.
5.4.1.1 Step I: State the Problem
The purpose of this step is to describe the problem to be studied so that the focus of the study
will be unambiguous. The objective of the sampling regime is to ascertain potential toxicity of
the Roanoke River sediments and wetland soils and determine the uptake of site-related
contaminants into local biota stemming from industrial operations along the banks of the river.
Soil and sediment samples will be co-located with biota samples. Sampling to characterize the
nature and extent of contamination is described in a separate SAP.
5-6
ii
'
I
ii
I
ii I : !I
I
II ),
I
I '
I
I
I
I
' I
I
I
I I
I
l
I '
I
I
I\
I
' I'
5.4.l.2 Step 2: Identify the Decision
This step identifies what questions the study will attempt to resolve and what actions may result.
The principal study question is:
• Do the contaminants in the wetland soils and Roanoke River sediments have significant
potential to cause adverse effects in exposed ecological receptors?
The following resolution to the question and possible actions have been identified:
• Wetland soils and/or Roanoke River sediments have significant potential to cause adverse
effects:
-Further Action (i.e., development of appropriate remedial alternatives).
Neither wetland soils nor Roanoke River sediments have significant potential to cause adverse
effects:
-No Further Action
5.4.l.3 Step 3: Identify the Inputs to the Decision
The purpose of this step is to identify the information that needs to be obtained and the
measurements that need to be taken to resolve the decision statement. Based on the question
presented in Step I, the following information is required:
•
•
T AL metal, TCL SVOC, TCL pesticide/PCB, dioxin/furan, and TOC
concentrations and grain size distribution of wetland soils and Roanoke River
sediments.
TAL metal, TCL SVOC, TCL pesticide/PCB, and dioxin/furan concentrations in
biota tissue.
5-7
ii I
I
\I
I
:1
I
:1
I
I \I I I
I
I
I I
I
I
• I
I
I
l I I
•
5.4.1.4
Toxicity/bioaccumulation test results using wetland soils and Roanoke River
sediments.
Step 4: Define the Boundaries of the Study
This step defines the spatial and temporal boundaries of the study. The horizontal spatial
boundaries of the monitoring effort are sediments in the Lower Roanoke River, from
approximately 4 miles upstream of the Weyerhaeuser facility, past Huff Island and Rice Island to
the mouth of the river at Albermarle Sound, and adjacent wetlands. The vertical spatial
boundaries are from the natural ground surface to one foot below the top of the wetlands soils
and river bottom sediments. Current data may be compared to historical data; therefore,
temporal boundaries include the time frame from previous investigations (1996) to the end of
this work assignment's period of performance.
5.4.1.5 Step 5: Develop a Decision Rule
The purpose of this step is to define the parameter of interest, specify the action level, and
determine if the concentrations of the constituents contribute to ecological risk. The parameters
of interest are the concentrations of T AL metals, S VOCs, pesticides/PCBs, dioxins, and TOC
and/or grain size distribution in wetlands soil, river sediments, and biota tissue and toxicity
potential of the soil and sediments. These concentrations, distributions, and potentials should
estimate the true values and may be used on an individual (i.e., trichloroethene) basis or
cumulatively (i.e., toxicity). The soil/sediment action levels for each constituent may be
ecotoxicological benchmark values and the action level for the toxicity data may be method-
recommended survival rates. The tissue data will be used in food chain models to estimate daily
doses for target receptors, and the daily dose will be compared to literature-derived no-effects or
low-effects levels.
5-8
I
\1
\I
\I
I
l
I
'
I
I
i
' I
I
I
' I
I I
' ' I.
Ii
'
I'._
5.4.1.6 Step 6: Specify Tolerable Limits on Decision Errors
Decision maker's tolerable limits on decision errors, which are used to establish performance
goals for the data collection design, are specified in this step. Decision makers are interested in
knowing the true.value of the constituent concentrations. Since analytical data can only estimate
these values, decisions that are based on measurement data could be in error (decision error).
There are two reasons why the decision maker may not know the true value of the constituent
concentration, these are:
(1)
(2)
Concentrations may vary over time and space. Limited sampling may
miss some features of this natural variation because it is usually
impossible or impractical to measure every point of a population.
Sampling design error occurs when the sampling design is unable to
capture the complete extent of natural variability that exists in the true
state of the environment.
Analytical methods and instruments are never absolutely perfect, hence a
measurement can only estimate the true value of an environmental sample.
Measurement error refers to a combination of random and systematic
errors that inevitably arise during the various steps to the measurement
process.
The combination of sampling design and measurement error is the total study error. Since it is
impossible to completely eliminate total study error, basing decisions on sample concentrations
may lead to a decision error. The probability of decision error is controlled by adopting a
scientific approach in which the data are used to select between one condition (the null
hypothesis) and another (the alternative hypothesis). The null hypothesis is presumed to be true
in the absence of evidence to the contrary. For this project the null and alternative hypotheses
are defined as follows:
Null Hypothesis: The true values of the constituents are at or below ecotoxicological
benchmark values and/or the toxicity data indicate survival in excess of method-recommended
survival rates.
5-9
' I I I·
I
\I
I
\I
' II
\I
I I
'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I I
I
I
' I
II
I l1
1
I':
I
I 1:
I I',
I
I
Alternative Hypothesis: The alternative hypothesis is that the true values of the constituents are
above the ecotoxicological benchmark values and the toxicity data indicate survival below
method-recommended survival rates.,
A false positive or "Type I" decision error refers to the type of error made when the null
hypothesis is rejected when it is true and a false negative or "Type II" decision error refers to the
type of error made when the null hypothesis is accepted when it is false. For this project, a Type
I decision error would result in deciding that the soil/sediment was contaminated above
ecotoxicological benchmark values or the toxicity results were below method-recommended
survival rates when they are not. A Type II decision error would result in deciding that the site
was not contaminated above ecotoxicological benchmark values or the toxicity results were
above method-recommended survival rates when they are. For example, if the action level for a
constituent is 2,300 milligrams per kilogram (mg/kg), the reported concentration is 2,200 mg/kg,
and the true value is 2,400 mg/kg, a Type I error could easily be made by not applying any
decision error limits. For this project, a Type II error is less acceptable (worse case) than a Type
I error because a Type II error could result in ecological and/or human harm whereas, a Type I
error could result in spending money for further investigating a "clean" site.
The closer the reported concentration is to the action level, the higher the probability that an
incorrect decision will be made and, therefore, there may be a "gray region" surrounding the
action level. No "gray region" has been identified for this case because the action levels already
have an innate conservatism, thereby limiting the possibility of a Type II error near the action
level.
5.4.1.7 Step 7: Optimize the Design for Obtaining Data
This step identifies a resource-effective data collection design for generating data that are
expected to satisfy the DQOs. The data collection design (sampling program) is described in
5-10
I
I
ii
I
I
:1
I
:1
1_1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I , I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
I
1:
I I
detail in the SAP.
5.4.2 DAT A MEASUREMENT OBJECTIVES
All soil/sediment and biota tissue samples will be analyzed for TAL metals, SVOCs,
pesticides/PCBs, and dioxins. The soil/sediment samples will also be analyzed for TOC and
grain size distribution. The wetlands soil samples will be sent to a laboratory for earthworm
toxicity evaluation and the river sediment samples will be sent to a laboratory for Hyalella
toxicity evaluation and Hexagenia bioaccumulation potential. Every reasonable attempt will be
made to obtain a complete set of usable field measurements and analytical data. If a
measurement cannot be obtained or is unusable for any reason, the effect of the missing data will
be evaluated by the COM Federal project manager and COM Federal QA staff. This evaluation
will be reported to EPA with a proposed corrective action.
5.4.2.1 Quality Assurance Guidance
The field QA program has been designed in accordance with COM Federal's RAC VIII QAPP
(COM Federal 1996a), the QMP for this contract (COM Federal 1996b), EPA's Guidance for the
Data Quality Objectives Process (EPA 1994), and the EPA's Requirements for Quality
Assurance Project Plans for Environmental Data Operations (EPA 1997).
5.4.2.2 Precision, Accuracy, Representativeness, Completeness, and Comparability
Criteria
Precision, accuracy, representativeness, completeness, and comparability (PARCC) parameters
are indicators of data quality. PARCC goals are established for the site characterization to aid in
assessing data quality. The following paragraphs define these PARCC parameters in conjunction
with this project.
5-11
I
' :1
I
I :1
I
i
:1 I
' '
:I
I
:1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
' '
I
I
I
I
I
' I
Precision. The precision of a measurement is an expression of mutual agreement among
individual measurements of the same property taken under prescribed similar conditions.
Precision is quantitative and most often expressed in terms ofrelative percent difference (RPD).
Precision of the laboratory analyses will be assessed by comparing initial and duplicate results,
where applicable. The RPD will be calculated for each pair of applicable duplicate analyses
using the following equation:
Where: s
D
RelativePercentDifference = /S -D /l((S +D)/2) x I 00
= First sample value (original value); and
Second sample value ( duplicate value).
Precision of reported results is a function of inherent field-related variability plus laboratory
analytical variability depending on the type of QC sample. Data will be evaluated for precision
using field duplicates. The acceptable RPD limits for field duplicates are less than or equal to 35
for soil/sediment samples as identified in Table 5-1.
Accuracy. Accuracy is the degree of agreement of a measurement with an accepted reference or
true value and is a measure of the bias in a system. Accuracy is quantitative and usually
expressed as the percent recovery (¾R) of a sample result. ¾R is calculated as follows:
Where:
Percent Recovery = SSR -SR I SA x I 00
SSR
SR =
SA
Spiked Sample Result
Sample Result
Spike Added
Field measurement accuracy will be established by taking random multiple measurements.
Variation in data that exceeds 10 percent will be cause for repeat measurements. Accuracy for
laboratory measurements will be in accordance with Table 5-1.
5-12
I
:I
ii
I
:I
I
\I
I
11
••
I
I
I
i
I
' I
i I I
I
I
' I
1,
Representativeness. Representativeness expresses the degree to which sample data accurately
and precisely represent:
•
•
•
the characteristic being measured;
parameter variations at a sampling point; and/or
an environmental condition .
Representativeness is a qualitative and quantitative parameter that is most concerned with the
proper sampling design and the absence of cross-contamination of samples. Acceptable
representativeness will be achieved through (a) careful, inforn1ed selection of sampling sites, (b)
selection of testing parameters and methods that adequately define and characterize the extent of
possible contamination and meet the required parameter reporting limits, © proper gathering and
handling of samples to avoid interferences and prevent contamination and loss, and (d) collection
of a sufficient number of samples to allow characterization. The representativeness will be
assessed qualitatively by reviewing the sampling and analytical procedures and quantitatively by
reviewing the blank samples. If an analyte is detected in a method, preparation, or rinsate blank,
any associated positive result less than five times (IO times for common laboratory
contaminants) may be considered a false positive as identified in Table 5-1.
Completeness. Completeness is a measure of the amount of usable data obtained from a
measurement system compared to the amount that was expected to be obtained under correct
normal conditions. Usability will be determined by evaluation of the PARCC parameters
excluding completeness. Those data that are validated or evaluated and are not considered
estimated or are qualified as estimated or nondetect are considered usable. Rejected data are not
considered usable. A completeness goal of 90% is projected. If this goal is not met, the effect of
not meeting this goal will be discussed by the COM Federal Project Manager and the EPA RPM.
Completeness is calculated using the. following equation:
5-13
•
I
ii
I
I
I' ;I
\I
I
I I
I I
I
I
\
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
Where: DO
DP =
%Completeness~(DOI DP)x I 00
Data Obtained and usable.
Data Planned to be obtained.
Comparability. Comparability is a qualitative parameter. Consistency in the acquisition,
handling, and analysis of samples is necessary for comparing results. Data developed under this
investigation will be collected and analyzed using standard EPA analytical methods and QC to
ensure comparability of results with other analyses performed in a similar manner.
5.4.2.3 Field Measurements
Field measurements that are currently anticipated for this sampling program include depth of
water above top of sediment, depth of soil or sediment (0 to 6 inches) distance from bank for
wetland soil samples, and location of samples with a global positioning system (GPS) unit. The
sediment samples will be collected in relatively shallow water, and the depth to the top of
sediment will be measured with a standard metal measuring tape. The GPS unit will be used in
accordance with manufacturer's instruction.
5.4.2.4 Laboratory Analysis
Analytical methods, reporting limits, holding times, and QC analyses are discussed below and
provided in Tables 5-1 and 5-2.
Analytical Methods
All soil and sediment samples collected during this assignment will be analyzed for TAL metals
using CLP SOW ILM04.0, TCL SVOCs and TCL pesticides/PCBs using CLP SOW OLM03.2,
5-14
I
!
I
I
I
I
I i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I I
11:
I
1:
I
'
1:
dioxin/furans using SW-846 Method 8290, TOC using SW-846 9060, and grain size distribution
using ASTM Method D-422. All biota samples collected during this assignment will be
analyzed for T AL metals using CLP SOW ILM04.0, TCL SVOCs and TCL pesticides/PCBs
using CLP SOW OLM03.2, and dioxins/furans using SW-846 Method 8290.
Laboratories
It is currently anticipated that chemical analysis will be performed by either EPA SESD, and
EPA subcontractual laboratory, or through EPA's Contract Laboratory Program (CLP).
Toxicity/bioaccumulation tests will be conducted by a laboratory to be identified by ERT.
Holding Times
Holding times are storage times allowed between sample collection or sample extraction and
sample analysis (depending on whether the holding time is an extraction or analytical holding
time) when the designated preservation and storage techniques are employed. The holding times
are listed in Table 5-1.
Quality Control Analyses
To provide an external check of the quality of the field procedures and laboratory analyses, two
types of QC samples (duplicate samples and equipment rinsate blanks) will be collected and
analyzed. These samples will only be collected relevant to soil/sediment samples. Blank
samples will be analyzed to check for cross-contamination during equipment decontamination
(rinsate ). Duplicate samples provide a check for sampling and analytical error. Rinsate blanks
and duplicate samples will be analyzed for the same parameters as the environmental samples.
The samples that will be analyzed for QC are discussed in Section 6.4 of this QAPP.
5-15
I
:1
I
111
I
:1
\I
I \I
I
I.I
' I
I
I
' I ' • I
I
I
' ' I
I
I
I
I
'
I
I
' I
I
I
I I\
I
'
5.5 SPECIAL TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
The only special training required for this investigation is the health and safety training, as
described in CDM.Federal's health and safety plan (See Appendix A of the Draft SAP for the
Lower Roanoke River (CDM Federal 1999), the EPA SOPs (Appendix A), SESD site-specific
health and safety plan, and the Float Plan for the SESD boat that will be used for the collection
of sediment and biota samples.
5.6 DOCUMENTATION AND RECORDS
The laboratories will submit analytical data reports to SESD. Each data report will contain a
case narrative that briefly describes the number of samples, the analyses, and any analytical
difficulties or QA/QC issues associated with the submitted samples. The data report will also
include signed chain-of-custody forms, cooler receipt forms (including relevant pl-Is and cooler
temperatures), analytical data, a QC package, and raw data. SESD and the EPA subcontractual
data packages will not be validated prior to delivery to CDM Federal, while, the data packages
provided to CDM Federal through the CLP will have been validated.
5-16
II
I
ii
I
ii I
!I I
ii
I
I
I
I -' ·,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'
i
I
I
I
6.0 MEASUREMENT AND DATA ACQUISITION
This section covers sample process design, sampling methods requirements, sample handling and
custody, analytical methods, QC, equipment maintenance, instrument calibration, supply
acceptance, nondirect measurements, and data management.
6.1 SAMPLE PROCESS DESIGN
The general goal of the field investigation is to verify and quantify the presence or absence of
contamination in the sampling media. The number, types, locations, and analyses of samples are
presented in Section 3.0 of this SAP.
6.2 SAMPLING METHODS REQUIREMENTS
Sampling equipment, containers, and overall field management are described below.
6.2.1 SAMPLING EQUIPMENT AND PREPARATION ;
Sampling equipment required for the field program for environmental sampling, health and
safety monitoring, equipment and personal decontamination, and general field operations will be
provided by SESD.
Field preparatory activities will include review of procedures in EPA SOPs (EPA, May 1996)
included in Appendix A, procurement of field equipment, laboratory coordination, confirmation
of site access, as well as field planning meetings attended by field personnel and QA staff.
6-1
6.2.2 SAMPLE CONTAINERS
All sample containers are listed in Table 4-1 and sampling procedures are detailed in Section 4.0
of the SAP.
6.2.3 SAMPLE COLLECTION, HANDLING, AND SHIPMENT
Samples collected during this field program will consist of soil, sediment, and biota tissue
samples and various QC samples. All sample collection procedures are outlined in the SAP
and/or the EPA Region IV SOPs (EPA 1996). The following EPA Region IV SOPs apply to all
applicable procedures unless otherwise noted in the SAP:
EPA SOi's:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Section 3 -Sample Control, Field Records, and Document Control
Section 5 -Sampling Design and Quality Control Procedures
Section 11 Sediment Sampling
Appendix B -Standard Field Cleaning Procedures
Appendix C -Field Equipment Center Standard Cleaning Procedures
Appendix D -Sample Shipping Procedures
The relevant parts of these sections and appendices as applicable to this project are included in
Appendix A.
6.3 SAMPLE HANDLING AND CUSTODY REQUIREMENTS
Custody and documentation requirements for field work are described below, followed by a
discussion of corrections to documentation.
6.3.1 FIELD SAMPLE CUSTODY AND DOCUMENTATION
6-2·
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
0
u
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The purpose and description of the sample label and the chain-of-custody record arc detailed in
the following sections.
6.3.1.1 Sample Labeling and Identification
An alpha-numeric coding system will uniquely identify each sample collected during the field
investigation. The following paragraphs apply to all sample types except trip blanks.
In addition to the field log books, the sampling team will use labels to track and identify samples,
ensuring sample traceability. A sample label will be secured to each sample container at the time
of collection. Sample labels will contain the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
site nan1c,
sample identification number,
sample matrix,
sample type (grab or composite),
analysis required, and
sample preservation (if required) .
A field sampling team member will complete the remaining information during the sample
collection including:
•
•
•
initials of collector,
date and time of collection, and
comments, if applicable .
Samples collected during the project will be designated using an eight digit alphanumeric code in
the form of: RR-XXX-YYY. The prefix "RR" (Roanoke River) will be used on all sample
designations. The "XXX" represents a three digit alphanumeric sample number corresponding to
the sample collection location. The samples will be numbered as follows:
6-3
301 -399 -Wetlands sample
401 -499 -Roanoke River sample
601 -699 -Duplicate wetlands sample
701 -799 -Duplicate river sample
80 I -899 -Rinsate blank wetlands sample
90 I -999 -Rinsate blank river sample
The duplicate samples will be identified as the regular sample plus 300. For example, sample
RR-701-SDL is a duplicate of sample ofRR-401-SOL. The rinsate blank samples will be
identified as the regular sample plus 400. For example, sample RR-801-SOL is the rinsate blank
of sample ofRR-401-SOL.
The "YYY" represents the next two or three letters which indicate the sample matrix as specified
below:
SOP
SOT
SOP
SOT
FIC
FIR
MAC
ERB
OBF
-Sediment for Parameter Analysis
Sediment for Toxicity Evaluation
-Soil for Parameter Analysis
Soil for Toxicity Evaluation
-Fish, Channel Catfish, carp, sucker, or other benthic species
-Fish, Redear Sunfish or Bluegill
Macroinvertebrate, Clam
Equipment Rinsate Blank
Other Biota, Frog
All soil/sediment samples will be collected from O to 6 inches below ground surface and,
therefore, no depth indicator is necessary. Other third letter designations may be assigned as
conditions warrant, and will be documented in the field logbook.
To insure the continuation of the proper numbering sequence throughout the project, the SESO
FORMS computer program will be used.
6-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
n
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6.3.1.2 CLP Routine Analvtical Sen•ice Papenvork Requirements
Paperwork requirements for shipping environmental samples to CLP laboratories are provided
below. The following requirements are described: CLP Traffic Report/Chain of Custody,
Shipping Logs, CLP sample numbers, sample tags, EPA custody seals, and communication of
shipping information.
CLP Traffic Report/Chain of Custody
CLP Traffic ReporUChain of Custody forms will be used for all samples shipped from the site.
The following items will be conducted when completing the forms:
•
•
•
•
Since each form consists of four copies, the sampler should press hard when completing
the form.
The copies should be distributed in the following manner: the top copy goes to RSCC, the
second copy goes to CLASS, and the bottom two copies are sent with the samples to the
lab. A photocopy of the form should be made for the project files.
Environmental samples must be designated by a dash(-) in the "field QC" column .
The MS/MSD is considered lab QC, not field QC. Do not enter MS/MSD information in
the column used to designate field QC.
CLP Sample Numbers and Labels
The CLP generates unique sample numbers that must be assigned to each sample. The CLP
sample numbers are printed on adhesive labels which are affixed to sample bottles prior to
shipment. Sample numbers will be assigned and transcribed to the Chain of Custody/Traffic
Report by the sampler or field team leader.
Sample Tags
A sample tag will be completed and attached to each sample container. Any voided sample tags
6-5
will be retained in the project file.
EPA Custody Seals
At least two custody seals will be placed across cooler openings in such a way that the seals will
be broken when the cooler is opened. The sampler or field team leader will sign and date
custody seals.
Communicating Shipping Information
The field team leader or designee will notify the CLASS coordinator of all sample shipments.
. The following information will be provided:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
case number;
name of laboratory;
date of shipment;
overnight carrier and airbill number;
number and matrices of samples shipped;
case status; and
sampler's name and phone number.
6.3.1.3 Sample Packaging and Shipping
Samples will be packaged and shipped in accordance with EPA SOP Appendix D which is
included in Appendix A.
6.3.1.4 Field Logbook(s) and Records
Field logbook(s) will be maintained by the field team in accordance with the SAP, Section 4.4.
The field team leader is responsible for maintenance and document control of the field logbooks.
6-6
•
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
n
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6.3.1.5 Photographs
Field teams may photograph appropriate field work activities for documentation purposes.
Photographs will be documented in accordance with EPA SOP Section 3 which is included in
Appendix A.
6.3.2 CORRECTIONS TO AND DEVIATIONS FROM DOCUMENTATION
For the field logbooks, a single strikeout, initialed and dated is required for documentation
changes. The correct information should be entered in close proximity to the erroneous entry.
All deviations from the guiding documents will be recorded in the field logbook(s). Any major I . deviations will be documented according to the either in the field logbook, on change forms, or
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
in a memorandum to the project file.
6.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL SAMPLES
The following types of QC samples will be collected in the field and shipped to the appropriate
subcontractor laboratory for analysis:
•
•
•
Field duplicates;
equipment rinsate blanks; and
preservative blanks.
These types of QC samples are discussed below.
6.4.1 FIELD DUPLICATES
Field duplicates will be collected at a single sampling location, collected identically and
consecutively over a minimum period of time. This type of field duplicate measures the total
system variability (field and laboratory variance). Field duplicates will be collected at a
6-7
minimum frequency of one per 20 samples (5%) per sampling media/sampling technique.
6.4.2 EQUIPMENT RINSA TE BLANKS
If equipment is decontaminated in the field, an equipment rinsate blank will be prepared and
submitted for analysis at a minimum frequency of one per 20 samples per media/sampling
technique (5%). These blanks will consist of analyte-free water poured over the equipment used
to collect the sample after equipment decontamination. The sample identification code will
relate to the sample collected prior to blank collection. It is presently anticipated that equipment
rinsate blanks will be required for soil/sediment samples only.
. 6.4.3 PRESERVATIVE BLANKS
A preservative (or temperature) blank will be prepared for collecting cooler temperature upon
laboratory receipt. The blank is prepared in the field by filling a sample container with tap or
analyte-free water. One preservative blank will be prepared for each cooler.
6.5 INTERNAL QUALITY CONTROL CHECKS
EPA Internal QC Procedures are described in the EPA SOPs, Section 5.14 (included in Appendix
A). These procedures are designed to insure that field sampling teams are provided with
equipment that is suitable for sampling use, and that field sampling is conducted under proper
procedures.
COM Federal internal QC is focused on project deliverables. All project deliverables will
receive technical and QA reviews prior to being issued to EPA, if required. These reviews will
be conducted in accordance with Quality Procedure (QP) 3.2 Technical Document Review and
QP 3.3 Quality Assurance Review (COM Federal 1997). Completed review forn1s will be
6-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
maintained in the project files.
6.6 FIELD INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION PROCEDURES AND FREQUENCY
The only field instrument that is required is a GPS unit. The unit will be checked against a
known location, if available, by taking a reading prior to use during the field effort. If a known
location is not available, a reading will be taken at an established base station on a daily basis.
Check readings will be recorded on calibration forms or field logbooks.
6.7 ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR SUPPLIES
. Prior to acceptance, all supplies and consumables will be inspected to ensure that they are in
satisfactory condition and free of defects.
6.8 DATA MANAGEMENT
Sample results and QC data from the laboratories will be delivered to CDM Federal as a hard-
copied and electronic data package. Electronic copies of all project deliverables, including
graphics, will be maintained by project number. Electronic files will be routinely backed up and
archived.
CDM Federal's local administrative staff has the responsibility for maintaining the document
control system. This system includes a document inventory procedure and a filing system.
Project personnel are responsible for project documents in their possession while working on a
particular task.
6-9
7.0 ASSESSMENT AND OVERSIGHT
Assessments and oversight reports to management are discussed below.
7.1 ASSESSMENTS AND RESPONSE ACTIONS
The RAC VIII QA program includes both self-assessments and independent assessments as
checks on quality of data generated on this work assignment. Self-assessments include
management systems reviews, trend analyses, calculation checking, data validation, and technical
reviews. Independent assessments include office, field, and laboratory audits and performance
audits.
The QMP requires that one field/laboratory audit be performed for every five weeks of field
work that involves sample collection. However, for this work assignment, COM Federal
involvement in the field program will be less than five weeks. Therefore, at this time, no field or
laboratory audit is required. The QMP requires that one office audit be conducted for each 12
month period. Because this work assignment is anticipated to last less than 12 months, no office
audits are currently required.
7.2 REPORTS TO MANAGEMENT
QA reports will be provided to management whenever major quality problems are encountered.
Field staff will note any quality problems in a logbook or other form of documentation. COM
Federal's Project Manager will inform the QA Coordinator upon encountering quality issues that
cannot be immediately corrected.
7-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
8.0 DATA VALIDATION AND USABILITY
Laboratory results will be reviewed for compliance with project objectives. Data validation and
evaluation are discussed in Sections 8.1 and 8.2, respectively.
8.1 VALIDATION PROCESSES
As discussed previously, samples will be analyzed either by SESD, by an EPA contractual
laboratory, or through the CLP. Samples analyzed by the SESD and the contractual laboratory
will not be validated prior to CDM Federal receipt. Samples analyzed through the CLP will be
validated prior to CDM Federal receipt. CDM Federal will not perform any validation of data.
8.2 DATA EVALUATION
One hundred percent of the analytical data will be evaluated for compliance with PARCC
parameter criteria as described in Section 5.0. After validation and evaluation, it will be
determined by CDM Federal if and which data arc usable for their intended purposes.
8-1
9.0 REFERENCES
Augspurger,T. 1996. Productivity and Contaminant Assessment of Ospreys from Western
Albermarle Sound, North Carolina (USA). Poster N. P0947 Presented at the Seventeenth
Annual Meeting of the Society of Environmental Toxicology and Chemistry (SET AC),
November 21, 1996, Washington, DC.
Beeman, D.K, and T. Augspurger, 1996. Dioxins and Furans in Wood Duck Eggs from the
Lower Roanoke River, North Carolina. U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service/Southeast Region/
Atlanta, Georgia. April.
COM Federal Programs Corporation. 1996a. Quality Assurance Project Plan. August.
COM Federal Programs Corporation. 1996b. Quality Management Plan. August.
· COM Federal Programs Corporation. 1999. Technical Standard Operating Procedures Manual.
Revision 11.
COM Federal Programs, and Bertie Counties, North Carolina. Part I -Field Sampling Plan, Part
II -Quality Assurance Project Plan. July 15, I 999.
COM Federal Programs Corporation. 1999. Corporation. 1999. Draft Sampling and Analysis
Plan for Lower Roanoke River Martin, Washington 7a. Quality Implementation Plan.
July.
COM Federal Programs Corporation. 1997b. Quality Assurance Manual, Part Two, Revision 8,
October.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1994a. The National Functional Guidelines for
Inorganic Data Review. February, with current revisions (Inorganic Guidelines).
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1994b. The National Functional Guidelines for
Organic Data Review. February, with current revisions (Organic Guidelines).
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1994c. Guidance for the Data Quality
Objectives Process, EPA QA/G-4. September.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). I 996. Environmental Investigations Standard
Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Manual. May.
9-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
n
0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1997a. Test Methods for Evaluating Solid
Waste, Laboratory Manual, SW-846, 3rd Edition. Update Ill, June.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998. EPA Requirements for Quality Assurance
Project Plans for Environmental Data Operations, QA/R-5. External Review Draft Final,
October.
•
9-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I COM FEDERAL PROGRAMS CORPORATION
SITE LOCATION -LOWER ROANOKE RIVER SITE
Plymouth, North Carolina
• nib&Jdlary ot C-.uip Orn"r • Mo!Ca• I.De. FIGURE 2-1
I
I
I TABLES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
11
I
- --
LOCATION
\Vetbnds \Vatt:r
Soil
Tissue
River Water
Sediment
Tissue
--- - --- ---TABLE 3-1
i\UMBER OF S,\~IPLES, SAZ\IPLE IDEiYrIFICATION, Ai\'D SAMPLE COLLECTION PARAMETERS
TOXICITY/BIOACCUMULATION
EARTllWORM IIYALELLV
1-IEXAGENIA
SOLID
5 + I •
NUZ\tllER OF SAZ\IPLES PER ANALYSES
AQUEOUS
I •
FROG
5
CHEMICAL
CLAZ\I
--
llEi'o'TllIC FISH
5
• 11) alC'lla/llci:agema samples arc tv.o sl.'paratc b10assa) samples. Solid samples include 5 regular and 1 duplicate and aqueous samples arc rmsatc blank samples.
I I I I · One solid nmn1e ncr 20 sam ll'S must be tnr c YO umc for i\lS/MSD ana YSI\.
EXAZ\IPLE SAMPLE IDENTIFICATION PER ANALYSES
TOXICITY/IHOACCUMULATION CHEMICAL (I)
LOCATION MEDIA EARTJIWORM HY ALELL,V SOLID AQUEOUS FROG CLAM BEi\'THIC FISH
IIEXAGENIA
Wetlands Water RR-601-ERB
Soil RR-301-SST RR-301-SSL
Tissue RR-301-OBF
River Water •••ii•••RR'1ll'ERB'••••••··
Si:diment ,,,,,,,:·>-RR~4:5 r::suT:'/'' · -:'/}: RR~.45 J";:SDLf/:::::
Tissue RR-401-h!AC RR-Wl-FIC
--
REDEAR
REDEAR
RR-401-FIR
0 o . . .R,R_~Sl_,-31) fr ,-:··-:-:-:•·•:•:-: IO x I L glass, 4 C +/-2 , llyaldla and Hexagema 1ox1c1ty
-
,RR:;;:;~-6~0~1~-~E~RB"'-'.--I x I L plastic, HNO3 to pl 1<2, T AL iletals
2 x I Lamber glass, 4°C +/-2°; SVOCs RR-401-?-.lAC: 119 gin a zip-lock baggie, v.Tapped in aluminum foil; TAL Metals, SVOCs,
2 x I Lamber glass, 4°C +/-2°; Pesticides/PCBs
2 x I L :rn1ber glass, 4°C +/-2°; Dioxins/Furans
.R,c,R---3~0~1_-~s~s __ T_, __ 5 x ! L gl:iss j:ir, 4°C +/-2°; Earthwom1 Toxicity
_RR_-_3_0_1-_s_s.cL __ , __ 1 x 4 oz glass, 4°C +/-2°; TAL ?-.-ktals
I x 4 oz glass, 4°C +/-2°; SVOCs
I ;,c 8 oz glass, 4°C +/-2°; Pesticides/PCBs
I ;,c 4 oz gl:iss, 4°C +/-2°; Dioxins/Fur:ins
I x 8 oz glass, 4°C +/-2°; Total Organic Cuban
Ix !gal zip-lock baggie (fil!ed); Gr:iin Size Distribution
Pesticides/PCBs, Dioxins/Furans
,R=R~-4~0~1~-~FI~C~c ___ I 19 gin a zip-lock b:iggie, wrapped in aluminum foil; TAL Metals, SVOCs,
Pesticides/PCBs, Dioxins.lFurans
RR-401-FIR: I 19 gin a zip-lock b:iggie, ,\npped in aluminum foil; TAL Metals, SVOCs, ------Pesticides/PCBs, Dioxins/Furans
RR-301-OBF: 119 g in :i zip-Jock baggie, ,napped in aluminum foil, 4°C +/-2"; T AL ?-.let:ils, SVOCs, Pestici<les/PCBs, Dioxins/Furans
:RR4SFERD::/: :::;::TIIIS SAMPLE WILL ONLY llE COLLECTED IF ONE OF TllE RIVER SAMPLES IS NOT A NATURE AND EXTENT SA:'\!PLE.
I x 1 L plastic, IIN03 to pH<2; TAL ilet:ils
2 x I Lamber glass, 4°C +/-2°; SVOCs
2 x I Lamber gl:iss, 4°C +/-2°; Pestici<les/PCBs
2 x I L :imber glass, 4°C +/-2°; Dioxins/Furans
·'RR"=:::4.";"'1-,cs"o"u"'·:,:"',,.,"',,,:·"tTlIIS SAMPLE WILL ONLY BE COLLECTED IF TIIE RIVER LOCATION IS NOT A NATURE AND EXTE/',f LOCATIO.\'.
Ix 4 oz glass, 4°C +/-2°; TAL l\feta!s
I x 4 oz glass, 4°C +/-2°; SVOCs
l x 8 oz glass, 4°C +/-2°; Pesticides/PCBs
l x 4 oz glass, 4°C -+/-2"; Dioxins/Furans
Ix 8 oz glass, 4°C +/-2°; Total Organic Carbon
Ix !gal zip-lock baggie (filkd); Grain Size Distribution
-
--- - --- --- --------
Table 3-2 ·
Samples to be Collected at each Sediment and Wetland Soil Sample Location
Sample Location Sediment Extra Split Extra Split Collect Collect Wetlands Soil Extra Split Collect
Nature and Extent Volume for Volume for Fish Clams Nature and Extent Volume for Frogs
Sampling Hcxagenia Hyalella Sampling Earthworm
Test Test Test
River Sediments
432 X X X X X
424 X X
419 X X X X X
413 X X X X
408 X X X X
402 X X X X
Wetland Soils
310 X X X
308 X X X
305 X X X
303 X X X
301 X X X
--- ------ --- -------
TABLE 4-1
SAMPLE CONTAINERS, PRESERVATION, AND MINIMAL VOLUME/WEIGHT REQUffiEMENT
PARAMETER MEDIA CONTAINER(S) PRESERVATION MINlMAL
(METHODS) VOLUME/WEIGHT
REQUIREMENT (I)
TALMETALS SOLID I x 4 oz dear glass 4°C±2°C 8g
(ILM 04.0) TISSUE 1 x l gal zip-lock baggic• 4°C±2°C 9g
AQUEOUS l x 1 L plastic HNO3 lo pl·l<2 400 mL
SVOCs SOLID I x 8 oz clear glass 4°C±2°C 30 g
(OLM 03.2) TISSUE 1 x 1 gal zip-lock baggic* 4°C±2°C 33 g
AQUEOUS 2 x I L amber glass 4°C±2°C I L
PESTICIDES/PCB, SOLID I x 8 oz clear glass 4°C±2°C 60 g
(OLM 03.2) TISSUE I x I gal zip-lock baggic• 4°C±2°C 66 g
AQUEOUS 2 x I L amber glass 4°C±2°C I L
DIOXINS/FURANS SOLID I x 4 oz clear glass 4°C±2°C 10 g
(SW-846 Method 8290) TISSUE 1 x I gal zip-lock baggic• 4°C±2°C 11 g
· AQUEOUS 2 x I L amber glass 4°C±2°C I L
TOTAL ORGANIC CARBON SOLID I x 8 oz clear glass 4°C±2°C 25 g
(SW-846 Method 9060A)
GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION SOUD l x l gal zip-lock baggic 4°C±2°C 2000 g ••
ASTM DH2)
TOXICITY/EARTHWOR,\IS SOLID I x 1 gal zip-lock baggie (filled) 4°C±2"C 3300 g
ASTM Method E 1676-97)
TOXICITY/HYALELLA SOLID I x I gal ziplock baggie (filled) 4°C±2°C 3300 g
ASTM Method E 1706)
BIOACCUMULATION/HEXAGENIA SOLID 4 x 5 gallon plastic buckets 4°C±2°C 20 gallons
(ASTM Method E 1688-97:i)
FOOTNOTES:
(I) Minimal volume/weight requirements arc based on dry weight and, therefore, more sediment or tissue may be needed.
• All tissue can be placed in one baggic as long as minimal volume/weight requirement is met. All tissue will be \\Tapped in aluminum foil.
• • Assuming U1e largest grain diameter is kss tltan 1 inch. ·
--
PAllA~lETER
{~1ETIIODS)
TAL METALS
(1D10-U)
S\'OC,
(OL)t 0J.2)
-
l'ESTICIDEStl'CBs
{OL.\1 03.1)
DIOXU-.'S!FUR,\_;,·s
(SW-8-16 8290)
TOTAL ORGA..",'JC
CARBON (SW-8-16
9060,\
GRAIN SIZE DIST.
(,\SH1 D 422)
--
TECHNJCAL
IIOLD!NG
Tl}.lE (1)
:.krcury: 2S days
C)~.u1id.:: 14 days
Otl1cr Analytcs·
ISO dap
-
Solid· \.J days (extraction)
(no analrsis holding time)
Aqueous: 7 days (extraction)
40 days (analysis)
Solid: 14 days (extraction)
(no w1alysis holding time)
Aqueous: 7 dd)S (cxtniction)
40 days (analysis)
Solid: 30 clap (e.,trnction)
-15 day-s (ru1alysis)
Aqueous: 35 ,fays (extraction)
•IO cLws (ana!vsis)
NA
---- -- -
TABLE5-1
DATA E\'ALUATION AND VALIUATION CRITERIA (I)
loo
Abundance
Criteria (3)
Resolution
Check and
Pcrfonna:nce
Evaluation
h\i.>;t11res (5)
Chromatogruphic
Resolution and
Ion Abundance
Criteria (6)
NA
NA
Other Anal)tes: 89-1 ! I~--
%RSD <30~1
am!
RRF> 0.05
1'!idpoint standard •1 x
low point concentration
w,d
Resolution between two
adjacent peaks <J~ 90¾
w,d
Recorder deflections:
50 -100!',
w1d
'!-.RSD < 20~1 except up
to two ma be 20 -30!0
NA
NA
~~RSD < 25~'•
w,d
RRF > 0.05
Resolution ~tween two
adjacent µeab >/• 90~0
Md
!'oRSD < 25!"o
!',RSD < 30~0
NA
NA
-
BLANKS
5 x Ruic
5 x Ruic except
10 x Rule for
common
laboratory
crnitaminants
5 x Rule
5 :( Rule
5 x Rule
NA
--
SMCs
(SURROGATES)
NA
Limiu s~cificd
by the Method
(4)
Limits specified
by the Method
(4)
w,d
TCX rct<=ntion
time± 0.05
minutes w1d
OCB retention
time± 0.10
minutes
NA
NA
NA
--
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
--
P,\.RA.\lt:TER
(~l.ETIIODS)
TAL !\l.ETALS
(lUI 0.J.0)
S\'OCs
(OL\I 0J.2)
-
l'ESTICIDESIPCU~
(OL\I OJ.:?)
DIOXL'-S/FURA.'-S
(SW-846 8190)
TOTAL ORGA,','JC
C,\.RIJON (SW-846
9060,\)
GRAL',' SIZE DIST.
(AST.\ID-Ul
- --
LCS
Solid: Limiu cstablisl1ed
by EPA-HISUL\'
Aqueou,s: S0-120~t except
siln!r and antimonr
(no crikria)
Recovety limits
(7)
(required for low
concentration waler data)
Reco1-c1y limit.s
(7)
(required for low
concmtrntion wata data)
NA
NA
- ----TABLE 5-1 (Continurd)
DATA E\'ALUATIO;s; A;s'O \'ALll>ATIOi\' CRITERL\ (1)
LABORATORY
DUPLICATE
lfboth results >5 x CRDL:
Solid: < 35~·0
Aqueous: < 20~1,
If citl1er result < S x CRDL:
Solid: < 2 x CRDL
Aaueous: < 1 x CRDL
NA
NA
< 35~',
75-l25tO
If sample result < 4 x Spike:
75 - I ::!5!0
(post digestion spike
not required for
silver and metClll)')
Advisol)' limits
(8)
(not required for low
concentration water data)
Advisory limits
(8)
• (not required for low
conc.:ntration wat.:r <lata)
80 -120~0
75-125tl
NA
-
Area couna:
-50 to ICKW,
Retention time:
< 30 seconds
NA
Ion ratio limiu. ~,,
Reco\'.: limiu (9)
NA
NA
--
Ifs.ample r.:sult
> 50 X [DL:
<10-A,
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
-----
FIELD
DUPLICATE
Solid: < 50~"0
Aqu.:ous· < 35!"0
Solid: <5~"0
Aqueous:< 35~•
Solid: < 50~-t
Aquww: <35¼
Solid: < 50!',
Aqueous:< 35t'o
< so~•
NA
----.. -------TAIJLE 5-1 (Continut-tl)
OAT,\ E\'ALU,\TION A,"{0 \',U,IUATIO;-.; CIUTERlA (1)
FOOT;\'OTES:
{I) All crit.:ria 11r,: for aqueous, solid, anJ tissue samplcs unlcs.s othcrn·ise noted. Tissue sampl.:s 11T,: treated~ solid samplcs
(2) Holding times arc for swnpl.:s prcser.cd according to Table XX If sample~ arc not prescr,,cd u.s rcquircd, other criteria 111.iy ~ r.:levwil
t)) !on Abundance Crikria·
S\'OCs (OLM OJ.2)
ml, Jon Abundance Criteria
SI 30.0 -80.0~;, of nJz l 98
68 Less tl1an 2.0!'o of m/z 69
69 Present
70 L.:ss than 2.0~0 ofmh 69
!27 25.0 -75.0!'o of m/z 198
I 97 Less than 1.0,oofm/z!SS
198 Base peak. 100~0 rdative abundance
199 5.0-9.0~• ofm/z. 198
275 I 0.0 -30.0~0 of mh: 198
365 Greater than 0.7 5!-0 of m/z 198
-i.n Present, but less than 111./z 4-1J
4-H ,!0.0 -11 0.0~', of mlz 193
w 15.0 -:!4.0¾ ofm/z ,1'12
(-1) Swrogalc Criteria (Percent Rcc01·ery):
S\'OC1 (OU.I OJ.2)
Solid Aqueous:
Nitrobenzene-dS 23 -120!'. 35-11-1¼
2-Fluorobiphenyl 30-115~0 43-116¾
Terphenyl-dl 4 18-137~-33 -141 ~-
Phcnol-dS 24 · 1131/, IO· 11 O~o
2-F]uorophenol 25-}2!~0 21 · 110',0
2,4,6-Tribromophenol 19 • 122°/4 10-123~0
2-Chlorophenol-d,\ (advisory) 20.130,0 33-110!0
1.2-Diddorobenzenc-d-l (11dvisory) 20-130!0 16-I 10!1
Putlddu (OU.1 OJ.2)
Solid· Ac1ueous:
T clnlchloro-m-xylene 30-150!0 JO. 1 so~•
Decaclilorobip!1"11yl 30-150~0 Jo. 1 so~•
(5) For ,.,solution check _mi.xt~es, the dep_1.h_ ~f the v11!1ey_ between two ad1acent peaks must be greater than or cqu11l to 60.0% of the height of 1.he shortu peak.
For perfo:1111:'1ce ev_alua:1on !1llXl~es, ~1e 1111\ial and c_on_tmumg calibration resolution between adjacent peaks must be greater than or equal to 90!0. the ini1i11!
and coot111umg cal1brat1on retent1011 tunes must be w1thu1 the calculated retention time wi.ndov.--s, and the ~• dilferences must be between -25 to -t 25!',.
-
~6) For chromatographic resolution results, the perc.,111 valley between tlie tetrachloro<libenrodio.\ii1 isomers must be< 25~'o and between tlie he.xachlorodiberuochlorodioxin
isomers must be< 50~0. !on Ab1111d,llJCC Ratio Criteria· ·
T elnlch.Jorodibenrodioxins and furans
Pentachlorodibcnzodio.xiiu. w1d fura,u.
l[e.ncldoro<libcnz.odioxiiu w1d fu.r.uu
llcptachloroJil,enio<lioxiiis and furam
Octachlorodibcnz.odioxi.tu w1d fur.uu
Solid ,uid Aqueous:
0.65 · 0.89
1.2·1-1.86
1.05-!.•D
0.83 -1.20
0.76 -1.02
------
------- --TABLE 5-1 (Continued)
DATA EVALUATION ,\SD \',\UD.\TI08 CRITEIUA (l)
FOOTi"OTES (Continutd):
(7) Laboratory Control Sample Criuria (Percem R.:co\·e,y):
S\'OC~ (OL.\I OJ.2)
Phenol
2-Chlorophenol
4-C11loroanilinc
2,4,6-Trichlorophenol
bis (:!-01lorocthyl) ether
N-nitroso-di-n-propylamiiie
I !e.:,;achlorocthauc
bophoronc
1,2,4-Trichloro~nzcne
Naphthalme
2,4-Dinitroto]uene
Dicthylphthaldte
N-nitroso-Oiphenylamine
l!~xachlorob<:1izcne
B<'nzo(a)p)TCUC
Aqueous:
,14. 120~•
58-110~·
35 -93~t
65-110!0
64-JlQ~,t
3.J -102~0
32 -77!0
49 - I 10~0
.14 -96~0
56-160~0
61 . 140~0
76-l0-1~0
35 -120~1•
30 -95~0
55 -95~',
(S) hllltrix Spikefl,,.latri.x Spike Dup!icatc Criteria (Pcrecnt Rccovery / Relative Percent Diffcrcnce)
S\'OC, (OL~I OJ.2)
Phenol
2-Cl1!orophe11ol
1,4-Dichiorobenicnc
N-Nitroso-di-n-propy!amis1c
1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene
4-Chloro-3-mcthylpheno!
Aecnaphtl1cnc
4-Nitrophcnol
2,4-Disiit.Joto!ucne
Pcntachlorophcnol
Pyrenc
Prstiddn (OL\1 0J.2)
ganuna-BIIC
lleptachlor
Aldrin
Dicl<lrin
Emlrin
4-•1'-DDT
Solid:
Solid:
26-90~0/)5
25 -102~• 150
2S-IO-m/27
41 -126~0/JS
38 -107~'t/23
26-!0)~0/)J
]! .\]7•,t/19
11-114!0/50
28 -89~1• / 47
17-109!0/,\7
35 -142!', / 36
46-127~0/50
35 -130!1/ 3!
3.1 -132!0 / ,\]
31 -134~',/3!1
-12 -!39,'t/45
23-134~0/50
Prsticidn (OL~I OJ.2)
g.i..mma-BIIC
Hcptachlor epo.,;:ide
Diddnn
-1,•l'-DDE
Endrin
Endosu!fan
ga.mma-Otlord,mc
Aqueous:
l2-II0~'•/·12
27-123~'./40
36-91'1/./28
41-116~0/JS
39 -9S¼ / 28
23.91,0142
-16-118%/31
!O-SO!t/50
2·\ -96~-l / 38
9-103~',/50
26-127~•/3I
AqucouJ:
56-123~o/l5
40-131~.t:::O
40 -120~.! 22
52-126~0/ IS
56-12B',/21
38-121,0121
--
Aqu,:ous:
56-123~,
74 · 150-/4
33 -130¼
50 -150~0
56 -121~'<
50 · I OO~'t
33 -130•;.
-----
-----
FOOTi\"OTES (Continued):
(9) l,1te11\lll Standard Criteri~ (!on Ratio Limits/Percent Recovery):
2,3, 7 ,8-T etnl chlorodibenwfunm
2,3,7,8-Tetrn chlorodibe1uodioxin
1, 2,3 ,6. 7 .8-Hexachloro<libcnz.odioxin
I , 2,3, 4,6, 7 ,8-Heptachlorodibenzofuran
Octachlorodibenzodioxin
(~)~:@)iJ¥¥it\f{tj:@¼.J*data validation only.
Il'C .. Instnunent Performance Oieck
S!'-.!Cs ~ Standard Monitoring Compow1ds
!CS • !.nterfercnce Check Sample
TAL • Tar-get Am1lyte List
NA~ Not ,\pplicabk
~,RSD "' Percent Relative Stll!ldard Deviation
RR.F • Relati\·c Re1po11sc Factor
SVOCs • Semivolatile Organic Compounds
PCBs ~ Polychlorinated Biphcnyls
TCX • Tctruchloro-m-xylcne
DCB • ~cachlorobiphcnyl
CRDL ~ Contract Required Detection Limit
tDL ~ !..ustrument Detection Limit
11\111 -----TABLE 5-l (Continued)
DATA E\',\l.UATIOX AND VALIDATION CRITERL\ (I)
Solid and Aqueous·
0.65 -0.89 / 40 -135%
0.65 -0.891 40 -\ 35~--
1.05 -l .•Bf 40-135'Vi,
0.88 -1.20 / 40 -135~-•
0.76-l.0l /40-135%
-----I!!!!!!
D
I
I
I
I
I
11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TABLES-2
S,\.\IPLE REPORTI;-.;G LL\lITS (1)
(METHODS)
SOLID (2)
(uii/kp; unles.s otherwise noted)
TAI. METALS (n1efkg) Aluminum '° (ILM 04.0) Antimony 12
Ancnic 23
Barium 40
Bcrylliwn I
Cadmium I
Calcium 1000
Chromium 2
Cobalt 10
Coppccr 5
"'" 20
Lead 0.6
/'-.lagiesiurn 1000
Manganese 3
Mercury 0.0•1
Nickel 8
Potassium 1000
Sdenium I
Silver ' Sodium 1000
Thallium 2
Vanadium 10
Zinc 4
Cvanide 2
TCL SVOC, 2,-1,5-Trichlorophenol 830
(OLM OJ.2) 2-:-."itroanilinc 830
3-Nitrnaniline 830
2,-1-Dinitmphcnol 830
4-Nitrophcnol 830
.J-Nitroanilinc 830
4,6-Dinitro-2-mcthylphenol 830
Pcntachlomphcnol 830
All Other Analvtes 330
TCL PESTICIDES!PCB• All BHCs 1.7
(OL!-1 OJ.2) llcptach!or 1.7
Aldrin 1.7
Hcptachlor Epoxide 1.7
Endosul fan r 1.7
Mctho:~ychlor 17
All Chlordanes 1.7
To:,;aphene l 70
Amclor-1221 67
All Other Aroclo~ 33
All Other Analvtcs 3.3
DIO:X:Ir-;S!FURANS TCDDITCDFIPcCDD/PeCDF 0.001
(SW-846 8290) !uCDD/HxCDF/HpCDD/HpCDF 0.0025
OCDD/OCDF 0005
TOTAi. ORGA .... IC CARBO;-; NA l mg,'kg
(S\V.846 M~thod 9060,\)
GR,UN SIZE DISTRIBITTIO:-; NA NA
AST.\I D 422)
FOOTNOTES:
(I )TI1ese are estimated quantit.ation lirnil.'I (EQL,). EQL, arc the lowest concentration th11t can be reliably achieved
,,.;thin specified limits of precision and accuracy during routine laboratory operating condition.1. Tiic EQL is generally
5 to IO times the method detection limit. However. it may be nominally chO!len within these guidelines to simplify data
reporting. For many ana!ytes, the EQL analyte concentration is selected for the lowest non-zero standard in the
calibration curve. Sample EQLs are highly malri,,,;-dependenl The EQL, listed ,shove are provided for guiddnce and
may not always be achicv,ible
(2) Tisrne samples are con,.irlered solid samples w,Jess otl1erv.iJ<c noted. Solid reporting limil.'I are ba~ed on wet weight.
Normally. data are reported on II dry wcig,ht basis; therefore, reporting !imil.'I will be higher, hillled on the percent dry
weight in each samples
ug/kg • micrognun per kilogram
mg/kg• millignun per kilogram
TAL • Target Anal)1e List
TCL'" Target Compound List
The T AL for metals and the TCU for organic compow1ds arc provided in Appendix B.
T~D • Tctrachlorodibenzodioxin
TCDF • T etrach!orod1benzofuran
PeCDD * Pentachlorodibenzodioxin
PeCDF • Pentachlorodihenzofuran
HxCDD '" Hexachlorodibenzodioxin
HxCDF • He.xachlorodib,mzofuran
HpCDD " Heptachlorod1benzodioxin
HpCDF "' Heptachlorodibenzofurai1
OCDD • Octachlorodibenzodioxi.:1
OCDF • Octachlorodibcnzofuran
.,.
Date: 12-/UJG-1999
M;,ri FU" N.amA: rn~nnk~ w,nmnl.s lvt
CDM
Legend
Plannc.d Sediment and Soil Sample Locatioll for Nature and Ex.tent Sampliug
WcUand Soil Swnple Locatioos foc Earthwoim Bloaccumulation Test;
and Proposed. Location for the Collection of Frogs
Extra Volume of Scdimeru Need<:d for H.;x"'llcn.ia Bioaccwnulation Test and
for Colles:tion ofF~h and Clams
419• Al;terisk Indicates Extra Volume nf Sedime:rn for Hyalclla To.\icity
Te~t
FEDERA.L PROGRAMS CORPORAT lC)N
A Subsidiary of Camp Dresser & McKee Inc.
10000
SCALE 1:52000
0
FEET
5000 10000
.-
H I . L L
Plate 1
Lower Roanoke River Planned Sampling Locations
Lower Roanoke River RI/FS 3280-030
'
"'
•
.. ,
I ~ 1
j
1 I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
APPENDIX A
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
..
Environmental Investigations
Standard Operating Procedures
and
Quality Assurance Manual
May.1996
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Region 4
960 College Station Road
Athens, Georgia 30605-:-2700
7706) 546-3117 .
JUL 2 11999
FPC-DENVER
EISOPQAM
TABLE of CONTENTS
SECTION 1 -Preface ............................................................................................... 1 -

1

1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 1 -1 1.2 Perfonnance Objectives .............................................................................. 1 -

1

1.3 Section Objectives ..................................................................................... 1 -

1

SECTION 2 -Investigations, Inspections, and Overview Activities .................................... 2 -1 2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 2 -1 2.2 Potable Water_ Supply Investigations ............................................................. 2 -

2

2.3 Civil Enforcement Investigations and Studies .................................................. 2 -

3

2.3.1 Introduction ....•......................................................................................... 2 -

3

2.3.2 Facility Entry ............................................................................................ 2 -

3

.

2.3.3 Unreasonable Search and Seizure .................................................................... 2 -

4

2.3 .4. Requesting Information ........... , .................................................................... 2 -5 2.3.5 Photographs .............................................................................................. 2 -5 2.3.6 Split Samples ............................................................................................ 2 -

6

2.4 Criminal Investigations and Studies .............................................................. 2 -

6

2.5 Gean Water Act Compliance Monitoring Inspections ....................................... 2 -

7

2.5 .1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 2 -

7

2.5.2 CWA Inspection Types ................................................................................ 2 -

7

2.5 .3 Study Plans .............................................................................................. 2 -10 2.5.4 NPDES Compliance Inspection Reports ........................................................... 2 -10 2.6 Superfund Investigations, Technical Assistance, and Overview Activities ............ 2 -11 2.6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 2-ll 2.6.2 Superfund Investigation Types ...................................................................... 2-11 2.6.3 Planning for Field Investigative Support .......................................................... 2 -11 2.6.4 Requests for Superfund Studies ..................................................................... 2 -12 2. 6.5 Investigation Study Plans ..................................... : ....................................... 2 -12
2.6.6 Investigation Reports·························································••.······················· 2 -13 2. 7 RCRA Inspections, Investigations, and Overview Activities .............................. 2 -14 2. 7 .1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 2 -14 2.7.2 RCRA Investigation Types ........................................................................... 2 -14 2. 7 .3 Planning for Field Investigative Support .......................................................... 2 -15 2.7.4 Requests for RCRA Studies .......................................................................... 2 -15 2.7.5 Investigation Study Plans ............................................................................. 2 -15 2.7.6 · Investigation Reports .................................................................................. 2 -16 2.8 Underground Storage Tank (UST) Investigations ............................................ 2 -17 2.8.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 2 -17 2.8.2 Investigation Reports .................................................................................. 2 -17 2.9 Underground Injection Control (UIC) Investigations ....................................... 2 -18 2.9 .1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 2 -18 2.9.2 Investigation Reports .................................................................................. 2 -18 2.10 Ambient Air Monitoring Evaluations and Audits ............................................ 2 -19 2. 10.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 2 -19 2.10.2 NAMS/SLAMS Site Evaluations ................................................................... 2-19 Table 2.10.1 -Guidelines for PM,o and SOi NAMS Network Siie: ......................... 2 -20
tlSOPQAM ToC-i ; May 1996
I
I
n
D
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.10.3
2.10.4
2.10.5
2.10.6
2.11
Table 2.10.2 -Population Levels for which NAMS Monitoring of Pollutants other than PM,o and SO, is Required .............................................................. 2 -21 Table 2. 10.3 -Summary of Spacial Scales Usually Needed for SLAMS and NAMS .... 2 -21 State and Local QA Plan Reviews .................................................................. 2 -22 Table 2. 10.4 -Summary of Probe Siting Criteria ................................................ 2 -23 Table 2.10.5 -Minimum Distance berween Sampling Probe and Roadways ............... 2 -24 Perfonnance Audits .................................................................................... 2 -25 National Air Monitoring Audit System ............................................................ 2 -27 National Perfonnance Audit Program .............................................................. 2 -28 Rererences .............................................................................................. 2 -29 Exhibit 2.1 -Hazardous Waste Field Overview Checklist.. ................................... 2 -30 Exhibit 2.2 -State Contractor Overview Checklist ............................................. 2 -45 Exhibit 2.3 -State Program Evaluation -Hazardous Waste Field Activities ............... 2 -48
SECTION 3 -Sample Control, Field Records, and Document Control ............................... 3 -1 3.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 3 -

1

3.2 Sample and Evidence Identification .............................................................. 3 -

2

3.2.1 Sample Identification ................................................................................... 3 -

2

3 .2.2 Photograph Identification .............................................................................. 3 -

3

3.2.3 Identification of Physical Evidence .................................................................. 3 -

3

3.3 Chain or Custody Procedures ...................................................................... 3 -

4

3.3.1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 3 -

4

3.3.2 Sample Custody ......................................................................................... 3 -

4

3.3.3 Doaimentation of Chain-of-Custody ................................................................ 3 -

4

3.3.4 Transfer of Custody with Shipment ................................................................. 3 -7 3.4 Receipt for Samples Form (CERCLA/RCRAJTSCA) ........................................ 3 -

7

3.4.1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 3 -7 3.4.2 Receipt for Samples Fann ............................................................................. 3 -7 3.5 Field Records ........................................................................................... 3 -8 3.6 Document Control ..................................................................................... 3 -

9

3.7 Disposal or Samples or Other Physical Evidence ............................................. 3 -IO 3.8 Field Operations Records Management System (FORMS) ................................ 3 -IO Figure 3-1 -Sample Tag .............................................................................. 3 -1 I Figure 3-2 -EPA Custody Seal ..................................................................... 3 -12 Figure 3-3 -Chain-of-Custody Fann .............................................................. 3 -13 Figure 3-4 -Receipt for Samples Fann ........................................................... 3 -I 4
SECTION 4 -Branch Safety Protocols ....................................................................... .4 -1 4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ .4 -I 4.2 Hazard Communication Procedure .............................................................. .4 -2 4.2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. .4 -

2

4.2.2 Scope ..................................................................................................... .4 -

2

4.2.3 Labels and Other Forms of Warnings .............................................................. .4 -

2

4.2.4 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) ............................................................. .4 -

3

4.2.5 The Hazard Chemical Inventory .................................................................... .4 -3 4.3 Safety Protocols ....................................................................................... .4 -4 4.3.1 Site Safety Officer Duties ............................................................................. 4 -

4

4.3.2 Safety Equipment ...................................................................................... .4 -5
t!SOPQAM ToC-ii • May 1996
°4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6
OSHA Confined Space Entry .. , ........... :· ......................................................... .4 -

5

Entry into Enclosed Areas ........................................................................... .4 -

6

Training Status Tracking System ................................................................... .4 -

6

Site Operations ......................................................................................... .4 -

7

Figure 4-1 -Decontamination Zone for Levels A and B ....................................... 4 -19 Figure 4-2 -Decontamination Zone for Level C ............................................... 4 -20 Exhibit 4.1 -Site Safety Plan ........................................................................ 4 -22
SECTION 5 -Sampling Design and Quality Assurance Procedures ................................... 5 -

1

5.1 Introduction ................................................... : ......................................... 5 -

1

5.2 Definitions .............................................................. : ................................ 5 -

1

5.3 Sampling Design ....................................................................................... 5 -

5

5.3.1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 5 -

5

5.3.2 Representative Sampling ............................................................................... 5 -

5

5.3.3 Stratification anil Heterogeneous Wastes ........................................................... 5 -

5

5.3.4 Specific Sampling Designs ............................................................................ 5 -

6

5.3.5 Determining the Number of Samples to Collect .................................................. 5 -

6

5.3.6 · Authoritative or Directed Sampling ................................................................. 5 -

6

5.3.7 Simple Random Sampling .............................................. : ......•....................... 5 -

6

5.3.8 Systematic Sampling over Time or Space .......................................................... 5 -

6

5.3.9 Stratified Random Sampling .......................................................................... 5 -

7

5.3.10 · Systematic Grid Sampling ............................................................................. 5 -

7

5.4 General Considerations for Sampling Designs ................................................. 5 -

8

5.5 Soil Sampling Designs ................................................................................ 5 -

9

5.5.1 Historical Sampling Data, Site Survey, and Site History ....................................... 5 -

9

5.5.2 Data Quality Objectives (DQOs) ..................................................................... 5 -

9

5.5.3 Authoritative Designs for Soil Investigations ...................................................... 5 -

9

5.5.4 Systematic Grid Sampling Designs for Soil Investigations .................................... 5 -10 5.6 Ground Water Sampling Designs ................................................................ 5 -15 5.6.1 Single Source Iterative Programs ................................................................... 5 -15 5.6.2 Multiple-Source Area Grided Programs ........................................................... 5-16 5.6.3 Typical Ground Wafer Screening Devices ................ ~ ....................................... 5 -16 5.7 Surface Water and Sediment Sampling Designs .............................................. 5 -18 5.7.1 Sampling Site Seiection ......................................•........................................ 5 -18 5.7.2 Rivers, Streams, and Creelcs ......................................................................... ·5 -19 5.7.3 Lakes, Ponds, and Impoundments .................................................................. 5 -21 5.7.4 Estuarine Waters ....................................................................................... 5 -22 5.7.5 Control Stations ........................................................................................ 5 -23 5.8 Waste Sampling Designs ................................ : ........................................... 5 -24 5.8.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 5 -24 5.8.2 Waste Investigation Objectives ...................................................................... 5 -24 5.8.3 Considerations for Waste Sampling Designs ..................................................... 5 -25 5.8.4 Waste Sampling Equipment .......................................................................... 5 -25 5.8.5 Field Screening ......................................................................................... 5 -26
Figure 5-1 -RCRA Waste Characterization Flow Chan ....................................... 5 -27 5.9 Wastewater Sampling Designs ..................................................................... 5 -28 5.10 UST and UIC Sampling Designs .................................................................. 5 -29 5.11 Air Toxics Monitoring Designs .................................................................... 5 -30
5.12 Data Quality Objectives ............................................................................. 5 -31
t!SOPQAM. ToC-iii . May 1996 •
I
I
D
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.13
5.13.1
5.13.2
5.13.3
5.13.4
5.13.5
5.13.6.
5.13.7
5.13.8
5.13.9
5.13.10
5.13.12 .
5.13.13
5.13.14
5.14
5.14.1
5.14.2
5.14.3
5.15
5.15.1
5.15.2
5.15.3
5.16
Specific Sample Collection Quality co·ntrol Procedures .................................... 5 -33 Introduction ............................................................................................. 5 -33 Experience Requiremencs ............................................................................. 5 -33 Traceability Requiremencs ............................................................................ 5 -33 Chain-of-Custody ...................................................................................... 5 -33 Sampling Equipment Construction Material ...................................................... 5 -33 Sample Preservation ................................................................................... 5 -34 Special Precautions for Trace Contaminant Sampling .......................................... 5 -34 Sample Handling and Mixing ........................................................................ 5 -35 Special Handling of Samples for Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) Analysis ........ 5 -35 Estimating Variability ................................................................................. 5 -36 Special Quality Control Procedures for Water Samples for Extractable Organic Compounds, Pesticides, or Herbicides Analysis (Matrix Duplicate) ........................ 5 -38 Special Quality Control Procedures for EPA Contract Laboratories ........................ 5 -38 Special Quality Control Procedures for Dioxins and Furans .................................. 5 -39 Internal Qualify Control Procedures ........................................... , ................ 5 -39 Introduction ............................................................................................. 5 -39 Traceability Requiremencs ............................................................................ 5 -39 Specific Quality Control Checks .................................................................... 5 -4D Investigation Derived Waste (IDW) .............................................................. 5 -41 Types of IDW .......................................................................................... 5 -41 Management of Non-Hazardous IDW .............................................................. 5 -41 Management of Hazardous IDW .................................................................... 5 -42 Table 5.15.1 -Disposal of IDW .................................................................... 5 -43 References ...... , ....................................................................................... 5 -44
SECTION 6 -Design and Installation of Monitoring Wells .............................................. 6 -

I

6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 6 -

1

6.2 Permanent Monitoring Wells -Design Considerations ...................................... 6 -

I

6.3 Drilling Methods ....................................................................................... 6 -

2

6.3.1 Hollow-Stem Auge~ .................................................................................... 6 -

2

6.3.2 Solid-Stem Auger ....................................................................................... 6 -

2

6.3.3 Rotary Methods ......................................................................................... 6 -

3

6.3.4 Other Methods ........................................................................................... 6-4 6.4 Borehole Construction ................................................................................ 6 -

4

6.4.1 Annular Space ........................................................................................... 6 -

4

6.4.2 Overdrilling the Borehole ............................................................................. 6 -

4

. 6.4.4 Filter Pack Seal-Bentonite Pellet Seal (Plug) ...................................................... 6 -5 6.4.5 Grouting the Annular Space .......................................................................... 6 -5 6.4.6 Above Ground Riser Pipe and Outer Protective Casing ......................................... 6-6 6.4.7 Concrete Surface Pad ................................................................................... 6 -

6

6.4.8 Surface Protection-Bumper Guards .................................................................. 6 -

6

6.5 Construction Techniques ............................................................................ 6 -7 6.5.1 Well Installation ......................................................................................... 6-7 6.5.2 Double Cased Wells ........................................................ _. ........................... 6 -

8

6.6 Well Construction Materials ....................................................................... 6 -10 6. 6.1 . Introduction ............................................................................................. 6 -10 6.6.2 . Well Screen and Casing Materials .................................................................. 6-10 6.6.3 Filter Pack Materials .................................................................................. 6 -11
t!SOPQAM ToC -iv May 1996
6.6.4
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.9.1
6.10
6.10.1
6.10.2
6.10.3
6.10.4
6.10.5
6.10.6
Filter Pack and Well Screen Design ...... :· ......................................................... 6 · 11 Safety Procedures for Drilling Activities ................................................... ." ... 6 ·12 Well Development .................................................................................... 6 •13 Well Abandonment ................................................................................... 6 •14 Abandonment Procedures ............................................................................ 6 • 14 Temporary Monitoring Well Installation ...... : ................................................ 6 .15 Initoduction ........... : ................................................................................. 6 •15 _Data Limitation .............................................................................. ~ .......... 6 •15 Temporary Well Materials ........................................................................... 6 · 16 Temporary Monitoring Well Borehole Construction ............................................ 6 • 16 Temporary Monitoring Well Types ................................................................ 6 •16 Backfilling ................. : ............................................................................. 6 • 17
SECTION 7. Ground Water Sampling ....................................................................... 7 • 1 7.1 Introduction ... ." ......................................................................................... 7 • l 7.2 Purging ................................................................................................... 7 · 2 7.2.1 Purging and Purge Adequacy ...... : .................................................................. 7 • 2 Table 7.2.1 • Well Casing Diameter vs. Volume (Gais.)/Feet ofWater. .................... 7. 3 7.2.2 Purging Techniques (Wells Without Plumbing.or In·Place Pumps) ........................... 7. 4 7.2.3 Purging Techniques • Wells with In·Place Plumbing ............................................ 7. 6 7.2.4 Purging Techniques. Temporary Monitoring Wells ............................................. 7. 6 7 .3 Sampling ................................................................................................. 7 • 7 7.3.1 Equipment Available ................................................................................... 7 • 7 7.3.2 Sampling Techniques• Wells with In·Place Plumbing .......................................... 7 • 8 7.3.3 Sampling Techniques. Wells without Plumbing ................................................. 7 • 8 7 .3 .4 Sample Preservation .................................................................................... 7 · 9 7.3.5 Special Sample Collection Procedures .............................................................. 7 • 9 7.3.6 Specific Sampling Equipment Quality Assurance Techniques ................................. 7 ·1 l 7.3.7 Auxiliary Data Collection ............................................................................ 7 ·11 7.4 References ..... · .................................... : .................................................... 7 ·12
SECTION 8 ° Sampling of Potable Water Supplies
8.1 Introduction ........................................................... : ................................. 8 · l 8.2 Sampling Site Selection .............................................................................. 8 · 1 8.3. ·Reference ................................................................................................. 8 · 3
SECTION 9 · Wastewater Sampling .......................................................................... :9 · 1 9.1 Introduction· ............................................................................................. 9 · 1 9.2 Site Selection ............................................................................................ 9 • 2 9.2.1 Influent ........................................................ : ............ .-.............................. 9 · 2 9.2.2 Effluent ................................................................................................... 9 · 2 9.2.3 Pond and Lagoon Sampling ........................................................................... 9 · 2 9.3 Sample Types ........................................................................................... 9 · 3 9.3.1 Grab Samples : ........................................................................................... 9 · 3 9.3.2 Composite Samples ..................................................................................... 9 · 3 9.4 Use of Automatic Samplers ......................................................................... 9 · 4 9.4.1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 9 · 4
ToC. V May 1996
I
I
I
I
I
I
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
9.4.2
9.4.3
9.4.4
9.4.5
9.4.6
9.5
9.6
9.6.1
9.6.2
9.6.3
9.6.4
9.7
9.8
9.9
Conventional Sampling (Inorganic Parameters) .................................................... 9 -5 Metals ......... : ........................................................................................... 9 -5 Extractable Organic Compounds, Pesticides, and PCBs ........................................ 9 -

5

Automatic Sampler Security .......................................................................... 9 -6 Automatic Sampler Maintenance, Calibration, and Quality Control. ......................... 9 -

6

Manual Sampling ...................................................................................... 9 -

6

Special Sample Collection Procedures ............................................................ 9 -

7

Organic Compounds and Metals ..................................................................... 9 -

7

Bacteriological •.......................................................................................... 9 -7 Immiscible Liquids/Oil and Grease .................................................................. 9 -7 Volatile Organic Compounds ......................................................................... 9 -8 Special Process Control Samples and Tests ..................................................... 9 -

8

Supplementary Data Collection ..................... : .............................................. 9 -9 References .............................................................................................. 9 -10
SECTION 10 -Surface Water Sampling ..................................................................... 10-I IO.I Introduction ............................................................................................ 10-1 10.2 Surface Water Sampling Equipment ............................................................ 10-1 10.2.1 Dipping Using Sample Container. .................................................................. 10-1 10.2.2 Scoops .................................................................................................... 10-1 10.2.3 Peristaltic Pumps ....................................................................................... 10-1 10.2.4 Discreet Depth Samplers ............................................................................. 10-2 10.2.5 Bailers .......... : ........... c ...••••..•••..•••....•...•••..•••..•...••...••...•••..•••.••••..•••.•••..•••• 10-2 10.2.6 Bucl::ets ................................................................................................... 10-2
SECTION 11 -Sediment Sampling ............................................................................ 11-l 11.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 11-1 11.2 Sediment Sampling Equipment ................................................................... II-1 11.2.1 Scoops and Spoons .................................................................................... 11-1 11.2.2 Dredges·············~··················································································· I I-2 11.2.3 Coring .................................................................................................... 11-2
SECTION 12 -Soil Sampling ................................................................................... 12-1 U.I Introduction ............................................................................................ 12-l 12.2 Equipment .............................................................................................. 12-1 12.3 Sampling Methodology .............................................................................. 12-2 12.3.1 Manual (Hand Operated) Collection Techniques and Equipment.. ........................... 12-2 12.3.2 Powered Sampling Devices .......................................................................... 12-3 12.4 Special Techniques and Considerations ........................................................ 12-4 12.4.1 Collection of Soil Samples for Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) Analysis ............ 12-4 12.4.2 Dressing Soil Surfaces ................................................................................ 12-4 12.4.3 Sample Mixing ......................................................................................... 12-4 12.4.4 Special Precautions for Trace Contaminant Soil Sampling .................................... 12-5 12.4.5 Specific Sampling Equipment Quality Assurance Techniques 12-5
""EISOPQAM ToC. vi May 19%
SECTION 13 -Waste Sampling ..................... ~ ..................................................... ; .... 13-I 13.1 lµtroduction ." .................... : ...................................................................... 13-I 13.1.1 Safety ..................................................................................................... 13-I 13 .1.2 Quality Control Procedures .......................................................................... 13-I 13.1.3 Colleaion of Auxiliary Information and Data .................................................... 13-2 13.2 Waste Unit Types ............................................................................ , ........ 13-2 13.2.1 Open Units .................. : ........................................................................... 13-2 13.2.2 Closed Units ............................................................................................ 13-3 •·· 13.3 Equipment .............................................................................................. 13-4 13 .3 .1 Waste Sampling Equipment. ........ ; ................................................................ 13-4 13.3.2 Ancillary Equipment for Waste Sampling ......................................................... 13-4
13.4
13.4.1
13.4.2
13.4.3
13.4.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
Table 13.3.1 -Sampling Equipment for Various Waste Units ................................ 13-5 Waste Sampling Proqdures ........................... : ........................................... 13-6 Waste Piles .............................................................................................. 13-6 Surfuce Impoundments ................................................................................ I 3-6 Drums ......... :: ......................................................................................... 13-6 Figure 13-1 -Drum Data Form ..................................................................... 13-8 Tanks ....................................................................................... : ............. 13-9 Miscellaneous Contaminated Materials ........................................................ 13-10 Waste Sample Handling Procedures ............................................................ 13-11 Particle Size Reduction ............................................................................. 13-12 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
SECTION 14 -Ambient Air Monitoring ..................................................................... 14-I 14.1
14.1.1
14.1.2
14.1.3
14.1.4
14.1.5
14.1.6
14.1.7
14.2
14.2.1
14.2.2
Introduction ............................................................................................ 14-I Formaldehyde Sampling Using Dinitrophenylhydrazine Cartridges Using
Method TO-II: ......................................................................................... 14-I Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) Sampling with SUMMA0 El=opolished
Stainless Steel Canisters Using Method T0-14 .................................................. 14-3 Sampling for Semi-Volatile Organic Compounds (SVOC) Analysis with
High Vofume PUP Samplers Using Methods TO-4 & T0-13 ................................ 14-3 Colleaing·SampJes-for Metals Analysis Using the High Volume Sampler. ................ 14-6 Sampling and Analysis of Mercury in Ambient Air Using Arizona Instrument• Mercury Dosimeter Tubes and .the Model 511 Gold Film Mercury Vapor Analyzer .... 14-7 Sampling for Dioxin and Dibenzofuran Analyses with High Volume
PUP Samplers Using Method T0-9 ................................................................ 14-9 Mercury Sampling Using Gold-Coated Glass Bead Tubes .................................... 14-10 Criteria Pollutant Monitoring (Reference Monitors) for Alr Pollutants
for which National Ambient Air Quality Standards have been established .......... 14-12 Monitoring Orone in Ambient Air ................................................................ 14-12 Sampling of Paniculate Matter in Ambient Air as PM10 ...................................... 14-13
SECTION 15 -F1eld Physical Measurements ............................................................... 15-I 15.1 Introduction .............. : ............................................................................. 15-I 15.2 Horizontal Location Surveys ....................................................................... 15-I 15.2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 15-I 15.2.2 Equipment Available .................................................................................. 15-3 15.2.3 Specific Equipment Quality Control Procedures ................................................. 15-3
t!SOPQAM ToC -vii ·.-May 19%
I
I
I
D
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
15.2.4
15.2.5
15.3
---15.3.1
15.3.2
15.3.3
15.3.4
15.3.5
15.4
· 15.4.1
15.4.2
15.4.3
15.5
15.5.1
15.5.2
15.5.3
15.6
15.6.1
15.6.2
15.6.3
15.7
15.7.1
15.7.2
15.7.3
15.8
15.8.1
15.8.2
15.8.3
15.8.4
15.8.5
15.9
Procedures for Traversing .................. :· ......................................................... 15-4 Figure 15.2.1 ........................................................................................... 15-5 Figure 15.2.2 ........................................................................................... 15-5 Figure 15.2.3 ........................................................................................... 15-6 Figure 15.2.4 ........................................................................................... 15-8 Procedures for Differential GPS .................................................................... 15-8 Figure 15.2.5 ........................................................................................... 15-9 V~cal Location (Elevation) Surveys .......................................................... 15-10 Introduction ......... : .................................................................................. 15-10 Equipment Available ................................................................................. 15-11 Specific Equipment Quality Control Procedures ................................................ 15-11 Procedures for Differential Leveling .............................................................. 15-11 Figure 15.3.1 .......................................................................................... 15-12 Procedures for Trigonometric Leveling .......................................................... 15-13 Figure 15.3.2 .......................................................................................... 15-13 Figure 15.3.3 .. .' ....................................................................................... 15-14 Figure 15.3.4 .......................................................................................... 15-15 Bathymetry ............................................................................................ 15-16 Procedures .............................................................................................. 15-16 Equipment Available ................................................................................. 15-16 Specific Equipment Quality Control Procedures ................................................ 15-16 Surface Water Stage/Tape Downs ............................................................... 15-17 Procedures .............................................................................................. 15-17 Equipment Available ................................................................................. 15-17 Specific Equipment Quality Control Procedures ................................................ 15-17 11me-ora Travel .............. : ........................................................................ 15-19 Introduction ............................................................................................ 15-19 Procedures .............................................................................................. 15-19 Equipment Available ................................................................................. 15-21 Dilution Studies ...................................................................................... 15-21 Procedures .............................................................................................. 15-21 Equipment Availabl~ ..... -............................................................................ 15-23 Specific Equipment Quality Control Procedures ................................................ 15-23 Ground Water Level Measurements ............................................................ 15-24 General ....... -........................................................................................... 15-24 Spedfic·Ground Water Level Measuring Techniques .......................................... 15-24 Total Well Depth Measurement Techniques ..................................................... 15-25 Equipment Available .................................................................................. 15-25 Specific Quality Control Procedures .............................................................. 15-25 References ............................................................................................. 15-26
SECTION 16 -Field Measurable Physical/Chemical Characteristics ................................. 16-I 16.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 16-I 16.2 Temperature ........................................................................................... 16-2 16.3 Specific Conductance (Conductivity) ............................................................ 16-3 16.4 Hydrogen Ion Concentration (pH) ............................................................... 16-4 16.5 Turbidity ................................................................................................ 16-6 16.6 Salinity .................................................................................................. 16-7 16. 7 Dissolved Oxygen (DO) .............................................................................. 16-8
7:ISOPQAM ToC -viii May 1996
16.8
16.9
16.10
16.11
Total Residual Chlorine_. .................. :: ................................................... : ... 16-10 Flash Point ......................................................................................... : .. 16-13 Halogen Test .......................................................................................... 16-15 References ............................................................................................. 16-16
SECTION 17 -Air Monitoring Safety Equipment Calibration Procedures ......................... 17-l 17.1
... 17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5
17.6
17.7
17.8
Introduction ................................................... ; ........................................ 17-1 MSA Model 260 Combustible Gas and Oxygen Alarm ..................................... 17-3 Photovac Microtip Photoionization Detector .................................................. 17-5 Toxic Vapor Analyzer (TVA 1000A) ........................................................... 17-11 Century Model OVA-128 Organic Vapor Analyzer ........................................ 17-24 HNu Model Pl 101 Photoionization Detector ................................................. 17-26 Ludlum Model 3 Radiation Survey Meter ...... ~ ............................................. 17-27 MiniRAE ........ , ........... : .......................................................................... 17-28
SECTION 18-Flow Measurement ............................................................................ 18-l 18.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 18-1 18.2 Wastewater Flow Measurement.. ................................................................. 18-2 18.2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 18-2 18.2.2 Site Selection ............................................................................................ 18-2 18.2.3 Flow Measurement Systems ......................................................................... 18-2 18.2.4 Use of Existing Flow Measurement Systems ..................................................... 18-3 18.2.5 Specific Techniques .................................................................................... 18-3 18.2.6 Open Channel Flow Measurements ..................... , .......................................... 18-4 18.2.7 Closed Conduit Flow Measurements ............................................................... 18-6 18.3 Surface Water Flow Measurements .............................................................. 18-7 18.3.l Introduction .................. : .......................................................................... 18-7 18.3.2 Techniques .............................................................................................. 18-7 18.4 General Quality Assurance Procedures ......................................................... 18-8 18.5 Equipment .......... _ .................................................................................. 18-8 18.6 Specific Equipment Quality Control Procedures ................................. : ........... 18-9 18.7 References ...................... : ...................................................................... 18-11
APPENDIX A -Recommended Containers, Holding Times, & Preservation ...................... A -l
APPENDIX B -Standard Field Cleaning Procedures ..................................................... B -

l

B. l Introduction ............................................................................................ B -

l

B.1.1 Specifications for Cleaning Materials .............................................................. B -l B.1.2 Handling and Containers for Cleaning Solutions ................................................ B -

2

B.1.3 Disposal of Solvent Cleaning Solutions ........................................................... B -

2

B.1.4 Equipment Contaminated with Concentrated Wastes ........................................... B -

2

B.1.5 Safety Procedures for Field Cleaning Operations ......... : ...................................... B -

3

B.1.6 Handling of Cleaned Equipment .................................................................... B -

3

B.2 Field Equipment Cleaning Procedures ..................................... _ ..................... B -

3

B.2.1 Specifications for Decontamination Pads .......................................................... B -

3

B.2.2 "Classic Parameter" Sampling Equipment ........................................................ B -

4

"EISOPQAM ToC • ix May 1996
I
I
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.2.3
B.2.4
B.2.5
B.2.6
B.2.7
B.2.8
B.3
... B.3.1
B.3.2
B.3.3
B.3.4
B.4
Sampling Equipment used for the Collection of Trace Organic and Inorganic Compounds ................................................................................. B -4 Well Sounders or Tapes .............................................................................. B -5 Fultz• Pump Cleaning ................................................................................ B -5 Goulds• Pump Cleaning Procedure ................................................................. B -5 Redi-F102• Pump ................................................................. ." ..................... B -6 Automatic Sampler Tubing ................................................................. : ......... B -6 Downhole Drilling Equipment.. ................................................................... B -6 Introduction ........................... : ................................................................. B -6 Preliminary Cleaning and Inspection ............................................................... B -7 Drill Rig Field Cleaning Procedure ................................................................ B -7 Field Cleaning Procedure for Drilling Equipment. ............... '. .............................. B -8 Emergency Disposal Sample Container Cleaning ............................................ B -8
APPENDIX C -Field Equipment Center Standard Cleaning Procedures ........................... C -I C.1
C.1.1
C.1.2
C.1.3
C.1.4
C.1.5
C.1.6 c.i
C.2.1
C.2.2
C.2.3
C.3
C.3.1
C.3.2
C.3.3
C.3.4
C.3.5
C.3.6
C.3.7
C.3.8 ·
C.3.9
C.4
C.4.1
C.4.2
C.4.3
C.4.4
C.5
C.5.1
C.5.2
C.5.3
C.5.4
C.5.5
C.5.6
C.5.7
""EISOPQAM
Introduction ............................................................................................ C -l Specifications for Cleaning Materials .............................................................. C -

1

Handling and Containers for Cleaning Solutions ................................................ C -2 Disposal of Spent Cleaning Solutions .............................................................. C -2 Safety Procedures for Cleaning Operations ....................................................... C -3 Handling and Labeling of Cleaned Equipment ................................................... C -3 Initial Processing of Rerurned Equipment.. ....................................................... C -4 Trace Organic and Inorganic Constituent Sampling Equipment ........................ C -4 Teflon• and Glass ...................................................................................... C -4 Stainless Steel or Steel ................................................................................ C -5 Reusable Composite Sample and OrganidAnalyte Free Water Containers ................. C -5 Automatic Wastewater Sampling Equipment ................................................. C -5 1sco• and other Automatic Samplers .............................................................. C -5 Isco• 1680, 2700, and 3700 Rotary Funnel, Distributor, and Metal Tube ................ C -5 All Sampler Headers .................................................................................. C -6 Reusable Glass Co[!lposite Sample Containers ................................................... C -6 Plastic Reusable Composite Sample Containers (2700 -5 gal., 3700 -4 gal.) ............ C -6 1sco• 1680 Glass Sequential Sample Bottles .................................................... C -7 rsco• 1680,·2100, and 3700 Glass Sequential Bottles for GC/MS Analyses .............. C -7 Bottle Siphons for Composite Containers ......................................................... C -

7

Reusable Teflon• Composite Mixer Rods ......................................................... C -

7

Cleaning Procedures for Tubing .................................................................. C -

8

Silastic• Pump Tubing ................................................................................. C -8 Teflon• Sample Tubing ............................................................................... C -

8

Stainless Steel Tubing ................................................................................. C -8 Glass Tubing ............................................................................................ C -9 Cleaning Procedures for Miscellaneous Equipment ......................................... C -9 Well Sounders and Tapes ............................................................................. C -

9

Fultz• Pump ............................................................................................. C -

9

Goulds• Pump .......................................................................................... C -JO Redi-Flo2• .............................................................................................. C -10 Little Beaver" .......................................................................................... C -11 Drill Rig, Grout Mixer, and Associated Equipment ........................................... C -1 l Miscellaneous Sampling and Flow Measuring Equipment .................................... C -12
ToC-X May 1996
C.5.8
C.5.9
C.5.10
C.5.11
C.5.12
C.5.13
C.5.14
C.5.15
C.5.16
C.5.17
C.6
C.6.1
C.6.2
C.6.3
C.6.4
C.6.5
Field Analytical Equipment ............... :: ................................. : .................. : ... C -12 Ice Chests and Shipping Containers ............................................................ : .. C -12 Pressure Field ·Filtration Appararus ............................................................... C -I 2 Organic/ Analyte Free Water Storage Containers ............................................... C -13 Portable Solvent Rinse System ..................................................................... C -14 Spl.<!5h Suits ............................................................................................ C -14 SCBA Facemasks ..................................................................................... C -14 Garden Hose .......................................................... ! ................................ C -14 Portable Tanks for Tap Water. ................................... .!. .. : .. .-......................... C -15 Vehicles.: .............................................................. ! ................................ C -15 Preparation or Disposable Sample Containers ............................................... C -15 Introduction •........................................................................................... C -15 Plastic Containers used for" "Classical" Parameters ............................................ C -15 Glass Bottles for Semi-Volatile GC/MS Analytes .............................................. C -16 Glass Bottles for Volatile GC/MS and TOX Analyses ........................................ C -16 . Plastic Bottl¢s for ICP Analytes ...................................... , ............................. C -17
APPENDIX D -Sampl~ Shipping Procedures . D.1 Introduction ........................................................................................ ~ ... D -

I

D.2 Shipment or Dangerous Goods .................................................................... D -

1

D.3 Shipment or Environmental Laboratory Samples ............................................ D -1· D.4 References ........................................................................................ :., ... D -

4

APPENDIX E -. Pump Operating Procedures ............................................................ , .. E -

1

E.1 ~ristattic Pump ................................................................ : ...................... E -

1

E. I. 1 Introduction: ...... : ..... : ............................................................................... E -

1

E.1.2 Purging with a Peristaltic Pump ..................................................................... E -

1

E.1.3 Sampling with a Peristaltic Pump ................................................................... E -

2

E.2 Fultz• Pump .. : ......................................................................................... E -

3

E.2.1 Introduction ... : .............. : ............................................................................ E -

3

E.2.2 · Operation ............. : ......................................................... · ......................... E -

3

E.2.3 Tips and Precautions .................................................................................. E -

5

E.2.4 Rotor Replacement.. .................................................. : ................................ E -

5

E.2.5 · · Trouble Shooting .............................................................................. : ........ E -

6

E.3 Large Diameter Electric Submersible Pumps ................................................. E -

6

E.3.1 Introduction ................................................................................. : ........... E -

6

E.3.2 Safety .. : ................................................................................................... E-7 E.3.3 Pre-loadout Checkout Procedure .................................................................... E -

7

E.3 .4 Operation ................................................................................................ E -

7

E.3.5 Maintenance and Precautions.,., ............... , .................................................... E -

8

E.3.6 Trouble Shooting ........... , ........................................................................... E -

8

E.4 QED0 Bladder and Purge Pumps ................................................................. E -

9

E.4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. E -

9

E.4.2 Operation -Bladder Pump ............................................................................ E -

9

E.4.3 Operation -Purge Pump .............................................................................. E -

9

E.4.4 Trouble Shooting ........................................ 1 •.••••••••••••.•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• E -10 E.5 Small Diameter Electric Submersible Pumps .................................................. E -10 E.5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. E -10
-filSOPQAM ToC -x.i May 1996
I
I
I
0
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I , I
I
I
I
I
E.5.2
E.5.3
E.5.4
E.5.6
E.5.7
Safety ........................................... : ......................................................... E -10 Pre-loadout Checkout Procedures ................................................................... E -11 Operation ................................................................................................ E -11 Maintenance and Precautions ........................................................................ E -12 Trouble Shooting ................... : ................................................................... E -12
APPENDIX F -Regional Technical Support for Criminal Investigations ........................... F -1 F-1 Technical Assistance ................................................................................. F -I F .2 Project Requests ...................................................................................... F -

2

. . F.3 Project Coordination ................................................................................. F -

2

F .4 Project Planning ...................................................................................... F -

2

F.5 Fleld Investigation .................................................................................... F -

3

F.6 Laboratory Support .................................................................................. F -

4

F.7 · Final Report ............................................................................................ F -

4

F.8 Document Control ....... · ............................................................................. F -

4

F.9 Sample Disposal ....................................................................................... F -

5

APPENDIX G -Battery Charging and Storage Operations .............. : .............................. G -I G.l Receiving Batteries from the Field ............................................................... G -

1

G.2 · Charging Batteries ................................................................................... G -

2

G.3 Post-Charging ......................................................................................... G -

3

G-4 Maintenance ............................................................................................ G -

4

Figure G.1 -Banery Log ............................................................................. G -

6

Figure G .2 -Banery Building Maintenance Repon ............................................. G -

7

EISOPQAM ToC -xii May 1996
1.1 Introduction
SECTION 1
PREFACE
This document, the Environmental Investigations Standatd Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Manual, contains the standatd operating and field quality assurance procedures used by Region 4 field investigators. The manual originated in 1980 with the title Engineering Support Branch Standatd Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Manual and was revised in 1986 with the same title and revised again in 1991 with the title, Environmental Compliance Branch Standard Operating
Procedures and Quality Assurance Manual. The spa:ific procedures outlined in the manual.are based on the experiences of Region 4 field investigators or are specifically referenced at the end of each
section.
I
I
I
D
H
This manual will be provided to each Region 4 employee responsible for conducting field I investigations for activities contained in .these Standatd Operating Procedures (SOP). Each employee
is expected to read and be familiar with each section of the SOP. This is intended to be a dynamic 1 document and will be revised periodically as needed. Mention of trade names or commercial producrs does not constitute endorsement or recommendation for use.
.1.2 Performance Objectives I
Performance objectives have been included at the beginning cif sections and sub-sections where I applicable. _Toe performance objective lists the minimum requirements necessary for meeting the ·
intent of the procedures that follow in the section. Toe purpose of the performance objective is to allow flexibility within field procedures where appropriate; however any deviations from the I procedures in the SOP should be approved by the appropriate authority and thoroughly documented.
1.3 Section Objectives I
Section objectives are inducted at the beginning of sections where performance objectives are I not applicable_. Section objectives provide a brief summary of the intention and content of the section.
EISOPQAM -· .. May 1996
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION3
SAMPLE CONTROL, FIELD RECORDS, AND DOCUMENT CONTROL
SECTION OBJECTIVES:
• Present standard procedures for sample identification.
• Present standard procedures for sample control.
• Present standard procedures for chain-of-custody.
• Present standard procedures for maintenance of field records a!Jd document control.
3.1 Introduction
All sample identification, chain-of-custody records, receipt for sample forms, and field records shou.ld be recorded with waterproof, non-erasable ink. If errors are made in any of these documents, corrections should be made by crossing a single line through the error and entering the correct information. All corrections should be initialed and dated. If possible, all corrections should be made by the individual malcing the error.
If information is entered onto sample tags, logbooks, or sample containers using stick-on labels, the labels should not be capable of being removed without leaving obvious indications of the anempt. Labels should never be placed over previously recorded information. Corrections to information recorded on stick-on labels should be made as stated above.
Following are definitions of terms used·in this section;
Project Leader; The individual with overall responsibility for conducting a specific field investigation in accordance with this SOP.
Field Sample Custodian: Individual responsible for maintaining custody of the samples and completing the sample tags, Chain-of-Custody Record, and Receipt for Sample form.
Sample Team Leader;
Sampler:
Transferee:
An ind.ividual designated by the project leader to be present during and · responsible for all activities related to the collection of samples by a specific sampling team.
The individual responsible for the actual collection of a sample.
Any individual who receives custody of samples subsequent to release by the field sample custodian.
Laboratory Sample Custodian; Individual or their designee(s) responsible for a=pting custody of samples from the field sample custodian or a transferee.
EISOPQAM 3 -

1

_May 1996
I
One individual may fulfill more than one bf the roles· described above while in the field. I
I
I
n
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EISOPQAM 3-2 . _May 1996 I
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2 Sample and Evidence Identification
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES:
• To aa:urately identify samples and evidence collected.
• To adequately insure that chain-of-O!Stody was maintained.
3.2.1 Sample Identification
-
The meth,od of sample identification used depends on the type of sample collected. Samples
collected for specific field analyses or measurement data are recorded directly in bound field logbooks
or recorded directly on the Chain-of-Custody Record, with identifying information, while in the
custody of the samplers. Examples include pH, temperature, and conductiviry. Samples collected for
laboratory analyses are identified by using standard sample tags (Figure 3-1) which are attached to the sample containers. In some cases, particularly with biological samples, the sample tags may have to be included with or wrapped around the samples. The sample tags are sequentially numbered and are
a=untable documents after they are completed and attached to a sample or other physical evidence.
The following information shall be included on the sample tag using waterproof, non-<:rasable ink:
• project number;
• field identification or sample station number;
• date and time of sample collection;
• designation of the -sample as a grab or composite;
• rype of sample (water, wastewater, leachate, soil, sediment, etc.) and a very brief
description of the sampling location;
• the signature of either the sampler(s) or the designated sampling team leader and the field
sample custodian (if appropriate);
• whether the sample is preserved or unpreserved;
• the general types of analyses to be performed (checlced on front of tag); and
• any relevant comments (such as readily detectable or identifiable· odor, color, or lcnown
toxic propenies).
Samples or other physical evidence collected during criminal investigations are to be identified
by using the "criminal sample tag." This tag is similar to the standard sample tag shown in Figure 3-1,
except that it has a red border around the front and a red baclcground on the back: of the tag. If a
EISOPQAM 3-3 < May 1996
I
criminal sample tag is not available, the white s·ample tag may be used and should be marked I
"Criminal" in bold letters on the tag.
I
m
D
n
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EISOPQAM 3-4 ·',May 1996 I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
If a sample is split with a facility, state regulatory agency, or other parry representative, the recipient should be provided (if enough sample is available) with an equal weight or volume of sample
(see Section 2.3.6). The split sample should be clearly marked or identified with a stick--0n label.
Tags for blank or duplicate samples will be marked "blank" or "duplicate," respectively. This
requirement does not apply to blind-spiked or blank samples which are to be submitted for laboratory quality control purposes. Blind-spiked or blank samples shall not be identified as such. This identifying information shall also be recorded in the bound field logbooks and on the Chain-Of-
Custody Record as outlined in Sections 3.3 and 3.5.
3.2.2 Photograph Identification
Photographs used in investigative reports or placed in the official files shall be identified on the back of the print with the following information:
• A brief, but accurate description of what the photograph shows, including the name of the facility or site and the location.
• The date and time that the photograph was taken.
• The name of the photographer.
When phot0graphs are taken, a record of each ·frame exposed shall be kept in the bound field logbook along with the information required for each photOgraph. The film shall be developed with the negatives supplied uncut. The field investigator shall then enter the required information on the prints.
using the photographic record from the bound field logbook, to identify each photograph. For criminal investigations, the negatives must be maintained with the bound field logbook in the project file and stored in a seo.ued file cabinet.
3.2.3 Identification of Physical Evidence
Physical evidence, other than samples, shall be identified by utilizing a sample tag or recording
the necessary information on Jhe evidence. When samples are .collected from vessels or containers which can be moved (drums for example), mark the vessel or container with the.field identification or sample station number for future identification, when necessary. The vessel or container may be
labeled with an indelible marker (e.g., paint stick or spray paint). The vessel or container need not be marked if it already bas a unique marking or serial number; however, these numbers shall be recorded in the bound field logbooks. In addition, it is suggested that photographs of any physical evidence (marlcings, etc.) be taken and the necessary information recorded in the field logbook.
Occasionally, it is necessary to obtain recorder and/or instrument charts from facility owned
analytical equipment, flow recorders, etc., during field investigations and inspections. Mark the charts and write the following information on these charts while they are still in the instrument or recorder :
• Staning and ending time(s) and date(s) for the chan.
•
•
EISOPQAM
Take an instantaneous measurement of the media being measured by the recorder. The
instantaneous measurement shall be entered at the appropriate location on the chan alo~g with the date and time of the measurement.
A description of the location being monitored and any other information required to
interpret the data such as type of flow device, chan units, factors, etc.
3 -5 •.•May 1996
All of the above information should be initialed by the field investigator. After the chart has
been removed, the field investigator shall indicate on the chart who the chart (or copy of the chart) Ylas
received from and enter the date and time, as well as the investigator's initials.
Documents such as technical reports, ·laboratory reports, etc., should be marked with the field
investigator's signature, the date, the number of pages, and from whom they were received. Confiden-
tial documents should not be a=pted, except in special circumstances such as process audits, haz.ard-
ous waste site investigations, etc.
3.3 Chain-or-Custody Procedures
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVE:
• To maintain and document the possession of samples or other evidence from the time of
collection until they or the data derived from the samples are introduced as evidence.
3.3. l Introduction
Chain-of-custody procedures are comprised of the following elements; 1) maintaining sample
a.istody and 2) documentation of samples for evidence. To doa.iment chain-of-custody, an aa:urate
record must be maintained to trace the possession of each sample from the moment of collection to its
introduction into evidence.
3.3.2 Sample Custody
A sample or other physical evidence is in custody if:
• it is in the actual possession of an investigator;
• it is in the view of an investigator, after being in their physical possession;
• it was in the physical possession of an investigator and then they secured it to prevent
I
I
I
I
D
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
tampering; and/or I
• it is placed in a designated secure area.
3.3.3 Documentation of Chain-of-Custody
Sample Tag
A sample tag (Figure 3-1) should be completed for each sample using waterproof, non-erasable
· ink as specified in Section 3.2. ·
EISOPQAM 3-6 _,'. May 1996
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Sample Seals
Samples should be sealed as soon as possible foBowing collection utilizing the EPA custody seal (EPA Form 7500-2(R7-75)) shown in Figure 3-2. A similar seal is used for samples collected during criminal investigations, however, the seal is red. Though not required, red custody seal is preferred for sealing samples collected during criminal investigations. The sample custodian should write the date and their signature or initials on the seal. The use of custody seals may be waived if field investigators keep the samples in their cusrody as defined in Section 3.3.2 from the time of •·· collection until the samples are delivered to the laboratory analyzing the samples.
Chain-of-Custody Record
The field Chain-Of-Custody Record (Figure 3-3) is used to record the custody of all samples or other physical evidence collected and maintained by investigators. All physical evidence or sample sets shall be accompanied by a Chain-Of-Custody Record. This Chain-Of-Custody Record documents transfer of custody of samples from the sample custodian to another person, to the laboratory, or other organizational elements.· To simplify the Chain-of-Custody Record and eliminate potential litigation problems, as few people as possible should have custody of the samples or physical evidence during the investigation. This form shall not be used to document the collection of split samples where there is a legal requirement to provide a receipt for samples (see Section 3.4). The Chain-Of-Custody Record also serves as a sample logging mechanism for the laboratory sample custodian. A Chain-of-Custody Record will be completed for all samples or physical evidence collected. A separate Chain-of-Custody Record should be used for each final destination or laboratory utilized during the investigation.
The following information must be supplied in the indicated spaces (Figure 3-3) to complete the field Chain-Of-Custody Record. ·
• The project number.
• The project name.
•
•
•
•
ElSOPQAM
All samplers and, sampling team leaders (if applicable) must sign in the designated
signature block.
The sampling station number, date, and time of sample collection, grab or composite
sample designation, and a brief description of the type of sample and/or the sampling
location must be included on each line. One sample should be entered on each line and a sample should not be split among multiple lines.
If.multiple sampling teams are collecting samples, the sampling team leader's name should
be indicated in the "Tag No./Remarlcs" column.
If the individual serving as the field sample custodian is different from the individual
serving as the project leader, the field sample custodian's name and the title of the sample custodian (e.g., Jane Doe, Sample Custodian) should be recorded in the "Remarlcs" section
in the tcip right comer of the Chain-of-Custody Record. The Remarlcs section may also be
used to record airbill numbers, registered or certified mail serial numbers, or other pertinent information.
3-7 May 1996
• The total number of sample containers must be listed in the "Total Containers" column for
each sample. The number of individual containers for each analysis must also be listed.
There should not be more than one sample type per sample. Required analyses should be
circled or entered in the appropriate location as indicated on the Chain-of-Custody Record.
•· The tag numbers for each sample and any needed remarks are to be supplied in the "Tag
No./Remarlcs" column.
I
I
I
• The sample custodian and subsequent transferee(s) should document the transfer of the R
samples listed on the Chain-of-Custody Record. The person who originally relinquishes
custody should be the sample custodian. Both the person relinquishing the samples and the
person r=iving them must sign the form. The date and time that this occurred should be II
documented in the proper space on the Chain-of-Custody Record. II
• Usually, the last person r=iving the samples or evidence should be the laboratory sample 1 custodian or their designee(s).
The Chain-of-Custody Record is a serialized· document. Once the Record is completed, it
becomes an a=untable document and must be maintained in the project file. The suitability of any
other form for chain-of-custody should be evaluated based upon its inclusion of all of the above
information in a legible format.
If chain-of-custody is required for documents r=ived during investigations, the documents
should be placei:l in large envelopes, and the contents should be noted on the envelope. The envelope
shall be sealed and an EPA custody seal placei:l on the envelope such that it cannot be opened without
breaking the seal. A Chain-Of-Custody Record shall be maintained for the envelope. Any time the
EPA seal is broken, that fact shall be noted on the Chain-Of-Custody Record· and a new seal affixed.
The information on the seal should include the sample custodian's signature or initials, as well as the
date.
Physical evidence such as video tapes or other small items shall be placed in Zip-Loe'" type
bags or envelopes and an EPA custody seal should be affixed so th;:\t they cannot be opened without
breaking the seal. A Chain-Of-Custody Record shall be maintained for these items. Any time the
EPA seal is broken, that fact shall be noted on the Chain-of-Custody Record and a new seal affixed.
The information on the seal should include the sample field custodian's signature or initials, as well as
the date.
EPA custody seals can be used to maintain custody of other items when necessary by using
similar procei:lures as those previously outlined in this section. ·
Samples should not be a=pted from other sources unless the sample collection procedures
used are known to be a=ptable, can be documented, and the sample chain-of-custody can be
established. If such samples are a=pted, a standard sample tag containing all relevant information and
the Chain-Of-Custody Record shall be completed for each set of samples.
ElSOPQAM 3 -.8 .. May 19%
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3.4 Transfer of Custody with Shipment
3.4
• Samples shall be properly packaged for shipment in accordance with the procedures
outlined in Appendix D.
• All samples shall be accompanied by the Chain-Of-Custody Record. The original and one
copy of the Record will be placed in a plastic bag inside the secured shipping container if
samples are shipped. When shipping samples via common carrier, the "Relinquished By"
box should be filled in; however, the "Received By" box should be left blank. The
laboratory sample custodian is responsible for receiving custody of the samples and will
fill in the "Received By" section of the Chain-of-Custody Record. One copy of the Record
will be retained by the project leader. The original Chain-of-Custody Record will be
transmitted to the project leader after the samples are a=pted by the laboratory. This copy
will become a part of the project file.
• If sent by mail, the package shall be registered with return receipt requested. If sent by
common carrier, a Government Bill of Lading (GBL) or Air Bill should be used. Receipts
from post offices, copies of GBL's, and Air Bills shall be retained as pan of the
documentation of the chain-of-custody. The Air Bill number, GBL number, or registered
mail serial number shall be recorded in the remarks section of the Chain-Of-Custody
Record or in another designated area if using a form other than that shown in Figure 3-2.
Receipt for Samples Form (CERCLA/RCRA/TSCA)
3.4.1 Introduction
Section 3007 of the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) of 1976 and Section
104 of the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA or
Superfund) of 1980 require that a "receipt" for all facility samples collected during inspections and
investigations be given to the owner/operator of each facility before the field investigator departs the
premises. The Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA) contains similar provisions.
3.4.2 Receipt for Samples Form
The Receipt for Samples form (Figure 3-4) is to be used to satisfy the receipt for samples
provjsions of RCRA, CERCLA, and TSCA. The form also documents that split samples were offered
and either "Received" or "Declined" by the owner/operator of the facility or site being investigated.
The following information must be supplied and entered on the Receipt for Samples form.
• The project number, project name, name of facility or site, and location of the facility or
site must be entered at the top of the form in the indicated locations.
• The sampler(s) must sign the form in the indicated location. If multiple sample teams are
collecting samples, the sample team leader's name should be indicated in the "EPA Sample
Tag No. 's/Remarks" column. ·
EISOPQAM 3 -9 May 19%
• Each sample collected from the facility ·or site must be documented in the sample record
ponion of the form. The sample station number, date and time of sample coilection,
composite or grab sample designation, whether or not split samples were collected (yes or
no should be entered under the split sample column), the tag numbers of samples collected
which will be removed from the site, a brief description of each sampling location, and the
total number of sample containers for each sample must be entered.
• The bottom of the form is used to document the site operator's a=ptance or rejection of
_split samples. The project leader must sign and complete the information in the "Split
Samples Transferred By" section (date and time must be entered). If split samples were
not collected, the project leader should initial and place a single line through "Split
Samples Transferred By" in this section. The operator of the site must indicate whether
split samples were received or declined and sign the form. The operator must give their
title, telephone number, and the date and time they signed the form. If the operator
refuses to sign _the form, the sampler(s) should note this fact in the operator's signarure
block and initial this entry.
The Receipt for Samples form is serialized and becomes an a=untable document after it is
completed. A copy of the form is to be given to the facility or site owner/operator. The original copy
of the form must be maintained in the project files.
3.5 Field Records
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVE:
• To accurately and completely document all field activities.
Each project should ha_ve a dedicated logbook. The project leader's name, the sample team
leader's name (if appropriate), the project name and location, and the project number should be entered
on the inside of the front cover of the logbook. It is recommended that each page fr1 the logbook be
numbered and dated. The entries should be legible and contain accurate and inclusive documentation
of an individual's project activities. At the end of all entries for each day, or at the end of a particular
event if appropriate, the investigator should draw a diagonal line and initial indicating the conclusion
of the entry. Since field records are the basis for later written repons, language should be objective,
facruaJ, and free of personal feelings or other terminology which might prove inappropriate. Once
completed, these field logbooks become a=untable documents and must be maintained as pan of the
official project files. All aspects of sample collection and handling, as well as visual observations,
shall be documented in the field logbooks. The following is a list of information that should be
included in the logbook:
• sample collection equipment (where appropriate);
I
I
I
n
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
• field analytical equipment, and equipment utilize_d to make physical measurements shall be I
identified;
E!SOPQAM 3 -10 May 19%
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
••
I
• calculations, results, and calibration data for field sampling, field analytical, and field
physical measurement equipment; ·
• property numbers of any sampling equipment used, if available;
• sampling station identification;
• time of sample collection;
• description of the sample location;
• d=iption of the sample;
• who collected the sample;
• how the sample. was collected;
• diagrams of processes;
• maps/sketches of sampling locations; and
• weather conditions that may affect the sample (e.g., rain, exrreme heat or cold, wind, etc.)
3.6 Document Control
The term document conrrol refers to the maintenance of inspection and investigation project
files. All project files shall be maintained in accordance with Divisional guidelines. All documents as outlined below shall be kept in project files. Investigators may keep copies of reports in their personal files, however, all official and original documents relating to inspections and investigations shall be placed in the official project files. The following documents shall be placed in the project file, if applicable:
• reijuest memo from the program office;
• copy of the study plan;
• original Chain-Of-Custody Records and bound field logbooks;
• copy of the R=ipt for Sample forms;
• records obtained during the investigation;
• complete copy of the analytical data and memorandums rransmirring analytical data;
• official correspondence r=ived by· or issued by the Branch relating to the investigation
inducting records of telephone calls;
• photographs and negatives associated with the project;
• one copy of the final repon and transmirtal memorandum(s); and
. EISOPQAM 3. I! May 19%
• relevant docurnems related to the original investigation/inspection or follow-up activities
related to the investigation/inspection.
•
Under no. circumstances are any inappropriate personal observations or irrelevanc information
I
I
I
to be filed in the official project files. The project leader shall review the file at the conclusion of the D
project to insure that it is complete.
EISOPQAM 3 -12 , May 1996
n
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.7 Disposal or Samples or Other Physical Evidence
Disposal of samples or other physical evidence obtained during investigations is conducted on
a case-by-case basis. Before samples which have been analyw:l are disposed, laboratory personnel
shall contact the project leader or his/her supervisor in writing, requesting permission to dispose of the
samples. The samples will not be disposed of until the project leader or his/her supervisor completes
the appropriate ponions of the memorandum, signs, and returns the memorandum to the laboratory,
specifically giving them permission to dispose of the samples. Personnel should check with the EPA
... Program Office requesting the inspection or investigation before granting permission to dispose of
samples or other physical evidence. The following general guidance is offered for the disposal of
samples or other physical evidence:
• No samples, physical evidence, or any other document associated with a criminal
investigation shall be disposed without written permission from EPA' s Criminal
.Investigations Division.
• Internal quality assurance samples are routinely disposed after the analytical results are
. reported. The laboratory does not advise the Quality Assurance Officer of the disposal of
these samples.
• Samples associated with routine inspections may be disposed following approval from the
project leader.
After samples are disposed, the laboratory shall send the sample tags to the Field Equipment
Center (FEC) coordinator. These sample tags are accountable and must be placed and maintained in
official files at the FEC.
3.8 Field Operations Records Management System (FORMS)
FORMS is a computer program designed to streamline the documentation required by ESD
and/or the Contract Laboratory Program (CLP) for sample identification and chain--0f-custody. Once
the appropriate information is entered into the computer, FORMS will generate stick--0n labels for the
sample tags, sample containers (CLP), and field logbooks, and _will generate the sample r=ipt and
chain--0f-custody repons for the appropriate laboratory. The advantages to this system include faster
processing of samples and increased accuracy. Accuracy is increased because the information is
entered only once, and consequently, consistent from the log book to the tags, bottle labels, and chain-
of-custody forms. Operating instructions are available for use with the FORMS program.
EISOPQAM 3 -13 . , May 1996 ·--}
UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY . . REGION 4
960 COLLEGE STATION RD.
ATHENS, GA 30605-2720 0
~EPA
w
ProJ•ct No. Stallon I.D. Monlh/Dty/Yur Tim, Dt1kln1I• . Comp. I Onu,
.i,.. SL1oon Loe.oion Sunpl&ra (Slgn1iura1) ,,.
g
~ f S2 I I f f _§ _§ z ! 0 g: Ir (I" f s □ ,:, ~ i ~ ~ i ~ i .. :, f z ti ' f. i 1/1 R <
-D l Ill t ~
-_._ -- ----·-
I
•
I
I
I
1•
i
I
I
I
~·
I
• I . i.
I
I
...... .a'
\~)
-EISOPQAM
FIGURE--3-2
EPA CUSTODY SEAL
UNITED STATES SMIPt.ENo. 1-·~ ~ EtMRONMENTAL PROTECTION >GENCY OFFICIAL BAMPt..E SE.AL SIGNATIJRE
PRINTIWAEAAOTTTl.E (Ho>e;ro.-,. -=r~r=-, 1
3 -12 May 1996
w
-
"
UI EPA I\ETO!ON • OfO COllEOE 8TA1'0H RC><C ,&..n-1'-NJ, MCflOtA S.C:IU.tno
CHAIN OF CUSTODY RECORD
Pl\o..eC-\0. l'ftCACTLLIJ:)ll't .. ..,. ..
PltOJ!CT -.l.WM..bc.&.T ON
1 ~iLE TYr~IM•NT -,,lJ,lJ>t.J::I\~ (llON) I CIRCU:/ADD ' ,IJ,JJ.L'l'tU ' ~~-•-~~ t cw: I 1 .nlH lnirior'#;<>, O" c,on\llleri .
11 OTH~a wbmltttd.
~ ~-
II ! .,__ffi.,__f?,~ I!-().., ' I -l I .. ",¢-ctCJ-~ l/~;ffeo/y o/ ."' , ........... ., H~I CH IQ "'" ne
~~UIJHW l'I': DAf?iTWI!: ~-V!Ot'I':. 1 ~-l~!tHm BY: ... !Ml ... 1~J~W. ,.,-.. . ..... "~" I rt10-..,
~~IH!Ort. ,w, ~V!O ti: ~llUCH.JIRial 1N. m?fv?OIY:. IPRJ"1) /PH!n (P:t HT) ...•. tslDt.1 .. ~ .. . ....
·1.1.1. o,o 19".T» 0 1116
_._ -- -- ---
w "" C'<.V
4-1790ff .. ~
l!!!!!!!I
-.a -- -- --·-- -------• • •
RECEIPT FOR SAMPLES
PROJECT HO. PROJECT NAIJE IW,IE & LOCATION OF FACILITY;SITE
,_; ,_, .. ,..,, .. lt.,)
.
11_ ~ g HO. OF EPA SPLIT SAMPlES STATION HO. DATE 111.lE STATION LOCATIOWOESCRIPTION CONTAINERS YORN ff¥.. SAMPLE TAO HO.&IREMAAKS
' '
' '
.
~"lUm-VW~tr. "'" i. 11'.ff~'-LClJVUIIYO Of.Dl':2.llmno ....,,.,
"""'" ~·· n,a .,,,. nLVK>"'
mt\S ,, ...... :-• ' '(~....,.,-,.._.,._,...,.~ U.1. 00VERNI.AOH PRINTINO OFFICE.: 1~1-411 (12/U)
No. 4 4608
SECTION 4
BRANCH SAFETY PROTOCOLS
SECTION OBJECTIVE:
• Present safety protocols to ensure that all operations are conducted in a manner which
protects worker safety and meets compliance with all OSHA regulations and EPA safety
policies.
4.1 Introduction
The following pa~ of this section define safety protocols that are to be used by Branch
investigators while conducting field operations. This section also covers the ,necessary training,
equipment, and experience that is needed to conduct safe environmental investigations at hazardous
waste sites.
The Division safety program is jointly coordinated by the Occupational Health and Safety
Designee _(OHSD); a Division Safety, Health_ and Environmental Manager (SHEM) coordinator; and a
Branch safety officer. The OHSD appoints the SHEM to perform the following duties: 1) classify
employees into safety categories based upon the type of work they are engaged in; 2) make requests for
hazardous duty starus; 3) provides and tracks safety related training; 4) notifies management of safety
deficiencies; and 5) reviews project specific safety plans. The employees immediate supervisor is
responsible for ensuring that their employees meet training and medical monitoring requirements.
Specific projects will include a Site Safety Officer (SSO) whose responsibility is to ensure that the site
safety plan is adhered to during the course of work. Other SSO responsibilities and duties are listed in
Section 4.3.1. Responsibility for the safe conduct of site operations is ultimately the responsibility of
each individual worker.
Field investigators will not be required to participate in any operation which violates OSHA
and EPA regulations/guidance.· The safety protocols in this section are written in a=rdance with
those defined by the following regulations, guidance documents, and manuals;
29 CFR Part 1910.120. Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response: These OSHA
regulations govern workers at hazardous waste sites and include requirements for, training,
equipment, and practices involved in handling of hazardous materials.
29 CFR Part 1910.1200, Hazard Communication: These OSHA regulations govern workers
handling hazardous materials and include requirements for training, labeling, and
documentation involved in handling hazardous materials. ·
Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for Hazard Waste Activities: This NIOSH,
OSHA, USCG, and EPA guidance manual is for those who are responsible for occupational
safety and health programs at hazardous waste sites. It assumes a basic knowledge of science
and experience in occupational safety and health. It is the product of four Agencies (NIOSH,
OSHA, USCG, and EPA) mandated by CERCLA section 301 (f) to srudy the problem of
protecting the safety and health of workers at hazardous waste sites.
E!SOPQAM 4 • 1 . May 1996
I
I
I
I
0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
••
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
AUGERING and DRILLING OPERATIONS:
Underground Utilities:
All underground utilities must be located prior to commencement of drilling operations involving the drill
rig and power augers. Complete the underground utilities·checklist below and prepare a site map showing
the locations of all underground utilities identified.
UTILITY LOCATOR/CONTACT PERSON PHONE# DATE of
LOCATION
Power:
Telephone: •
-Gas:
Water:
Sewer:
Other:
• Include non-AT&T lines such as Sprint, MCI, etc.
IMPORTANT: Check all proposed drilling locations with a pipe-seeker. As a minimum, the first four
feet of a power bored hole will be dug using a post hole digger/hand auger. Personnel involved in the
drilling will wear eye protection in addition to normal safety gear appropriate for the required level of
protection. The SSO will insure that all personnel remove watches, rings, and other jewelry, as well as
securing loose fitting or dangling articles of clothing while in the vicinity of the drilling operations.
Additionally, the SSO will insure that a 90-degree clear zone is maintained for a radius of at least 25 feet
behind the drill rig.
Above Ground Utilities:
All above ground utilities must be located prior to commencing drilling/augering activities. A map will
be prepared showing the locations of all power lines, telephone lines, video cables, guy wires, and other
objects which could pose a hazard to personnel operating the drill rig, power auger, or hand auger with
multiple extensions. The SSO will insure that all operations are kept well clear of such hazards.
EISOPQAM 4 -31 May 1996
SECTIONS
SAMPLING DESIGN AND QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES
SECTI_ON OBJECTIVES:
• Define planning and quality assurance elements that must be incorporated in all sampling
operations.
• Define sampling site selections and collection procedures for individual media.
• Define sampling quality assurance procedures.
5.1 Introduction
11tis section discusses the standard practices and procedures used by Branch personnel during field
operations to ensure the collection of representative samples. Sampling activities conducted by field
investigators are conducted with the expectation that information obtained may be used for enforcement
purposes, unless specifically stated to the contrary in advance of the field investigation. Therefore, correct
use of proper sampling procedures is essential. Collection ofrepresentative samples depends upon:
5.2
• . Ensuring that the sample is representative of the material being sampled.
• The use of proper sampling, sample handling, preservation, and quality control techniques.
Definitions
Sample -part of a larger lot, usually an area, a volume, or a period of time.
Representative Sample -a sample that reflects one or more characteristics of a population.
Sample Representativeness -the degree to which a set of samples defines the characteristics of a
population, where each sample has an equal probability of yielding the same result.
Variability -the range or "distribution" of results around the mean value obtained from samples
within a population. Tbere are three types of variability which must be measured or otherwise
accounted for in field sampling.
l. Temporal Variability
Temporal variability is the range of results due to changes in contaminant concentrations over
time. An example would be the range of concentrations obtained for a given parameter in
wastewater samples collected at different times from an outfull where contaminant
concentrations vary over time.
EISOPQAM 5 -I May 1996
I
I
•
I
D
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I ,.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Spacial Variability
Spacial variability is the range of results due to changes in contaminant concentrations as a function of their location .. An example would be the range of concentrations obtained for a
given parameter in surface soil from a site where discreet "hot spots" are present due to
loraliuxl releases of contaminants on otherwise uncontaminated soil.
3. · Sample Handling Variability
Sample handling variability is the range of results due to the sample collection and handling by the sampler. This variability manifests' itself as a positive bias due to errors such as unclean sampling· equipment, cross contamination, etc., or a negative bias due to improper
· containers or sample preservation.
Accuracy -a measure of agreement between the true value and the measured value of a parameter.
Precision -measure of the agreement among individual measurements of identical samples.
Bias -consistent under or over-estimation of the true value due to sampling errors, sample
handling errors, or analytical errors.
Grab Sample -an individual sample collected from a single location at a specific time or period of time. Grab samples are generally authoritative in nature.
Composite Samples -

a

sample collected over a temporal or spacial range that typically consists of a series of discrete, equal samples (or "aliquots") which are combined or "composited". Four types of composite samples are listed below:
I. Tune Composite (TC) -

a

sample comprised of a varying number of discrete samples (aliquots)
collected at equal time intervals during the compositing period. The TC sample is typically
used to sample wastewater or streams.
2. Flow Proportioned Composite (FPC) -

a

sample collected proportional to the flow during the compositing period by either a time-varying/constant volume (TVCV) or time-constant/varying
volume (TCVV) method. The TVCV method is typically used with automatic samplers that
are paced by a flow meter. The TCW method is a manual method that individually · proportions a series of discretely collected aliquots. The FPC is typically used when sampling
wastewater.
3. Areal Composite -sample composited from individual, equal aliquots collected on an areal or horizontal cross-sectional basis. Each aliquot is collected in an identical manner. Examples
include sediment composites from quarter-point sampling of streams and soil samples from within grids.
4. Vertical Composite -

a

sample composited from individual, equal aliquots collected from a vertical cross section. Each aliquot is collected in an identical manner. Examples include
vertical profiles of soil/sediment columns, lakes, and estuaries.
EISOPQAM 5 -2 May 1996
Ouality Control Samples
Quality control samples are collected during field studies for various purposes which include the
isolation of site effects (control samples), define background conditions (background sample), evaluate
field/laboratory variability (spikes and blanks, trip blanks, duplicate, split samples).
The definitions for specific quality control samples are listed below:
Control Sample -typically a discrete grab sample collected to isolate a source of contamination.
Isolation of a source could require the collection of both an upstream sample at a location where
the mediwn being studied is unaffected by the site being studied, as well as a downstream control
which could be affected by contaminants contributed from the site under study.
Background Sample - a sample (usually a grab sample) collected from an area, water body, or site
similar to the one being studied, but located in an area known or thought to be free from pollutants
of concern,
Split Sample -a· sample which has been portioned into two or more containers from a single
sample container or sample mixing container. The primary purpose of a split sample is to measure
sample handling variability.
Duplicate Sample -two or more samples collected from a common source. The purpose of a
duplicate sample is to estimate the variability of a given characteristic or contaminant associated
with a population.
Trip Blanks - a sample which is prepared prior to the sampling event in the actual container and is
stored with the investigative samples throughout the sampling event. They are then packaged for
shipment with the other samples and submitted for analysis. At no time after their preparation are
trip blanks to be opened before they reach the laboratory. Trip blanks are used to determine if
samples were contaminated during storage and/or transportation back to the laboratory (a measure
of mple handling variability resulting in positive bias m: contaminant concentration). If samples
are to be shipped, trip blanks are to be provided with each shipment but not for each cooler.
Spikes - a sample with known concentrations of contaminants. Spike samples are often packaged
for shipment with other samples and sent for analysis .. At no time after their preparation are the
sample containers to be opened before they reach the laboratory. Spiked samples are normally sent
with each shipment to contract laboratories only. Spiked samples are used to measure negative
bias due to sample handling nr analytical procedures, or to assess the performance of a laboratory.
Equipment Field Blanks - a sample collected using organic-free water which has been run
over/through sample collection equipment. These samples are used to determine if contaminants
have been introduced by contact of the sample mediwn with sampling equipment. Equipment field
blanks are often associated with collecting rinse blanks of equipment that has been field cleaned
EISOPQAM 5 -3 May 1996
I
I
I
H
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Pre-and Post-Preservative Blanks - a sample that is prepared in the field and used to determine if
the preservative used during field operations was contaminated, thereby causing a positive bias in
the contaminant concentration. On small studies, usually only a post-preservative blank is
prepared at the end of all sampling activities. On studies extending beyond one week, a pre-
preservative blank should also be prepared prior to beginning sampling activities. At the discretion
of the project leader, additional preservative blanks can be prepared at intervals throughout the
field investigation. These blanks are prepared by putting organic/analyte-free water in the
container and then preserving the sample with the appropriate preservative.
Field Blanks - a sample that is prepared in the field to evaluate the potential for contamination of a
sample by site contaminants from a source not associated with the sample collected (for example
air-borne dust or organic vapors which could contaminate a soil sample). Organic-free water is
taken to the field in sealed containers or generated on-site. The water is poured into the
appropriate sample containers at pre-designated locations at the site. Field blanks should be
collected in dusty environments and/or from areas where volatile organic contamination is present
in the atmosphere and originating from a source other than the source being sampled.
Material Blanks -samples of sampling materials (e.g., material used to collect wipe samples,
ete.), construction materials (e.g., well construction materials), or reagents (e.g., organic/analyte
free water generated in the field, water from local water supplies used to mix well grout, etc.)
colJected to measure any positive bias from sample handling variability. Commonly collected
material blanks are listed below:
EISOPQAM
Wipe Sample Blanks - a sample of the material used for colJecting wipe samples. The
material is handled, packaged, and transported in the same manner as all other wipe samples
with the exception that it is not exposed to actual contact with the sample medium.
Grout Blanks - a sample of the material used to make seals around the annular space in
monitoring wells.
Filter Pack Blanks - a sample of the material used to create an interface around the screened
interval of a monitoring welJ.
Construction Water Blanks - a sample of the water used to mix or hydrate construction
materials such as monitoring well grout.
Organic/Analyte Free Water Blanks - a sample colJected from a field organic/analyte free
water generating system. The sample is normally colJected at the end of sampling activities
since the organic/analyte free water system is recharged prior to use on a study. On large
studies, samples can be colJected at intervals at tlie discretion of the project leader. The
pwpose of the organic/analyte free water blank is to measure positive bias from sample
handling variability due to possible localized contamination of the organic/analyte free water
generating system or contamination introduced to the sample containers during storage at the
site. Organic/analyte free water blanks differ from field blanks in that the sample should be
collected in as clean an area as possible (a usual location for the organic/analyte free water
system) so that only the water generating system/containers are measured.
5 -4 May 1996
5.3 Sampling Design
5 .3 .1 Introduction
Development of a sampling design may follow the seven steps outlined in the EPA publication,
"Guidance for the Data Quality Objectives Process" (1). The Data Quality Objectives (DQOs) process is a
logical step-by-step method of identifyi\lg the study objective, defining the appropriate type of data to
collect, clarifying the decisions that will be based on the data collected, and considering the potential
limitations with alternate sampling designs. Investigations may be executed without completing the DQO
process step-by-step; however, the basic elements of the DQO process should be considered by the project
leader for each investigation.
Sampling designs are typically either non-probabilistic {directed sampling designs) or probabilistic
(random sampling designs) in nature. The sampling design ultimately must meet specific study objectives.
The location and frequency of sampling (number of samples) should be clearly outlined in the sampling
design, as well as provisions for access to all areas of the site, the use of special sampling equipment, etc.
Development of the sampling design in the context ofDQOs and sampling optimization are discussed in the
ASTM documents "Standard Practice for Generation of Environmental Data · Related to Waste
Management Activities: Development of Data Quality Objectives" (2), and "Standard Guide for the
Generation of Environmental Data Related to Waste Management Activities" (3).
5.3.2 Representative Sampling
A "representative sample" is often defined as a sample that reflects one or more characteristics of
the population being sampled. For example, the characteristic which is desired to be reflected by the
sample may be the average, minimum, or maximum concentration of a constituent of concern. Ultimately a
representative sample is defined by the study objectives. For instance, the objective of the study may be to
determine the maximum concentration of lead in the sludge from a surface impoundment. One sample
collected near the inlet to the impoundment may provide that information. The collection of a
representative sample may be influenced by factors such as equipment design, sampling techniques, and
sample handling.
5.3.3 Stratification and Heterogeneous Wastes
Environmental media, as well as waste matrices, may be stratified, i.e., different portions of the
population, which may be separated temporally or spatially, may have similar characteristics or properties
which are different from adjacent portions of the population. An example would be a landfill that contains
a trench which received an industrial waste contaminated with chromium. The trench would be considered
a strata within the land.fill if chromium was the contaminant of concern. A special case, "stratification by
component", is often observed with waste matrices when the constituent of interest is associated with one
component of the matrix. An example would be slag contaminated with lead that is mixed with otherwise
uncontaminated fire brick. Thus the lead is stratified by component, that being the slag. Stratified
sampling designs are discussed later which incorporate independent sampling of each strata, thereby
reducing the number of samples required.
Some environmental and waste matrices may be, for purposes of the field investigation,
homogeneous (for instance the surfuce water in a limited segment ofa small stream). If the composition of
the matrix and the distribution of contaminants are known, or can be estimated, less sampling may be
necessary to define the properties of interest. An estimate of the variability in contaminant distribution may
EISOPQAM 5 -5 May 1996
I
I
I
R
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
be based on knowledge, or detennined by preliminary sampling. The more heterogeneous the matrix, the
greater the planning and sampling requirements.
A population could also have very localized strata or areas of contamination that are referred to as
"hot spots". Specific procedures for hot spot identification and characterization are available in Statistical
Methods for Environmental Pollution Monitoring (4).
5.3.4 Specific Sampling Designs
Sampling strategies used by the Branch typically fall into two general groups: directed or
probabilistic. Directed or "authoritative" approaches typically rely on the judgement and experience of
the investigators, as well as available information. on the matrix of concern. Probabilistic, or "statistical"
approaches may be appropriate when estimates on uncertainty and specific confidence levels in the results
are required. The probabilistic approaches include: simple random sampling, stratified random sampling,
and systematic grid sampling. The main feature of a probabilistic approach is that each location at the site
has an equal probability of being sampled, therefore statistical bias is minimized.
5 .3 .5 Determining the Number of Samples to Collect .
The number of samples to collect as part of a sampling design will typically be based on several
factors, e.g., the study objectives, properties of the matrix, degree of confidence required, access to
sampling points, and resource constraints. Practical guidance for determining the number of samples is
included in several documents including the ASTM document Standard Guide for General Planning of
Waste Sampling (5), the US-EPA document Characterization of Hazardous Waste Sites - A Methods
Manual, Volume 1 -Site Investigations (6). and Statistical Methods for Environmental Pollution
Monitoring by Richard 0. Gilbert (4).
5.3.6 Authoritative or Directed Sampling
Directed sampling is based on the judgement of the investigator, and does not n=ssarily result in a
sample that reflects the average characteristics of the entire matrix. Directed sampling is also called
authoritative or judgmental sampling, and is considered non-probabilistic. The experience of the
investigator is often the basis for sample collection, and bias (depending on the study objectives) should be
recognized as a potential problem. However, preliminary or screening investigations, and certain
regulatory investigations, may correctly employ directed sampling. Directed sampling may focus on "worst
case" conditions in a matrix, for example, the most visually contaminated area or the most recently
generated waste. In the presence of high temporal or spacial variability, directed samples have a very
limited degree ofrepresentativeness.
5.3.7 Simple Random Sampling
Simple random sampling insures. that each element in the population has an equal chance of being
included in the sample. 1bis is often be the method of choice when, for purposes of the investigation, the
matrix is considered homogeneous or when the population is randomly heterogeneous. If the population
contains trends or patterns of contamination, a stratified random sampling or systematic grid sampling
strategy would be more appropriate.
5.3.8 Systematic Sampling over Time or Space
-EISOPQAM 5 -6 May 1996
Systematic sampling over time at the point of generation is useful if the material was sampled
from a wastewater sewer, a materials conveyor belt, or being delivered via truck or pipeline. The sampling
interval would be determined on a time basis, for example every hour from a conveyor belt or pipeline
discharge, or from every third truck load. · Systematic sampling over space might involve the collection of
samples at defined intervals from a ditch, stream, or other matrix that is spatially unique.
5.3.9 Stratified Random Sampling
Stratified random sampling may be useful when distinct strata or "homogeneous sub-groups" are
identified within the population. The strata could be located in different areas of the population, or the
strata may be comprised of different layers. This approach is useful when the individual strata may be
considered intemally homogeneous, or at least have less internal variation, in what would otherwise be
considered a heterogeneous population. Information on the site is usually required to establish the location
of individual strata. A grid may be utilized for sampling several horizontal layers if the strata are
horizontally oriented. A simple random sampling approach is typically utilized for sample collection within
each strata. The use of a stratified random sampling strategy may result in the collection of fewer samples.
5.3.10 Systematic Grid Sampling
Systematic grid sampling involves the collection of samples at fixed intervals when the
contamination is assumed to be randomly distributed. This method is commonly used with populations
when estimating trends or patterns of contamination. This approach may not be acceptable if the entire
population is not accessible, or if the systematic plan becomes "phased" with variations in the distribution
of contaminants within the matrix. This approach may also be useful for identifying the presence of strata
within the population. The grid and starting points should be randomly laid out over the site, yet the
method allows for rather easy location of ·exact sample locations within each grid. Also, the grid size
· would typically be adjusted according t~ the number of samples that are required.
EISOPQAM 5-7 May 1996
I
I
n
I
I
•
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.4 General Considerations for Sampling Designs
Prior to commencing work on any project, the objective of the study in tern1S of the purpose the
data generated is to serve should be known .. Some examples of uses for which data are generated include:
• RC::RA waste identification investigations; .
• RCRA or S uperfund screening investigations (presence or absence of contaminants);
• Superfund Remedial Investigations, Removal Actions, or Feasibility Studies;
• Surface water and sediment studies;
• Wastewater treatment plant evaluations;
• Monitoring investigations;
• UST/UIC investigations; and
• Special environmental characterization investigations.
The purpose of data collection is to meet the objectives of the investigation. The process of
designing an investigation typically follows a logical series of steps. Proper evaluation of these steps• will
greatly enhance the project leader's ability to choose a design which adequately serves the purpose of the
study. The DQO approach may not be strictly followed, but the elements of the approach are always
considered during study planriing. These elements include:
• Identification of objectives, and investigation boundaries;
• Collection of information concerning historical data, site survey, and site history;
• Sampling design selection and design optimization;
• Sample types and number;
• Analytical requirements and limitations; and
• Data interpretation and assessment.
EISOPQAM 5 -8 May 1996
5.5 Soil Sampling Designs
The objectives of a soil sampling investigation must be clearly defined in tenns of the purpose of
the data generated. A discussion of study planning elements that include considerations specific to soil
investigations follows.
5.5.1 Historical Sampling Data, Site Survey, and Site History
Investigations that are used for initial site screening purposes are one of the few cases where
historical sampling data is usually not _available. In this case, the purpose of the sampling effort is to
determine the presence/absence of contaminants and if present, to determine their nature. Such a purpose
can be served with a minimum of samples whose locations can be determined from a site survey and a
review of the site history. When designing a soil sampling study for purposes other than site screening, a
record of previous sampling efforts is usually available from which a relatively sound foundation of
historical sampling data can_be derived.
The site survey is invaluable for soil sample design. Information which should be obtained during
a site survey includes:
• General site layout;
• Site access;
• Soil types and depths;
• Surface water drainage pathways;
• Existing site conditions;
• Visible staining of surface soil;
• Vegetation stress; and
• Possible offsite or non-site related sources.
The site history should include factors such as previous land use both on and nearby the site, types
of industrial operations conducted both on the site and on adjoining property, types of contaminants to
which the site has been exposed, and locations of possible dumping/burial areas. The site history can be
derived from property plats, tax records, aerial photos, and interviews with people familiar with the site.
5.5.2 Data Quality Objectives (DQOs)
Consideration of the purpose which the data generated from the soil sampling effort is to serve
drives the selection of DQOs. DQO selection will then be the main factor which determines the types of
samples to be collected, the types of equipment to be used, and the analytical requirements for the samples.
See Section 5.12 for a discussion ofDQOs.
5 .5 .3 Authoritative Designs for Soil Investigations
When the purpose of the investigation is to determine the presence of contaminants, a simple
strategy can be used. Such a purpose is normally encountered during screening inspections, criminal
investigations, and any other project where the scope is limited to gathering evidence of contamination.
These cases are normally characterized by a laek of previous sampling data, thereby requiring that sample
types and locations be determined by site history and a site survey. In these instances, an authoritative
design is normally used.
E!SOPQAM 5 -9 May 1996
I
I
I
I
R
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Authoritative sampling usually involves a limited number of locations (IO to 15) from which grab
samples are collected. Locations are selected where there is a good probability of finding high levels of
contamination. Examples may include areas where significant releases or spillage occurred according to
the site history or areas of visible staining, stressed vegetation, or surface drainage are noted in the site
survey. An authoritative design usually involves the selection of two or three control sampling locations to
measure possible contaminants migrating onto the site from adjacent sources not involved in the study. The
selection of control locations is similar to the selection of other sampling locations, except that upstream or
upgradient control samples are expected to be unaffected by site contaminants.
Because of the biased nature of an authoritative design, the degree of representativeness is difficult
to estimate. Authoritative samples are not intended to reflect the average characteristics of the site. Since
determining representativeness is not an issue with this type of design, duplicate samples designed to
estimate variability are not normally collected. However, split samples should be collected to measure
sample handling variability:
An interactive approach may be used in an authoritative design to determine the extent of
contamination on a site when the source can be identified. Samples are typically collected using a pattern
that radiates outward from the source. The direction of contaminant migration may not be known which
will result in the collection of more samples, and in this case field screening would be desirable to help in
determining appropriate sampling locations.
5.5.4 Systematic Grid Sampling Designs for Soil Investigations
In cases where both the presence of contaminants and the extent· of contamination needs to be
determined, an authoritative design is inappropriate as site variability cannot be estimated without
collecting an inordinate number of samples. A systematic design is normally used during investigations
when determining the extent of contamination, such as remedial investigations and removal actions.
Once a site has reached the stage where the extent of contamination becomes an issue, access to
data from previous sampling efforts (screening investigations)• which used an authoritative design is
normally available. The prelirn.iruuy data can be used to estimate the variability of contaminant
concentrations as a function of area and/or depth for purposes of planning the more extensive systematic
design. In the absence of previous sampling data a variability study should be conducted. An alternative
would be to estimate the variability, with confirmation of the estimate being made during the more
extensive systematic study. If a variability study is to be conducted, it will be limited in scope and will use
certain defuult values or assumptions to determine the number of samples to collect for determining site
variability. The methods used for variability studies are included in the following discussion of systematic
sampling strategies. · ·
Determination of the Number of Samples to Collect
When designing a systematic grid sampling investigation, the number of samples to be collected
must be determined first. This can be calculated based on variability information derived from previous
sampling data. Upon review of the historical data, a contaminant or contaminants of concern (COCs) can
be selected. COCs are parameters which are closest to or in excess of an action level. Their presence is
normally the driving force behind the need to determine the extent of contamination.
EISOPQAM· .5 -10 May 1996
The following steps are to be followed to determine the number of samples to collect (6):
l.
2.
3.
4.
,.
Select a margin of error (p) acceptable for the subsequent use of the data. For soil studies, a
margin of error of 0.20 is not unusual. · The margin of error may be obtained by dividing the
precision wanted (in units of concentration; e.g. ±10 ppm, etc.) by the known or anticipated mean
concentration of the COCs. Note that changes in the precision or mean concentration for the COC
relative to those anticipated during the planning process may require a re-evaluation of the assumed
margin of error. ·
A coefficient of variation (CV), which is defined as the standard deviation of a COC divided by the
mean of the COC, is either obtained using previous sampling data, or estimated based on
anticipated variability. If a CV above 0.65 is obtained, a large number of samples will usually
result.
The number of samples required may be minimized by using a stratified design if areas with known
higb variability can be identified and addressed separately from areas of lower variability. Areas
of higb variability will require more samples while areas of low variability will require fewer using
the approach outlined in this section: The overall effect will normally be a ·substantially lower
number of samples for the entire site.
A confidence level (tu) needs to be established. For work involving hazardous wastes, a confidence
level of 95% should be used. For a 95% confidence level, a factor of 1.96 (from standard
statistical tables) is used to calculate the number of samples required.
The required number of samples is calculated using the following formula:
n= t/{CY)'
p'
Where:
n = number of samples to collect
tu = statistical factor for a 95% confidence level
CV = coefficient of variation
p = margm or error
In ·a case where no previous sampling data is available, the default values given in the previous
discussion can be used.
n = {1.96)2(0.65)2
(0.20)2
n = 40 samples
Upon completion of the soil sampling effort, the data obtained for the COCs is reviewed. It can
then be determined if an adequate number of samples were collected with respect to the margin of error
and confidence selected during the planning process. This determination is completed by calculating the
CV using the data obtained during the study. The standard deviation of the concentration for a COC is
divided by the mean concentration and the CV is calculated. This CV may be higher or lower than the CV
selected during the planning process. Using this CV value, the same equation is used to determine the
EISOPQAM 5 -11 May 1996
I
I
I
0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
•
required number of samples based on the actual CV for the study. If this second value for "n" is ·1ess than
or equal to the number of samples collected during the study, then 'the site has been characterized for the
extent of COCs within the limits of confidence and error stated. If the second value for "n" is significantly
greater, then additional sampling is necessary, or an adjusnnent to the margin of error or confidence level
should be considered. If the collection of additional samples is deemed necessary by the investigation team,
the data that has been generated may be used to plan for a more efficient and cost-effective re-sampling of
the site. Areas of the site where higher than anticipated variabilities were obtained may be segregated from
areas of lower variability (stratified design). A recalculation of the number of samples required to
characterize each strata should then be completed and resarnpling may proceed.
The following table illustrates the number of samples required at a 95% confidence level with
varying margins of error (p) and coefficients of variation (CV):
Coefficient of Variation (CV)
0.1 0.5 0.65 1.0 2.0
Margin of Error (p)
0.1 4 96 162 384 1537
0.2 I 24 40 96 384 .
0.3 -10 18 42 170
0.5 -4 6 15 61
1.0 -1 2 4 15
2.0 ---1 4
. Number of Samples (n)
Note that as the CV increases at a set margin of error, the number of samples required increases.
When the variability is low (as measured by the standard deviation or the square root of the variance)
relative to the mean of the data, then the CV is low. However, as the variability in the population begins to
increase relative to the mean of the data, then the CV. increases and the number of samples required
increases if characterization of the site at a 95% confidence level and a set margin of error is desired.
A similar relationship is observed for the margin of error. When the precision required (say± IO
ppm lead) is high relative to the mean of the data (say 100 ppm lead), then the margin of error is low (in
this case 0.1). In this case 162 samples would be required with a CV of 0.65 .. If the investigators could
accept a higher margin of error (e.g.,± 20%), and the mean concentration of the data is still JOO ppm lead,
then the resulting margin of error (0.2) would result in a lower number of required samples. Note that 40
samples would be required at the same CV of 0.65.
If the investigators change the confidence level, then the numbers in the table provided would
change accordingly. If the confidence level is decreased to ·so%, then the required number of samples
reflected in this table would be lower for each margin of error and CV combination.
-EISOPQAM 5 -12 May 1996
•
Establishment of the Grid
Having deti:rrnined the number of samples to collect, the project leader should then determine how
to disperse the samples within the site. Commonly, a grid system is used. The number of grids is equai to
the number of samples required for a systematic grid design. . Grids may also be used to deti:rmine
sampling locations when using a random design; however, with this type of design every grid is not
sampled. · .
The size of the grids is calculated by dividing the area of the site by the number of samples
required. The product of this calculation is the area of each grid. By taking the square root of the grid
area, the length of a grid side is deti:rmined.
G = (a/n)112
Where:
G = length per side of each individual grid
a = area
n = number of samples required
The length of a grid size should be "rounded" down to some number convenient for the method
used in laying out the grid (e.g., plane survey, geographical positioning system (GPS), etc.). Rounding
down the grid size will increase the number of samples slightly. It is important to remember that the
number of samples calculated is the minimum, and that site conditions may not allow for collection of all
samples. Therefore, additional samples would be appropriate.
Grab VS Composite Samples
When designing a systematic grid sampling investigation, a determination of whether to collect
grab or composite samples must be made. Grab samples may not adequately describe variability, even
within individual grid cells, and therefore, limit the representativeness of the data set. If the study involves
a small area with grid cells of 25 feet or less in length, then grab samples could be collected in each grid
cell without significantly affecting the representativeness o'f the data. However, most studies have much
larger grids (100 to 500 feet per side). In these cases, composite samples collected within each grid cell
result in more representative data. It should be remembered that a composite sample under the best of
conditions will yield an average value of contaminants within the grid. Composite samples are most
appropriate where a reasonable degree of variability is anticipated, and where soil types are amenable to
adequate mixing. This is normally the. case when contaminants have been distributed by airborne
deposition (relatively homogeneous distribution across the site). Where localized "hot spots" are present
due to releases from process units, indiscriminate dumping, or the burying of wastes, a more specialized
approach that takes these types of distribution into account is required. Situations where the distribution of
contaminants is strongly non-random (heterogeneous distributions) are the most difficult to plan for and
characterize:
Composite samples should consist of five to nine aliquots per sample located on compass points
within the grid cell. Greater than nine aliquots per sample can result in dilution of fairly high
concentrations down to a value below the analytical detection limits. Less than 5 aliquots may limit the
representativeness of the sample with no added value over a single grab sample within the grid cell. A
certain number of samples are collected (10 percent of the grid cells is often selected) during the
investigation for variability determinations based on rotating the aliquot distribution pattern on the points of
the compass within the grid cell. · ·
EISOPQAM 5 -13 . May 1996
I
I
m
n
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Surface vs Sub-Surface Samples
The two main considerations for sub-surface soil samples are contaminant mobility and type of
deposition. A contaminant that is relatively immobile in soil will naturally be found in the same area in
which it was deposited. Mobile contaminants require specialized consideration of the likely extent of their
migration in order to determine sub-surface soil sampling locations and depths. Airborne deposition of
-· mobile contaminants normally require a considerable amount of sub-surface soil sampling to determine
their extent in a systematic design.
EISOPQAM 5 -14 May 1996
5.6 Ground Water Sampling Designs
Sampling design, as it pertains to ground water, often involves the use of some form of temporary
well point or direct push technology (DPT) for rapid in-field screening and plume delineation. These
techniques are discussed in Section 6. Samples obtained using these techniq~es are usually analyzed
immediately, using an on-site field laboratory, or are sent to an off-site laboratory for quick turnaround
analyses. In this manner, delineations of both a horizontal (areal) and vertical nature can be rapidly
achieved in the field. These delineations can then be used as the basis for locating and installing permanent
ground_ water monitoring wells.
The degree of complexity for these delineations varies, depending on a number of factors which
include:
• The known or anticipated size of the suspected source area.
• Site stratigraphy.
• The amount of information regarding hydrogeological conditions (thickness of aquifers or
water-bearing units, depth to confining units, ground water flow direction, etc.).
• The type of contamination (aqueous phase, light non-aqueous phase liquid {LNAPL), or dense
non-aqueous phase liquid (DNAPL)).
In addition to the design considerations imposed by the preceding factors, screening program
designs may be either simple iterative or grid-based. Grid-based may even transform, at some point, to a
more or less iterative program.
5.6.1 Single Source Iterative Programs
The simplest ·case is one in which there is a small source area of an aqueous phase contaminant or
component, such as benzene, toluene, ethyl benzene, and xylene {BTEX) contamination without associated
product, and there is a high degree of confidence with respect to ground water flow direction. In this
situation, a sample location would be placed in the middle of the source area, for source area
characterization, and several locations would be .established downgradient. It is not possible to specify the
numbers and locations for these sampling points. Three points would typically be the minimum number,
one located immediately downgradient of the source area and two located to either side of the center line. If
contaminants were detected in any of the downgradient locations, additional locations would · need to be
established downgradient and/or side-gradient of those locations to complete boundary delineation .. This
process would continue until both the downgradient and lateral extent of the contamination were
established.
As indicated, the numbers and locations of these sampling locations are subject to site scale and
other factors and can only be determined in .the field using best judgement. At this point, some attention
should be given to vertical characterization of the contaminants. Additional samples should be collected at
locations below the depths at which the contaminants were identified until the vertical extent is determined.
If this is not accomplished during screening activities, it must be done during subsequent investigations
with permanent monitoring wells.
Single0source light non-aqueous phase liquids {LNAPL) problems are generally no more .
complicated than the non-aqueous phase delineatiori problems. If there are no serious vertical profiling
EISOPQAM 5 -15 May 1996
I
I
D
D
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
problems, however, the sampling device should be capable of identifying the presence of and determining the thicknesses of the floating LNAPL layers.
· A more complex situation would be a single source area in which there is a dense non-aqueous
phase liquid (DNAPL) product layer with associated aqueous phase contamination. The initial part of the
investigation would be conducted in a manner similar to the simplest case. After delineation of the aqueous
phase plume, additional characterization would be required for the DNAPL component. If a confining
layer is present and the depth to the surface of this layer is known, samples should be collected from the
boundary between the water-bearing formation and the confining unit to determine if DNAPL products are
present. Wherever DNAPLs are found, additional samples must be collected. The rationale for sample
location selection depends on both sub-surface structure and ground water flow direction. DNAPL
constituents may flow down-dip on the surface of confining units, in directions that are totally contrary to ground water flow directions. No attempt at DNAPL characterization should be made until the site
geology (stratigraphy, structure and ground water flow !)atterns) are known.
5.6.2 Multiple-Source Area Grided Programs
Some ground water screening investigations involve identifying multiple source areas and
determining the size and shape (delineation) of the associated plumes over relatively large areas. In these cases, it may be appropriate to pre-<letermine and establish a grid pattern to direct the collection of ground water samples. As the apparent contaminant pattern begins to develop, it may be appropriate to disregard
established but unsampled sampling locations and concentrate on other areas within the grid pattern. It
may even be appropriate to expand the area of investigation by establishing additional sampling locations.
These locations may be determined by using a grid or may be located using best judgement, in an iterative
manner.
Considerations regarding non-aqueous phases must be observed here as well. If aqueous phase
sample analysis indicates that DNAPL constituents may be present, sampling should be conducted at the surface of the confining unit to determine if product layers are present.
5.6.3 Typical Ground Water Screening Devices
Listed below are numerous tools, devices, and techniques available to field investigators that can
be used to effectively collect ground water samples for rapid field screening and plume delineation.
• Temporary wells -Well casing can be installed temporarily, either inside hollow-stem augers
or in an open hole after removal of hollow-or solid-stem augers. Because of the potential for
cross-<:ammunication between vertical intervals, this technique is appropriate only for
screening the upper portion of the saturated zone. Samples are pumped or bailed directly from
the well casing. Because turbidity is likely to be a problem using this technique, care should be
taken when using the samples for metals screening. Depth of the investigation is limited only
by the capability of the drill rig and cross-<:antamination considerations. See section 6.10 for
temporary well installation procedures.
• Geoprobe® -Slotted steel pipe is hydraulically pushed or hammer driven to the desired
sampling depth. Samples are usually acquired with a peristaltic pump. The device is subject
to cross-<:ammunication at threaded rod joints. It requires some knowledge of the saturated
interval. The Geoprobe® is most useful at depths less than 30 to 40 feet below ground
surface.
EISOPQAM 5 -16 May 1996
• Hydropunch® - A larger, more versatile device, similar to the Geoprobe®, which is pushed to
sampling depths with a drill rig. It requires some knowledge of saturated intervals to use D
successfully. Depths of investigation with this technology are roughly correlated to the
capability of the drill rig used to push the sampling device.
• Hydrocone® -This is a pressure-sealed sampling device that is hydraulically pushed to the I
desired sampling depth. It 'is capable of collecting a discrete sample from any depth at which it
EISOPQAM
can be pushed. A limited volWlll! of about 700 ml is collected and is generally turbid. This u
technique is mainly applicable for the screening for volatile organic compounds. A temporary
well point can be driven by the same drill rig to collect samples with greater volume
_requirements. Samples from depths exceeding I 00 feet have been obtained with this device.
Routine depths obtained without special anchoring are generally within the 5 0-foot r.mge, but I
are dependent on the geological materials being encountered.
5 -17 ·May 1996
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5. 7 Surface Water and Sediment Sampling Designs
5. 7.1 Sampling Site Selection
The following factors should be considered in the selection of surface water and sediment sampling
locations:
• Study objectives;
• Water use;
• Point source discharges;
• Nonpoint source discharges;
• Tributary locations;
• Changes in stream characteristics;
• Type of stream_ bed;
• Depth of stream;
• Turbulence;
• Presence of structures (weirs, dams, etc.);
• Accessibility; and
• Tidal effect (estuarine).
If the study objective is to investigate a specific water use such as a source of water supply,
recreation, or other discrete use, then considerations such as accessibility, flow, velocity, physical
characteristics; etc., are not critical from a water quality investigation standpoint.
If the objective of a water quality study is to determine patterns of pollution, provide data for mathematical modeling purposes, conduct assimilative capacity studies, etc., where more than a small area ·
or short stream reach is to be investigated, then several factors become interrelated and need to be
considered in sampling location selection. An excellent guide to conducting surface water stream studies is
F. W. Kittrells, "A Practical Guide to Water Quality Studies" (7).
Before any sampling is conducted, an initial reconnaissance should be made to locate suitable
sampling locations, Bridges and piers are normally good choices as sites since they provide ready access
and permit water sampling at any point across the width of the water body. However, these structures may
alter the nature of water flow and thus influence sediment deposition or scouring. Additionally, bridges and
piers are not always located in desirable locations with reference to waste sources, tributaries, etc. Wading
for water samples in lakes, ponds, and slow-moving rivers and streams must be done with caution since
bottom deposits are easily disturbed, thereby resulting in increased sediments in the overlying water
column. On the other hand, wadeable areas may be best for sediment sampling. In slow-moving or deep
water, a boat is usually required for sampling. Sampling station locations can be chosen without regard to
other means of access if the stream is navigable by boat, especially in estuarine systems where boats
frequently provide the only access to critical sampling locations.
Fresh water_environments are commonly separated into two types:
• Flowing water, including rivers, creeks, and small to intennittent streams; and
• Water that is contained, with restricted flow including lakes, ponds, and manrnade
impoundments
EISOPQAM S -18 May 1996
I
Since these waterways differ considerably in general characteristics, site selection must be adapted
to. each. Estuarine environments are a special case and are discussed separately.
EISOPQAM 5 -19 May 1996
D
u
I
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.7.2 Rivers, Streams, and Creeks
In the selection of a surface water sampling site in rivers, streams, or creeks, areas that exhibit the
greatest degree of cross-sectional homogeneity should be located. When available, previously colle<:ted data may indicate if potential sampling locations are well mixed or vertically or horizontally stratified.
Since mixing is principally governed by turbulence and water velocity, the selection of a site immediately downstream of a riffle area will insure good vertical mixing. These locations are also likely areas for deposition of sediments since the greatest deposition occurs where stream velocities decrease provided that ·· the distance is far enough downstream from the riffle area for the water to become quiescent. Horizontal
(cross-channel) mixing occurs in constrictions in the channel, but because of velocity increases, the stream bottom may be scoured, and therefore, a constriction is a poor location to collect sediment.
Typical. sediment depositional areas are located:
• Inside of river l:>ends;
• Downstream of islands;
• Downstream of obstructions; and
• Areas of flow reversals.
Sites that are located immediately upstream or downstream from the confluence of two streams or rivers should generally be avoided since flows from two tributaries may not immediately mix, and at times
due to possible backflow can upset tbe depositional flow patterns.
When several locations along a stream reach are to be sampled, they should be strategically
located:
• At intervals based on time-of-water-travel, not distance, e.g., sampling stations may be located
about one-half day time-of-water-travel for tbe first three days downstream of a waste source
(the first six stations) and then approximately one day through the remaining distance.
• At tbe same locations if possible, when the data collected is to be compared to a previous
study.
• Whenever a marked physical change occurs in the stream channel. Example: A stream reach
between two adjacent stations should not include both a long rapids section of swift shallow
. water with a rocky bottom, and a long section of deep, slow-moving water witb a muddy bottom. Stations at each end of the combined reach would yield data on certain rates of
change, such as reaeration, that would be an unrealistic average of two widely different rates. The actual natural characteristics of tbe stream would be better defined by inserting a third
sampling station within the reach, between the rapids and the quiet water sections.
• To isolate major discharges as well as major tributaries. Dams and weirs cause changes
EISOPQAM
in the physical characteristics of a stream. They usually create quiet, deep pools in river reaches that previously were swift and shallow. Such impoundments should be bracketed with
sampling stations. When time-of-water-travel through the pools are long, stations should be
established within the impoundments.
5 -20 May 1996
..
Some structures, such as dams, permit overflow and cause swirls in streams that accomplishes
significant reaeration of oxygen deficient water. In such cases, stations should be located short distances
upstream and downstream from the structures to measure the rapid, artificial increase in dissolved oxygen,
which is not representative of natural reaeration.
When major changes occur in a stream reach, an upstream station, a downstream station, and an
intermediate station should be selected. Major changes may consist of:
• A wastewater discharge;
• A tributary inflow;
• Non-point source discharge (farms or industrial sites); and
• . A significant difference-in channel characteristics.
The use of three stations is especially important when rates of change of unstable constituents are
being determined. If results from one of only two stations in a subreach are in error for some unforeseen
reason, it may not be possible to judge which of the two sets of results indicate the actual rate of change.
Results from at least two of three stations, on the other hand, may support each other and indicate the true
pattern ·of water quality in the sub reach.
To determine the effects of certain discharges cir tributary streams on ambient water quality,
stations should be located both upstream and downstream from the discharges. In addition to the upstream
and downstream stations bracketing a tributary, a station should be established on the tributary at a
location upstream and out of the influence of the receiving stream ..
Unless a stream is extremely turbulent, it is nearly impossible to measure the effect of a waste ·
discharge or tributary immediately downstream from the source. Inflow frequently "hugs" the stream bank
due to differences in density, temperature, and specific gravity, and consequently lateral (cross-channel)
mixing does not occur for some distance.
Tributaries should be sampled as near the mouth as feasible. Frequently, the mouths of tributaries
are accessible by boat. Care should be exercised to avoid collecting water samples from stratified locations
which are due to differences in density resulting from temperature, dissolved solids, or turbidity.
Actual sampling locations will vary with the size of the water body and the mixing characteristics
of the stream or river. Generally, for small streams less than 20 feet wide, a sampling site should be . .
selected where the water is well mixed. In such cases, a single grab sample taken at mid-<iepth at the center
of the channel is adequate to represent the entire cross-section. A sediment sample could also be collected
in the same vicinity if available.
For slightly larger streams, at least one vertical composite should be collected from mid-stream.
Samples should be collected just below the surfuce, at mid-<iepth, and just above the bottom. For larger
streams and rivers; at least quarter point (1/4, 1/2, and 3/4 width) composite samples should be collected.
Dissolved oxygen, pH, temperature, and conductivity should be measured from each aliquot of the vertical
composite.
EISOPQAM 5 -21 May 1996
I
I
I
D
I
D
0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
For large rivers, several locations across the channel width should be sampled. Vertical com-
posites across the channel width should be located in a manner that is roughly proportional to flow, i.e.,
they should be closer together toward mid-<:bannel; where most of the flow is, than toward the banks, where
the proportion of total flow is less. The nwnber of vertical composites required and the nwnber of depths
sampled for each are usually determined in the field by the investigators. This determination is based on a
reasonable balance between the following two considerations:
• Tiie larger the nwnber of subsamples, the more closely the composite sample will represent the
water body; and
• Subsample collection is time-<:onswning and expensive, and increases the chance of cross-
contamination.
In most circumstances, a nwnber of sediment samples should be collected along a cross-section of •
a river or stream in order to·adequately characterize the bed material. A common procedure is to sample at
quarter points along the cross-section. When the sampling technique or equipment requires that the
samples be extruded or transferred on site, they may be combined into a single composite sample.
However, samples of dissimilar composition should not be combined but should be stored for separate
analysis in the laboratory. To insure representative samples, the preferred method is diver deployed coring
tubes.
5. 7.3 Lakes, Ponds, and Impoundments
Lakes, ponds, and impoundments have a much greater tendency to stratify than rivers and streams.
The relative lack of mixing generally requires that more samples be obtained. Occasionally, an extreme
turbidity difference may occur where a highly turbid river enters a lake. For these situations, each layer of
the vertically stratified water column needs to be considered. Since the stratification is caused by water
temperature differences, the cooler, more dense river water is beneath the warmer lake water. A
temperature profile of the water column as well as ·visual observation of lake samples can often detect the
different iayers which can be sampled separately.
The nwnber of water sampling stations on a lake, pond, or impoundment will vary with the
objective of the hlvestigation as well as the size and shape of the basin. In ponds and small impoundments,
a single vertical composite at the deepest point may be sufficient. Dissolved oxygen, pH, and temperature
are generally measured for each vertical composite aliquot. In naturally-formed ponds, the deepest point is
usually near the center; in impoundments, the deepest point is usually near the darn.
In lakes and larger impoundments, several vertical subsamples should be composited to form a
single sample. These vertical sampling locations are often collected along a transect or grid. The nwnber
of vertical subsamples and the depths at which subsamples are taken are usually at the discretion of the
field investigators. In some cases, it may be of interest to collect separate composites of epilimnetic and
hypolimnetic zones (above and below the thermocline or depth of greatest temperature change).
In lakes with irregular shapes and with several bays and coves that are protected from the wind,
additional separate composite samples may be needed to adequately determine water quality. Similarly,
additional samples should be collected where discharges, tributaries, land· use characteristics, etc., are
suspected of influencing water quality ..
EISOPQAM S -22 May 1996
•
•
When collecting sediment samples in lakes, ponds, and reservoirs, the sampling site should be
approximately at the center of the water mass. 1bis is particularly true for reservoirs that are formed by
the irnpoundment of rivers or streams. Generally, the coarser grained sediments are deposited near the
headwaters of the reservoir, and the bed sediments near the center of the water mass will be composed of
fine-grained materials. 1be shape, inflow pattern, bathymetry, and circulation must be considered when
selecting sediment sampling sites in lakes or reservoirs.
5. 7. 4 fatuarine Waters
Estuarine areas are zones where inland freshwaters (both surface and ground) mix with oceanic
saline waters. Estuaries are generally categorized into three types, dependent upon freshwater inflow and
mixing properties:
• Mixed estuary -Characterized by an absence of vertical halocline (gradual or no marked
increase in salinity in the water column)•and a gradual increase in salinity seaward. Typically
this type of estuary is found in major freshwater sheetflow areas, featuring shallow depths.
• Salt wedge estuary -Characterized by a sharp vertical increase in salinity and channelized
freshwater inflow into a deep estuary. In these estuaries, the vertical mixing forces cannot
override the density differential between fresh and saline waters. In effect, a salt wedge
tapering inland moves horizontally, back and forth, with the tidal phase. .
• Oceanic estuary -Characterized by salinities approaching full strength oceanic waters.
D
a
u
I
I
Seasonally, freshwater inflow is small with the preponderance of the fresh and saline water I
mixing occurring near, or at, the shore line.
A reconnaissance investigation should be conducted for each estuarine study unless prior
knowledge of the estuarine type is available. The reconnaissance should focus upon the freshwater and
oceanic water dynamics with respect to the study objective. National Oceanic Atmospheric Administration
(NOAA) tide tables and United States Geological Survey (USGS) freshwater surface water flow records
provide valuable insights into the estuary hydrodynamics. The basic in-situ measurement tools for
reconruussance are:
--Boat;
• , Recortling fathometer;
• Salinomcter;
• · Dissolved oxygen meter; and
•· Global Positioning System (GPS) equipment and charts.
'These instruments coupled with the study objective or pollution source location, whether it is a
point or nonpoint source problem, provide the focus for selecting sampling locations. More often than not,
preplanned sampling locations in estuarine areas are changed during the actual study period. Because of
the dynamics of estuaries, the initial sampling results often reveal that the study objective could be better
served by relocating, adding, or <;Jeleting sampling locations.
Water sampling in estuarine areas is normally based upon the tidal phases, with samples collected
on successive slack tides. All estuarine sampling should include vertical salinity measurements at one to
five-foot increments coupled with vertical dissolved oxygen and temperature profiles. A variety of water
EISOPQAM 5 -23 May 1996
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:1
sampling devices are used, but in general, the Van Dom (or similar type) horizontal sampler or peristaltic
pump are suitable.
EISQPQAM S -24 May 1996
Samples are normally collected at mid-depth in areas where the depths are less than l O feet, unless
the salinity profile indicates the presence of a halocline (salinity stratification). In that case, samples are
collected from each ·stratum. Depending upon the study objective, when depths are greater than· 10 feet,
water samples may be collected at the one-foot depth from the surface, mid-depth, and one-foot from the
bottom.
Generally, estuarine investigations are two phased, with study investigations conducred during wet
and dry periods. Depending upon the freshwater inflow sources, estuarine water quality dynamics cannot
normally be determined by a single season study.
5.7.5 Control Stations
In order to have a basis of comparison of water quality, the collection of samples from control
stations is always necessary. A control station upstream from the waste source is as important as are
stations downgradient, and· should be chosen with equal care to ensure representative results. In some
situations it is desirable to have background stations located in similar, nearby estuaries which are not
impacted by the phenomena or pollutants being investigated. At times it may be desirable to locate two or
three stations downstream from the waste inflow to establish the rate at which the unstable material is
changing. The time-of-water-travel between the stations should be sufficient to permit accurate
measurement of the change in the constituent under consideration.
EISOPQAM 5 -25 , May 1996
I
D
n
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.8 Waste Sampling Designs
5.8.1 Introduction
Waste sampling involves the collection of materials that are typically generated from industrial
processes, and therefore may contain elevated concentrations of ha7.ardous constituents. Waste
sampling in its broadest term is conventionally considered to be sampling of processed wastes or man-
made waste materials. Because of the regulatory, safety, and analytical considerations, wastewater
sampling should be separate from waste sampling. Environmental sampling is also different from
waste sampling as it involves the collection of samples from natural matrices ·such as soil, sediment,
groundwater, surface water and air.
It is convenient to distinguish waste management units into two types due to Branch safety
protocols: The first, • open units•, are units where wastes are generated, stored, or disposed, and
would be open to the environment and environmental influences. Examples of open waste units are
surface impoundments and waste piles. "Closed units" are waste containers/drums, tanks, or sumps
where the potential for the accumulation of toxic vapors or explosive/ignitable gases exists. While
· both open and closed waste units are considered dangerous because of the potential exposure to
concentrated wastes, . closed units are regarded as high hazards due to their potential to accumulate
gases and vapors.
5.8.2 Waste Investigation Objectives
The first step in an investigation is the identification of study objectives. Thorough planning
and researching of the waste generation/management practices is then required for the samples and
associated data to reflect the waste population characteristic(s) of interest. Prior to sampling wastes. it
is extremely important to obtain and assess all of the available information, e.g., waste generation
process(es), waste hanciling and storage practices, previous field screening results, existing sampling
and analytical data, any pertinent regulations, and permitting or compliance issues.
Common objectives in waste sampling investigations include:
• Determine if a material is a hazardous waste;
· • Characterize a wastestream;
• Determine if a waste material has been released into the environment; or
• Characterize environmental media contaminated with ha7.ardous waste.
The most frequently used objective during RCRA Case Development/Investigation Evaluations
and Criminal Investigations involve ha7.ardous waste determinations. For studies that are designed to
determine if a release has OCOJrred, it is recommended that samples be collected from the source as
well as both the affected and the unaffected media.
Waste matrices are frequently heterogenous in nature due to the physical characteristics of the
material (particle size, yiscosity, etc.), the distribution of hazardous constituents within the matrix, or
the manner in which the material has been managed or disposed. When waste is comprised of strata
that can be separated by the sampling equipment (e.g., liquid-liquid or liquid-solid phases), it is not
necessary to collect a ·sample that is representative of the entire unit to make a waste determination.
An aa;eptable objective would be to make a waste determination on a specific strata. For example, in
drums containing an oil and water mixture, a glass 'thief or a composite liquid waste sampler
EISOPQAM 5 • 26 May 1996
(COLIW ASA) could be used to sample only the oil or only the water phase to determine if the phase
of interest contains hazardous constituents or characteristics.
5.8.3. Considerations for Waste Sampling Designs
Waste sampling designs should consider the variability of the sample population in terms of the
characteristic of concern, the physical size and state of items present in the population, and the ability
to access all portions of the population for purposes of sampling. Elements of the sampling design
may include the determination of the actual sampling locations and the number of samples to be
collected, decisions on the type of samples (grab or composite) to collect , and selection of the
appropriate sampling equipment. While sampling locations are usually restricted to accessible portions ·
of a sample population, the number of samples is usually determined by preliminary information, the
size of the sample population, field screening results, and the variability of the waste. Composite
samples are used to obtain average concentrations of waste units while grab samples are utilizcl to
delineate hot spots or to acquire data for sample variability.
A small wastesti-eam that has a hazardous constituent or characteristic randomly distributed
(relatively homogeneous matrix) requires fewer samples than a large wastestream that has a constituent
or characteristic of concern which is non-randomly distributed (heterogeneous matrix). For a waste
that is randomly distributed, a directed or systematic grid sampling design would be appropriate
depending on the objectives, whereas a stratified sampling or very specialize design should be
employed for wastes that are non-randomly distributed.
Reviewing the available preliminary information should improve the effectiveness of any
sampling investigation. If waste variability cannot be estimated after review of available information,
then a preliminary sampling and analytical effort may be necessary. A preliminary sampling
investigation· would be important when the study's objective is to fully characterize a waste stream
using a probabilistic or "statistical~ design.
Probabilistic sampling designs similar to the ones used to characterize a site with soil
contamination can be used to characterize large units such as waste piles or surface impoundments with
random contaminant distributions. Note that an authoritative design is often appropriate to
demonstrate the maximum degree of contamination in certain waste management units. Examples
include the collection of a sludge sample for inorganic analyses at the inlet to a surface impoundment,
or a sample for volatile organic compound analysis from the most recently generated material placed in
a waste pile.
A comprehensive probabilistic design may be required to fully characterize unusually complex
wastestreams that have a high degree of heterogeneity. For some highly complex, heterogeneous
wastes where an average concentration would not be reflected by a design of reasonable scope, an
authoritative sampling design based on the sampler's experience may be the only feasible approach.
No background or control samples are required when collecting highly concentrated waste
samples.
5.8.4 Waste Sampling Equipment
An extremely important factor in the sampling strategy will be determined by the. physical
characteristics of the waste material. Selecting appropriate sampling equipment can be one of the most
challenging tasks in developing a sampling design. By selecting sampling equipment that will not
discriminate against certain physical characteristics (e.g., phase, particle size, etc.), sampling bias can
EISOPQAM. 5 -27 May 1996
u
n
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
be minimized during waste sampling. Because wastes often stratifies due to different densities of
phases, settling of solids, or varying wastes constituents generated at different times, it also may be
important to obtain a venical cross section of the entire unit. ·
Other desired features of sampling equipment that should be considered during sample design
are; the ability to access the desired sampling locations, the ability to maintain sample integrity, the
reactivity of equipment with the waste, and the ability to properly decontaminate the sampling
apparatus. In addition, analytical requirements such as the sample handling and preparation to
correctly analyze physical samples need to be considered. For solidified wastes, samples will often be
required to undergo panicle size reduction (PSR) prior to chemical analyses.
Sampling equipment should be selected to accommodate all of the known physical
characteristics of concern or chosen such that the effect of any sampling bias is understood. Often
because of a lack of preliminary information, varying field conditions, or waste heterogeneity, a piece
of equipment selected during the sampling design may be unsuccessful for collecting a panicular waste
sample _and another. piece of equipment· will be required as a substitute. Any sampling bias or
deficiencies resulting from the use of substituted equipment should be documented and reviewed with
the data. ·
5.8.5 Field Screening
Field screening can be very effective in waste characterization and extremely valuable in
selecting appropriate sampling locations and chemical analyses when little preliminary data exists.
Field investigators routinely use observations of the physical characteristics of drum contents, air
monitoring equipment, pH meters/paper, and field flash point analyzers to confirm preliminary data or
to decide on sampling locations during · waste investigations. Figure 5-1 (RCRA Waste
'Characterization) is a flow diagram that depicts the process that field investigators may use to decide
which waste containers to sample and what analyses to perform on panicular samples.
EISOPQAM S -28 May 1996
'-"
it
- -
RCRA
WASTE CHARACTERIZATION
---
► LN '"'·• ....
l
--
►
I
I
-+ w::1:u•
-liiil
!
1: 111.J •n , ..
(INORGA "CS)
(txl 1•ts1·,
T r t,, I
~Cl IJ:t•, I -,l l e~~l~f:;.f:l::I~, ,t~
?,,~xr..,ll'.::l. ,-----
' a·
• -----_1
r __ ,r __ _
I _,,
iiiii liiiil -!!!!!!I
I
I
I
.I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.9 Wastewater Sampling Designs
Introduction
Wastewater sampling studies focus primarily on collecting wastewater samples of the influent
or effluent at domestic and non-domestic facilities. The Sa.I!]pling activities are usually conducted for
National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) compliance, compliance assistance, civil
and criminal investigations, and water quality studies. The collection of wastewater samples is
necessary in order to obtain reliaQle data that can suppon compliance or enforcement activities.
Specific sampling criteria for the collection of wastewater samples is given in Section 9. of this SOP.
The main considerations in developing a wastewater sampling strategy are as follows:
• Type of study (Compliance Sampling Inspection, Diagnostic Evaluation, etc.).
• Regulated or target pollutants in the wastewater stream to be sampled.
• Selection of the projected sampling locations to satisfy the study objectives.
• Quality control criteria of the parameters to be· sampled ( oil and grease samples need to be
collected as grab samples, trip blanks are taken into the field for the collection of samples
for volatile organic compound analyses, etc.). ·
Complexity of the sampling program will vary with a number of factors. Some primary
factors are as follows:
• • The number of sampling stations to be monitored. This will be dependent on NPDES
.permit requirements and the type of study (typically Toxic CSis and DEs require a greater
amount of sampling stations than a routine CSI).
• Special handling requirements of the target pollutants (sampling equipment for trace
organic compounds require special cleaning procedures, etc.).
• Laboratory conducting the analyses (use of a contract laboratory may require shipping
from the field, etc.).
• Accessibility to sampling stations.
• Process and operation criteria of the source generator (e.g., batch operation versus
continuous discharge).
• Coordination of panicipating organizations in the study (e.g., state assistance with the
sample collection).
• The length of sampling activities will dictate logistical considerations (e.g., shipment of
samples, additional supplies, etc.).
EISOPQAM 5 -30 May 1996
5.10 UST and UIC Sampling Designs
UST and UIC studies focus on determining the quality of the ground water in a target area.
Sampling of the ground water in the target area provides the needed scientific data for regional
decisions on impacted areas. The main considerations in developing a UST or UIC sampling strategy
are as follov.'S:
• Identification of the pollutants in the ground water.
• Identification of the source generator.
• Delineation of the contamination plume.
Complexity of the sampling prograin will vary based on a number of factors. Some primary
factors are as follows:
• Size of the target area.
• Hydrogeological conditions of the target area.
• Accessibility to potable and ground water monitoring wells.
• Process mode of the source generator responsible for the ground water contamination.
Whenever possible, at least one background location (possibly more) should be selected to
sample ground water quality representative of an area that is not impacted by any source generator.
Background samples· should be collected prior to collection of potentially contaminated samples.
Enough sampling sites should be utilized to assure a representative sampling of ground water in the
target area to adequately characterize the extent of ground water contamination.
Primary impact sampling locations, should be located downgradient of the source generator
and at a distance near to the source generator to isolate the contributing process mode responsible for
the ground water contamination.
EISOPQAM 5 -31 May 1996
m
D
0
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.11 Air Toxics Monitoring Designs
Ambient air monitoring strategies vary depending upon the monitoring objective. However, some elements are important for any air monitoring objective. Meteorology measurements should be taken conairrent with any major air monitoring effort. At a minimum, these measurements should include wind speed and wind direction.
At least on background sampling location (possibly more) should be selected to sample an air
mass that is representative of the area before it is impacted by any emission from the site being
monitored. Background samples should be collected conairrent with the site samples. An adequate
number of sampling locations should be selected to assure representative sampling of the air mass, and
provide enough data to adequately characterize the contaminant concentrations being emined from the site. Generally, at a site with soil contamination, sampling should be conducted at the areas of high contaminant concentration, near the downwind fencelines, and/or at the fencelines near any residences.
Whenever possible, the sampling sites should be located in an open space and well away from
any tall buildings. Anention should be given to avoiding potential local interference such as earth
moving equipment, haul roads, etc.
Sampling methods for various ambient air pollutants are given in Section 14 of this SOP.
EISOPQAM 5. 32 May 1996
5.12 Data Quality Objectives
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVE:
• To ensure that a proper level of QA/Of:, is performed to match the analytical effort of
the study.
• To determine what practical limits are to be placed on the subsequent use of the
analytical and field data.
As defined in EPA's "Data Quality Objectives Process for Superfund, Interim Final Guidance"
(8), Data Quality Objectives (DQO) are qualitative and quantitative statements derived from the
outputs of each step of the DQ0 process. The DQO process offers a way to plan field investigations
so that the quality of data collected can be evaluated with respect to the data's intended use. (For a
detailed discussion of the complete DQO process, refer to the referenced guidance document.)
· Depending on the study objective and DQOs, different field procedures and analytical methods
may be a=Ptable. Data collected in the field include samples and site information. The methods by
which samples are collected may limit the uses of the subsequent analytical data. The methods by
which site information, such as physical measurements, photographs, field notes, etc., are collected,
may reduce their accuracy. The manner in which sampling equipment is cleaned will also affect the
DQO level of the data. Higher quality methods may be substituted for lower level work.
Field methodologies described in this SOP support the highest level of data gathering, unless
stated otherwise. These are the standard methods to be used for all studies. Any deviations from these
methods must be documented in the field logbook or the approved study plan. Investigators must be
aware that such deviations in the field work may reduce the DQO level of the data, with a subsequent
reduction in the data uses.
Occasionally, special analytical procedures may require specialized field procedures and
equipment. The lead investigator must be aware that these procedures should be specified in the
approved study plan prior to beginning the study.
There are four data categories. The first two are defined by Region 4; the latter two are in the
"Interim Final Guidance".
• Field Screening -This level is characterized by the use of portable instruments which can
provide real-time data to assist in the optimization of sampling locations and health and
safety support. Data can be generated regarding the presence or absence of certain
contaminants at sampling locations.
• Field Analyses -This level is characterized by the use of portable analytical instruments
I
I
u
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
which can be used on site, or in a mobile laboratory stationed near a site. Depending upon I
the types of contaminants, sample matrix, and personnel skills, qualitative and quantitative
data can be obtained.
I
EISOPQAM 5 -33 May 1996 I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I·
I
I
• Screening Data with Definitive Confirmation -These data are generated by rapid, less
precise methods of analysis with less rigorous sample preparation. Sample preparation
. steps may be restricted to simple procedures such as dilution with a ·solvent, instead of
elaborate extraction/digestion and cleanup. Screening data provides analyte identification
and.quantification, although the quantification may be relatively imprecise. At least 10%
of the· screening data should be confirmed using appropriate analytical methods and
QA/Qt:, procedures and criteria associated with definitive data. Screening data without
associated confirmation data is not considered to be data of known quality.
• Definitive Data -These data are generated using rigorous analytical methods, such as
approved EPA reference methods. Data are analyte-specific, with confirmation of analyte
identity and concentration. These methods produce tangible raw data (e.g.,
chromatograms, spectra or digital values) in the form of paper printouts or computer-
generated el=onic files. Data may be generated at the site or at an off-site location, as
long as the QA/Qt:, requirements are satisfied. To be definitive, either the analytical or
total measurement error must be determined.
DQO information in field study plans should include:
• Sampling locations -including background and/or control samples.
• Sampling procedures -reference to this SOP or other guidance documents.
• Sample type -surface water, ground water, soil, waste, GPS coordinates, etc.
• Use of data -characterize nature and extent of contamination, accurate sample locations, eu:.
• Data types -field measurements and field analytical data level and laboratory analyses and
laboratory analytical data levels.
• Field QA/QC -percentage of split and duplicate samples, trip blanks, rinse blanks, etc.
EISOPQAM 5 -34 May 1996
5.13 Specific Sample Collection Quality Control Procedures
5.13.1 Introduction
This subsection provides guidelines for establishing quality control procedures for sampling
activities. Strict adherence to all of the standard operating procedures outlined in this subsection form
the basis for an acceptable sampling quality assurance program.
5.13.2 Experience Requirements
There is no substirute for field experience. Therefore, all professional and paraprofessional
investigators shall have the equivalent of six months field experience before they are permitted to select
sampling sites on their own initiative. This field experience shall be gained by on-the-job training
using the "buddy" system. Each new investigator should accompany an experienced employee on as
many different types of field srudies as possible. During this training period, the new employee will be
permitted to perform all facets of field investigations, including sampling, under the direction and
supervision of senior investigators.
5.13.3 Traceability Requirements
All sample collection activities shall be traceable through field records to the person collecting
the sample and to the specific piece of sampling equipment (where appropriate) used to collect that
sample. All maintenance and calibration records for sampling equipment (where appropriate) shall be
kept so that they are similarly traceable. See Sections 3. I through 3. 6 for specific procedures to be
utilized that insure traceability.
5.13.4 Chain-of-Custody
Specific chain-of-custody procedures are included in Sections 3.1 through 3.6 of this SOP.
These procedures will insure that evidence collected during an investigation will withstand scrutiny
during litigation. To assure that procedures are being followed, it is recommended that field
investigators or their designees audit chain-of-custody entries, tags, .field notes, and any other recorded
information for accuracy.
5.13.5 Sampling Equipment Construction Material
Sampling equipment construction materials can affect sample analytical results. Materials used
must not contaminate the sample being collected and must be easily decontaminated so that samples are
not cross-omtaminated.
EISOPQAM 5 -35 May 1996
I
I
0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.13.6 Sample Preservation
Samples for some analyses must be preserved in order to maintain their integrity.
Preservatives required for routine analyses of samples collected are given in Appendix A of this SOP.
All chemical preservatives used will be supplied by the Region 4 laboratory. All samples requiring
preservation should be preserved immediately upon collection in the field. Samples that should not be
preserved in the field are:
• Those collected within a hazardous waste site that are known or thought to be highly
contaminated with toxic materials which may be highly reactive. Barrel, drum, closed
container, spillage, or other source samples from hazardous waste sites are not to be
preserved with any chemical. These_ samples may be preserved by placing the sample
container on ice, if necessary.
• Those that have extremely low or high pH or samples that may generate potentially
dangerous gases if they were preserved using the procedures given in Appendix A.
• Those for metals analyses which are shipped by air shall not be preserved with nitric acid
in excess of the amount specified in Appendix A.
All samples preserved with chemicals shall be clearly identified by indication on the sample tag
that the sample is preserved. If samples normally requiring preservation were not preserved, field
records should clearly specify the reason.
5.13.7 Special Precautions for Trace Contaminant Sampling
Some contaminants can be detected in the parts per billion and/or parts per trillion range.
Extreme care muse" be tal::en to prevent cross-contamination of these samples. The following
precautions shall be tal::en when trace contaminants are of concern:
• A clean pair of new, non-powdered, disposable latex gloves will be worn each time a
different location is sampled and the gloves should be donned immediately prior to
sampling. The gloves should not come into contact with the media being sampled.
• Sample containers for source samples or samples suspected of containing high
concentrations of contaminants shall be placed in separate plastic bags immediately after
collecting, tagging, etc.
• If possible, ambient samples and source samples should be collected by different field
teams. If different field teams cannot be used, all ambient samples shall be collected first
and placed in separate ice chests or shipping containers. Samples of waste or highly
contaminated samples shall never be placed in the same ice chest as environmental
samples. Ice chests or shipping containers for source samples or samples suspected to
contain high concentrations of contaminants shall be lined with new, clean, plastic bags.
• If possible, one member of the field sampling team should take all the notes, fill out tags,
etc., while the other members collect the samples. ·
• When sampling surface waters, the water sample should always be collected before the
sediment sample is collected.
EISOPQAM 5 -36 May 1996
m
• Sample collection acuvmes should -proceed progressively ·from the least suspected I
contaminared area to.the most suspected contaminated area.
• Investigators should use e!juipment constructed of Tefloncz, stainless steel, or glass that has
been properly precleaned (Appendix B) for collection of samples for trace metals or
organic compounds analyses. Teflon<Z or glass is preferred for collecting samples where
trace metals are of concern. Equipment constructed of plastic or PVC shall not be used to
collect samples for trace organic compounds analyses. -
5.13.8 Sample Handling and Mixing
After collection, all sample handling should be minimized. Investigators should use extreme
care to ensure that samples are not contaminated. If samples are placed in an ice chest, investigators
should ensure that melted ice cannot cause the sample containers to become submerged, as this may
result in sample cross-contamination. Plastic bags, such as Zip-Lockcz bags or similar plastic bags
sealed with tape, should be used when small sample containers (e.g., VOC vials or bacterial samples)
are placed in ice chests to prevent cross-contamination.
Once a sample has been collected, it may have to be transferred into separate containers for
different analyses. The best way to transfer liquid samples is to continually stir the sample contents
with a clean pipette or precleaned Tefloncz rod and allow the contents to be alternately siphoned into
respective sample containers using Tefloncz or PVC (Tygoncz type) tubing (and a siphon bulb to start
the flow). Tefloncz must be used when analyses for organic compounds or trace metals are to be
conducted. Any device used for stirring, or tubing used for siphoning, must be cleaned in the same
manner as other f!!Uipment (Appendix B). However, samples collected for volatile organic compound,
oil and grease, bacteria, sulfides, and phenols analyses may not be transferred using this procedure.
It is extremely important that waste (when appropriate), soil and sediment samples be mixed
thoroughly to ensure that the sample is as representative as possible of the sample media. The most
common method of mixing is referred to as quartering. The quanering procedure should be performed
as follows:
1. The material in the sample pan should be divided into quaners and each quaner should be
mixed individual! y.
2. Two quaners should then be mixed to form halves.
3. The two halves should be mixed to form a homogenous matrix .
This procedure should be repeated several times until the sample is adequately mixed. If round bowls
are used for sample mixing, ade!juate mixing is achieved by stirring the material in a circular fashion,
reversing direction, and occasionally turning the material over.
5.13.9 Special Handling of Samples for Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) Analysis
Water samples to be analyzed for volatile organic compounds should be stored in 40-ml
septum vials with screw cap and Teflon<Z-siJicone _ disk in the cap to prevent contamination of the
EISOPQAM 5 -37 May 1996
D
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
sample by the cap. The disks should be placed in the caps (Teflon~ side to be in contact with the sample) in the laboratory prior to the beginning of the sampling program.
The vials should be completely filled to prevent volatiliz.ation, and extreme caution should be exercised when filling a vial to avoid any turbulence which could also produce volatilization. The sample should be carefully poured down the side of the vial to minimize turbulence. As a rule, it is best to gently pour the last few drops into the vial so that surface tension holds the water in a convex
meniscus. The cap is then applied and some overflow is lost, but the air space in the bortle is eliminated. After capping, turn the bortle over and tap it 10 checl:: for bubbles. If any bubbles are
present, repeat the procedure with another clean 40-ml vial. Since the voe vials are pre-preserved,
caution should be exercised when the vials are used as the collection device for surface water samples
in order to prevent the loss of the preservative. When collecting water samples for voes. Three 40-ml vials containing preservative should be filled the with sample.
One 2-oz. glass container with screw caps and Tetlon~-silicon disks in the cap are used for the
storage of soil and sediment samples for voe analyses. Soil and sediment samples collected for voe
analyses should not be mixed. The sample container should be filled completely so that no head space
remains in the samp.le containers.
5.13.10 Estimating Variability
Spacial Variability
The following spacial duplicate sampling procedures should be used during the collection of
samples as a measure of variability within the area represented by the sample. Spacial duplicate grab and/or composite samples should be collected during all major investigations and studies conducted by the Branch. A "major study" would include all investigations where more than rwenty (20) samples
were collected, or those studies where the study objectives dictate that additional quality control
samples be collected. No more than ten percent of all samples should be collected as spacial duplicates. These samples should be collected at the same time, using the same procedures, the same type of equipment, and in the same types of containers as the original samples, but collected from a different location within the area represented by the original. They should also be preserved in the same manner and submitted for the same analyses as the required samples. The collection of spacial
duplicate composite samples requires that the sample aliquots be arrayed in a manner different from the original sample and spaced within the same. area of representativeness. Data from spacial
duplicates will be examined by the lead investigator to determine if the samples represent the areas
intended in tbe project worl:: plan.
Temporal Variability
When required, temporal variability at a given sampling location will be measured by collecting temporal duplicate samples. These samples will be collected from the same sampling location, using the same techniques and the same type of equipment, but at a time different from the
original sample. The time selected for the temporal duplicate sample will be within the same span of
time for which the original sample is designed to be representative in the project worl:: plan. Data
from temporal duplicates will be examined by the .project leader to determine if samples represent the
time span intended in the project work plan.
EISOPQAM 5 -38 May 1996
Sample Handling Variability
The effectiveness of sample handling techniques will be measured by collecting split and blank samples.
Split Samples
Split samples will be collected by initially collected twice as much material as normally collected -for a sample. After mixing, the material will be apponioned into two sets of containers. Both sets of containers will be submitted for analyses with one set designated as an "original sample", the other designated as a "split sample". Data from split samples will be examined by the Quality Assurance Officer to determine sample handling variability. On large studies (more than 20 samples), no more than 10 percent of all samples will be collected as split samples.
Blank Samples
.The following blank samples will be prepared by the laboratory and obtained by the project leader prior to traveling to a sample site.
1. Water Sample voe Trip Blank -

A

water sample voe trip blank is required for every study where water samples are collected for VOC analysis. · Two sealed preserved ( or unpreserved if appropriate) 40-ml voe vials will be transponed to the field. For routine
studies these samples will be prepared by lab personnel. Investigators shall request that these samples be provided at least one week in advance of scheduled field investigations and inspections and never (except in emergency situations) less than two days in advance of scheduled field investigations and inspections. These samples should not be picked up earlier than the morning of depanure for the scheduled inspection/investigation. These field blanks .will be handled and treated in the .same manner as the water samples collected for volatile organic compounds analysis on that panicular study. These samples will be clearly identified on sample tags and Chain--0f-Custody Records as trip blanks.
2. Soil Sample voe Trip Blank -

A

soil sample voe trip blank is required for every study where soil samples are collected for voe analysis. The preparation and pick up of this sample will be the same as for the water sample VOC trip blank. One 2--0z. soil voe vial will be transponed to the field. This field blank will be handled and treated by Branch personnel in the same manner as the soil samples collected for volatile organic compounds analysis on that panicular study. These samples will be clearly identified on sample tags and Chain-Of-Custody Records as trip blanks.
The following blanks are prepared in the field:
1. Inorganic Sample Preservative Blanks -Metals and general inorganic sample containers filled with analyte-free water will be transponed to the field and preserved and submitted for the same analyses as the other inorganic samples collected. These samples will be clearly identified as preservatives blanks on sample tags and the Chain-Of-Custody
Record(s). At least one preservative blank for each type of preserved sample should be collected at the end of routine field investigations. A minimum of one preservative blank
should be prepared in the field at the beginning and end of all major field investigations
that last more than one week.
EISOPQAM 5 -39 May 1996
D
u
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
•·
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
•
2. Equipment Field Blanks -When field cleaning equipment is required during a sampling investigation, a piece of the field-deaned equipment will be selected for collection of a rinse blank. At least one rinse blank will be collected during each week of sampling operations. After the piece of equipment has been field cleaned and prior 10 its being used for sample operations, it will be rinsed with organic/analyte free water. The rinse water will be collected and submitted for analyses of all constituents for which normal samples
collected with that piece of equipment are being analyzed.
3. Organic/Analyte Free Water System Blanks -When using a ponable organic-free water generating system in the field, a sample of the water generated will be collected at least once during each week of operations. The collected water sample will be submitted for analyses of all constituents for which normal samples are being analyzed.
4. Material Blanks -When construction materials are being used on a site in such a way as to have a potential impact on constituent concentrations in the sample, a sample of the materials will be submitted for analyses. An example of a situation where construction blanks are required is monitoring well construction. In this situation all materials used in well construction should be submitted for analyses (e.g., grout, sand, tap water, etc.).
5. Automatic Sampler Blanks -In general, cleaning procedures outlined in Appendix B of this SOP should be adequate to insure sample integrity. However, it is the standard practice of the Branch to submit automatic sampler blanks for analyses when automatic
samplers are used to collect samples for organic compounds and metals analyses.
Automatic sampler blanks for other standard analyses shall be submitted at least once per quarter.
The Quality Assurance Officer will inform the project leaders and management when blank samples are found to be unacceptably contaminated. The Quality Assurance Officer will immediately initiate an investigation to determine the cause of the problem. The results of this investigation will be promptly reported to appropriate personnel so that corrective action and/or qualifications to the data can be initiated.
5.13.!2Special Quality Control Procedures for Water Samples for Extractable Organic Compounds, Pesticides, or Herbicides Analyses (Matrix Duplicate)
Duplicate water samples shall be submitted to the laboratory for extractable organic compounds, pesticides, and/or herbicides analyses from at least one sampling location per project and laboratory used. These samples should be collected from a location expected to be relatively free from contamination, since the samples will be used for laboratory quality control purposes. The duplicate samples should be clearly identified as "Duplicate Sample for Matrix Spike" on the sample tag, Chain-Of-Custody Record, in the field logbook, and on the Contract Laboratory Program (CLP) Traffic Report Form (if appropriate). This procedure shall be followed for all projects where water samples are collected for the indicated analyses.
5 .13 .13 Special Quality Control Procedures for EPA Contract Laboratories
On a case-by-case basis, field investigators may be required to collect split samples (or duplicate samples if appropriate) for analyses by both the Region 4 laboratory and contract laboratories. The split samples are to be submitted to the Region 4 laboratory using established procedures. The contract laboratory involved shall not be n0tified that samples were split, i.e., there
EISOPQAM 5 -40 May 1996
should be no indication on Chain-Of-Custody Records or CLP Traffic Report Fortns submitted to the contract laboratories that these samples were split with the Region 4 laboratory.
5.13.14Special Quality Control Procedures for Dioxins and Furans
All samples collected for dioxins and furans analyses are analyzed by other EPA laboh!tories
or through contract laboratories. The Region 4 laboratory does not conduct in-house analyses for
dioxins and furans. The Region 4 laboratory should be consulted for the current quality control
procedures for dioxin and furan samples prior to the sampling event.
5.14 Internal Quality Control Procedures
5.14.1 Introduction
The focus of this subsection is on Field Equipment Center (FEC) operations involving
preparation of_ sampling and support equipment for field operations as well as for field data generated
under the Specific Sample Collection Quality Control Procedures discussed in Section 5 .13. Quality
control checks of these operations insure that field sampling teams are provided with equipment that is suitable for sampling use, and that field sampling is conducted using proper procedures.
5.14.2 Traceability Requirements
Records, in the fortn of bound notebooks, will be kept by FEC personnel documenting the dates of operations and the person perfortning operations for the following:
• Organic/Analyte Free Water System Maintenance (Field and FEC Systems) -Maintenance
on field systems will be perfortned immediately following every major study, or at least
once per calendar quarter. FEC system maintenance will be perfortned at least once per
calendar quarter.
• Air Monitoring Instrumentation Checkouts -Pre-loadout checks on air monitoring
instrumentation will be recorded each time they are performed. Discrepancies will be
immediately reported to the Branch Safety Officer.
• . Self Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) Checkouts -Pre-loadout checks on SCBAs
will be recorded when they are perfortned. SCBA checkouts will be perfortned at least
once per calendar quarter in the absence of loadout requests. Any discrepancies will be
reported immediately to the Branch Safety Officer.
• Other Equipment Maintenance -Maintenance performed on equipment other than that
listed above will be recorded in a logbook for miscellaneous field equipment. All required
repairs will be reported to the FEC coordinator.
• Sampling Containers and Latex Gloves -A record will be kept of shipments received of
sampling containers and latex gloves. Containers and gloves will be recorded by lot
numbers. Upon receipt, the Quality Assurance (QA) Officer will be notified. Containers
and gloves within a received lot will not be used until they have been checked by the QA
Officer.
EISOPQAM 5 -41 May 1996
D
D
I
I
I
I
·•
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
All equipment cleaned and wrapped for .. field use will be marked with the date on which preparation was completed. Equipment will be stored in the FEC in specified areas to minimize the risk of contamination while awaiting use.
EISOPQAM 5 -42 May 1996
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.14.3 Specific Quality Control Ch~ks
At least once per calendar quarter, the QA Officer will conduct the following ch~ks and issue a written report on the results.
I. Collect and submit for analyses samples of each lot of containers received during that quarter. Bottles from each lot will be tagged and sealed, then submitted for the following analyses:
One-Gallon Amber -metals, cyanide, extractable organics, and pesticides.
8-oz. Glass -metals, cyanide, extractable organics, and pesticides.
I-Liter Polyethylene -metals and cyanide.
Latex glove samples will be collected as rinse blanks using organic/analyte free water. The rinsate will be submined for analyses of VOCs, metals, cyanide, extractable organics,
and pesticides. A new glove will be rinsed for each parameter (e.g., one glove for VOC sample, another glove for metals, etc.) to avoid dilution of potential contaminants on the gloves ..
2. Collect and submit for analyses a sample of water from the FEC organic/analyte free water system. The sample will be submined for analyses of VOCs, metals, cyanide, extractable
organics, and pesticides.
3. Collect and submit for analyses a sample of analyte-free water stored in one-gallon containers at the FEC. The sample will be submined for analyses of metals and cyanide.
4. Collect and submit for analyses a rinsate blank of at least one piece of sampling or sample related equipment stored at the FEC. The sample will submined for analyses of VOCs, metals, cyanide, extractable organics, and pesticides.
5. Collect the results of field quality control samples from the project leaders for the quarter. Nortnally, field quality control samples consist of the following:
• Field split samples (not to include inter-lab splits);
• Water voe trip blank samples;
• Soil voe trip blank samples;
• Inorganic sample preservative blanks;
• Equipment field rinse blanks;
• . Field organic/analyte free water system blanks; and
• · . Material blanks.
The QA Officer will evaluate all data received and immediately anempt to resolve any problems found. A written report will be issued on the quality control ch~ks during each calendar quarter. The report will be submitted to appropriate personnel.
EISOPQAM 5 -43 May 1996
5.15 Investigation Derived Waste (IDW)
5.15.1 Types ofIDW
Materials which may become IDW are:
• Personnel protective equipment (PPE) -This includes disposable coveralls, gloves,
booties, respirator canisters, splash suits, etc.
• Disposable equipment ~ This includes plastic ground and equipment covers, aluminum
foil, conduit pipe, composite liquid waste samplers· (COLIW AS As), Teflon~ tubing,
broken or unused sample containers, sample container boxes, tape, etc. ·
• Soil cuttings from drilling or hand augering.
• Drilling mud or water used for water rotary drilling.
• Ground water obtained through well development or well purging.
• Cleaning fluids such as spent solvents and washwater.
• Packing and shipping materials.
Table 5.15.1 lists the types of IDW commonly generated during investigations, and current
disposal practices.
5.15.2 Management of Non-Hazardous IDW
Disposal of non-hazardous IDW from hazardous waste sites should be addressed in the study
plan. To reduce the volume for transportation back to the FEC, it may be necessary to compact the
waste into a reusable container, such as a 55-gallon drum.
If the waste is from an active facility, permission should be sought from the operator of the
facility to place the non-hazardous PPE, disposable equipment, and/or paper/cardboard wastes into the
facilities' dumpsters. If necessary, these materials may be placed into municipal dumpsters, with the
permission of the owner. These materials may also be taken to a nearby permitted landfill. On larger
studies, waste hauling services may be obtained and a dumpster located at the study site. Non-
hazardous IDW may also be buried on site near the contamination source, with the burial location
noted in the field logbook.
Disposal of non-hazardous IDW such as drill cuttings, purge or development water, decon-
tamination washwater, drilling muds, etc., should be specified in the approved study plan. It is
recommended that these materials be placed into a unit with an environmental permit such as a landfill
or sanitary sewer. These materials must not be placed into dumpsters. If the facility at which the
study is being conducted is active, permission should be sought to place these types of IDW into the
facilities treattnent system. It may be feasible to spread drill cuttings around the borehole, or if the
well is temporary, to place the cuttings back into the borehole. Cuttings, purge water, or development
water may also be placed in a pit in or near the source area. Monitoring well purge or development
water may also be poured onto the ground downgradient of the monitoring well. Purge water from
private potable wells which are in service may be discharged directly onto the ground surface.
EISOPQAM 5 -44 May 1996
I
I
I
I
n
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The minimum requirements of this subsection are:
• Liquid and soil/sediment IDW must be containerized and analyzed before disposal.
• The collection, handling, and proposed disposal method must be specified in the approved
study plan.
5.15.3 Management ofHa=dous IDW
Disposal of hazardous or suspected haz.ardous IDW must be specified in the approved study plan. Hazardous IDW must be disposed as specified in US-EPA regulations. If appropriate, these wastes may be placed back in an active facility waste treatment system. These wastes may also be disposed of in the source area from which they originated, if doing so does not endanger human health and the environment.
If on-site disposal is not feasible, and if the wastes are suspected to be hazardous, appropriate tests must be conducted to make that determination. If they are determined to be hazardous wastes, they must be properly contained and labeled. They may be stored on the site for a maximum of 90 days before they must be manifested and shipped to a permined treatment or disposal facility. Generation of hazardous IDW must be anticipated, if possible, to permit arrangements for proper containerization, labeling, transportation, and disposal/treatment in accordance with US-EPA regulations.
The generation of haz.ardous IDW should be minimized to conserve Branch resources. Most routine studies should not produce any haz.ardous IDW, with the exception of spent solvents and possibly purged ground water. Care shciuld be taken to keep non-haz.ardous materials segregated from hazardous waste contaminated materials. The volume of spent solvents produced during equipment decontamination should be controlled by applying only the minimum amount of solvent necessary, and capturing it separately from the washwater.
At a minimum the requirements of the management of hazardous IDW are as follows:
• Spent solvents must be returned to the FEC for proper disposal or recycling.
• All ha=dous IDW must be containerized. Proper handling and disposal should be arranged prior to commencement of field activities.
EISOPQAM 5 -45 May 1996
TYPE
PPE-Disposable
PPE-Reusable
Spent Solvents
Soil Cuttings
Groundwater
Decontamination
Water
Disposable
Equipment
Trash
EISOPQAM
TABLE 5.15.1
DISPOSAL of IDW
HAZARDOUS
Containerize in plastic 5-gallon bucket with
tight-fitting lid. Identify and leave on-site
with permission of site operator, otherwise
return to FEC for proper disposal.
Decontaminate as per Appendix B, if
possible. If the equipment cannot be
decontaminated, containerize in plastic 5-
gallon bucket with tight-fitting lid. Identify
and leave on-site with permission of site
operator, otherwise return to FEC for
proper disposal.
Containerize in original containers.
Clearly identify contents. Leave on-site
with permission of site operator, otherwise
return to FEC for proper disposal.
Containerize in 55-gallon drum with tight-
fitting lid. Identify and leave on-site with
permission of site operator, otherwise
arrange with WMD site manager for testing
and disposal.
Containerize in 55-gallon drum with tight-
fitting lid. Identify and leave on-site with
permission of site operator, otherwise
arrange with WMD site manager for testing
and disposal.
Containerize in 55-gallon drum with tight-
fitting lid. Identify and leave on-site with
permission of site operator, otherwise
arrange with WMD site manager for testing
and disposal.
Containerize in 55-gallon drum or 5-gallon
plastic bucket with tight-fitting lid. Identify
and leave on-site with permission of site
operator, otherwise arrange with WMD site
manager for testing and disposal.
NIA
5 -46
NON-HAZARDOUS
Double bag waste. Place in dumpster
with permission of site operator,
otherwise return to FEC for disposal
in dumpster.
Decontaminate as per Appendix B.
NIA
Containerize in 55-gallon drum with
tight-fitting lid. Identify and leave on-
site with permission of site operator,
otherwise arrange with site manager
for testing and disposal.
Containerize in 55-gallon drum with
tight-fitting lid. Identify and leave OD-
site with permission of site operator,
otherwise arrange with site manager
for testing and disposal.
Containerize in 55-galloo drum with
tight-fitting lid. Identify and leave on-
site with permission of site operator,
otherwise arrange with site manager
for testing and disposal.
Containerize in 55-gallon drum or 5-
gallon plastic bucket with tight-fitting
lid. Identify and leave on-site with
permission of site operator, otherwise
arrange with site manager for testing
and disposal.
Double bag waste. Place in dumpster
with permission of site operator,
otherwise return to FEC for disposal
in dumpster.
May 1996
I
I
I
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.16 References
1. US-EPA, Guidance for the Data Quality Objectives Process (EPA QA/G-4, 1994)
2. ASTM, Standard Practice for Generation of Environmental Data Related to Waste Management Activities: Development of Data Quality Objectives (D-34.02.10-Draft).
3. ASTM, Standard Guide for the Generation of Environmental Data Related to Waste Management Activities (D-34.01.11-Draft).
4. Gilbert, Richard 0., Statistical Methods for Environmental Pollution Monitoring, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., New York, NY, 1987.
:5. ASTM, Standard Guide for General Planning of Waste Sampling.
6.
7.
8.
US-EPA, Characterization of Hazardous Waste Sites -A Methods Manual, Volume 1 -Site Investigations (EPA 600/4-84/075).
Kittrell, F.W., A Practical Guide to Water Quality Studies.
US-EPA, Data Quality Objectives Process for Superfund, Interim Final Guidance, (EPA540-R-93-071), September 1993.
•
EISOPQAM 5 -47 · May 1996
SECTION6
DESIGN AND INSTALLATION OF MONITORING WELLS
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES:
• Ensure that the monitoring well will provide high quality samples.
•· Ensure that the monitoring well is constructed properly and will last the duration of the
project.
• Ensure that the monitoring well will not serve as a conduit for contaminants to migrate
between aquifers.
6.1 Introduction
Methods and procedures for the design and installation of monitoring wells to be employed in
Region 4 are contained in this section. They are to be used for all permanent and temporary
monitoring wells installed for collecting ground water samples for analysis.
6.2 Permanent Monitoring Wells -Design Considerations
The design and installation of permanent monitoring wells involves drilling into various types
of geologic formations that exhibit varying subsurface conditions. Designing and installing permanent
monitoring wells in these geologic environments may require several different drilling methods and
installation procedures. The selection of drilling methods and· installation procedures should be based
on field data collected during a hydro geologic site investigation and/or a search of existing 0data. Each
permanent monitoring well should be designed and installed to function properly throughout the
duration of the monitoring program. When designing monitoring wells, the following should be
considered:
• short-and long-term objectives;
• · purpose(s) of the well(s);
• probable duration of the monitoring program;
• contaminants likely to be monitored;
• types of well construction materials to be used;
• surface and subsurface geologic conditions;
• properties of the aquifer(s) to be monitored;
• well screen placement;
• general site conditions; and
• potential site health and safety hazards .
•
Each of the above considerations can be expanded into many subtopics depending on the complexity of
the project. In designing permanent monitoring wells, the most reliable, obtainable data should be
EISOPQAM 6 - I · May 1996
I
I
I
I
D
u
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVE:
SECTION 11
SEDIMENT SAMPLING
• To collect a representative sample of sediment from a surface water body.
11.1 Introduction
Sampling teclmiques and equipment are designed to minimize effects on the chemical and
physical integrity of the sample. If the guidance in this section is followed, a representative sample of
the sediment should be obtained.
The physical location of the investigator when collecting a sample may dictate the equipmem to
be used. Wading is the preferred method for reaching the sampling location, particularly if the stream
has a noticeable current (is not impounded). However, wading may disrupt bottom sediments causing
biased results. If the stream is too deep to wade, the sediment sample may be collected from a boat or
from a bridge,
To collect a sediment sample from a streambed, a variety of methods can be used:
• Dredges (Peterson, Eckman, Ponar),
• Coring (tubes, augers)
• Scoops (BMH---60, standard scoop) and spoons
• Regardless of the method used, precautions should be taken to insure that the sample collected
is representative of the stream bed. These methods are discussed in the following paragraphs.
11.2 Sediment Sampling Equipment
11.2.1 Scoops and Spoons
If the surface water body is wadeable, the easiest way to collect a sediment sample is by using
a stainless steel scoop or spoon. The sampling method is a=mplished by wading into the surface
water body and while facing upstream (into the current), scooping the sample along the bottom of the
surface water body in the upstream direction. Excess water may be removed from the scoop or spoon.
However, this may result in the loss of some fine particle size material associated with the bottom of
the surface water body. Aliquots of the sample are then placed in a glass pan and homogenized
a=rding to the quartering method described in Section 5.13.8 of this SOP.
In surface water bodies that are too deep to wade, but less than eight feet deep, a stainless steel
scoop or spoon attached to a piece of conduit can be used either from the banks if the surface water
body is narrow or from a boat. The sediment is placed into a glass pan and mixed a=rding to
Section 5.13.8 of this SOP.
E!SOPQAM 11 • 1 :, May 1996
If the surface water body has a significant flow and is too deep to wade, a BMH--60 sampler may be used. Toe BMH--60 is not panicularly efficient in mud or other soft substrates because its weight will cause pen=tion to deeper sediments, thus missing the most recently deposited material at the sediment water interface. It is also difficult to release secured samples in an undisturbed fashion that would readily permit subsampling. The BMH--60 may be used provided that caution is exercised
by only ·taking subsamples that have not been in contact with the metal walls of the sampler.
11.2.2 Dredges
For routine analyses, the Peterson dredge can be used when the bottom is rocky, in very deep
water, or when the stream velocity is high. The dredge should be lowered very slowly as it approaches bottom, since it can displace and miss fine particle size sediment if allowed to drop freely.
The Eckman dredge has only limited usefulness. It performs well w_here the bottom material is unusually soft, as when covered with organic sludge or light mud. It is unsuitable, however, for sandy, rocky, and hard bottoms and is too light for use in streams with high velocities. It should not be used from a bridge that is more than a few feet above the water, because the spring mechanism which activates the sampler can be damaged by the messenger if dropped from too great a height.
The Ponar dredge is a modification of the Peterson dredge and is similar in size and weight. It has been modified by the addition of side plates and a screen on the top of the sample compamnem.
The screen over the sample companment permits water to pass through the sampler as it descends thus reducing turbulence around the dredge. The Ponar dredge is easily operated by one person in the same fashion as the Peterson dredge. The Ponar dredge is one of the most effective samplers for general use
on all types of substrates.
The "mini" Ponar dredge is a smaller, much lighter version of the Ponar dredge. It is used to collect smaller sample volumes when working in industrial tanks, lagoons, ponds, and shallow water bodies. It-is a good device use when collecting sludge and sediment containing hazardous constituents because the size of the dredge makes it more amenable to field cleaning.
11.2.3 Coring
Core samplers are used to sample vertical columns of sediment. They are particularly useful when a historical picture of sediment deposition is desired since they preserve the sequential layering of the deposit, and when it is desirable to minimize the loss of material at the sediment-water interface.
Many types of coring devi= have been developed depending on the depth of water from which the
sample is to be obtained, the nature of the bottom material, and the length of core to be collected. They vary from hand push tubes to weight or gravity driven devi=.
Coring devi= are particularly useful in pollutant monitoring because turbulence created by
descent through the water is minimal, i:hus the fines of the sedimem-water interface are only minimally
disturbed; the sample is withdrawn intact permitting the removal of only those layers of interest; core liners manufacrured of glass or Teflon"' can be purchased, thus reducing possible sample contamination;· and the samples are easily delivered to the lab for analysis in the rube in which they
were collected.
The disadvantage of coring devi= is that a relatively small surface area and sample size is
obtained often n=sitating repetitive sampling in order to obtain the required amount of material for
EISOPQAM 11 -

2

-May 1996
I
D
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
••
I
I
I
I
I
I
analysis. Because it is believed tbat this disadvantage is offset by the advantages, coring devices are recommended in sampling sediments for trace organic compounds or metals analyses.
In shallow, wadeable waters, the direct use of a core liner or rube manufactured of Teflon"', plastic, or glass is recommended for the collection of sediment samples. (Plastic rubes are principally used for collection of samples for physical parameters such as panicle size analysis). Their use can also be extended to deep waters when SCUBA diving equipment is utilized. Teflon"' or plastic are ... preferred to glass since they are unbreakable which reduces the possibility of sample loss. Stainless
steel push rubes are also acceptable and provide a better cutting edge and higher strength than Teflon"'.
The use of glass or Teflon"' rubes eliminates any possible metals contamination from core barrels, cutting heads, and retainers. 111c rube should be approximately 12 inches in length if only recently deposited sediments (8 inches or less) are co be sampled. Longer rubes should be used when the depth of the substrate exceeds·s inches. Soft or sernkonsolidated sediments such as mud and clays have a greater adherence co the inside of the rube and thus can be sampled with larger diameter rubes .
Because coarse or unconsolidated sediments such as sands and gravel tend co fall out of the rube, a small diameter is required for them. A rube about two inches in diameter is usually the best size. Toe wall thickness of the rube should be about 1/3 inch for Teflon"', plastic, or glass. The inside wall may be filed down at the bottom of the rube co provide a cutting edge and facilitate entry of the liner into
the substrate.
Caution should be exercised not to disturb the bottom sediments when the sample is obtained by wading in shallow water. The core rube is pushed imo the substrate until four inches or less of the rube is above the sediment-water interface. When sampling hard or coarse substrates, a gentle rotation
of the rube while it is being pushed will facilitate greater penetration and decrease core compaction. 111c cop of the rube is then capped co provide a suction and reduce the chance of losing the sample. A
Teflon"' plug or a sheet of Teflon"' held in place by a rubber stopper or cork may be used. After capping,· the rube is slowly extracted with the suction and adherence of the sediment keeping the sample in the rube. Before pulling the bottom pan of the core above the water surface, it coo should
be capped.
When extensive core sampling is required, such as a cross-sectional examination of a
srreambed (with an objective .of profiling both the physical and chemical contents of the sediment), a
whole core muse be collected. A strong· coring rube such as one made from aluminum, steel or
stainless steel is needed co penetrate the sediment and underlying clay or sands. A coring device can be used to collect an intact sediment core··from strearnbeds that have soft bottoms which allows several
inches of penetration. It is recommended that the corer have a checkvalve built into the driving head
which allows water and air co escape from the cutting core, thus creating a partial vacuum which helps
to hold the sediment core in the rube. The corer is attached co a standard auger extension and handle,
allowing it to be corkscrewed into the sediment from a boat or while wading.· The coring rube is easily
detached and the intact sediment core is removed with an extraction device.
Before extracting the sediment from the coring tubes, the clear supernatant above the sediment-
water interface in the core should be decanted from the rube. This is accomplished by simply turning
the core rube to its side, and gently pouring the liqui_d out until fine sediment panicles appear in the waste liquid. The Joss of some of the fine sediments usually occurs with this technique.
EISOPQAM 11 -

3

. i .May 1996
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES:
SECTION 12
SOIL SAMPLING
To collect a soil sample that is representative of conditions as they exist at the site
• By selecting the appropriate sampling device(s).
• By taking measures to avoid introducing contamination as a result of poor sampling
and/or handling technique.
• By reducing the potential of cross contamination between samples.
12.1 Introduction
Prior to conducting a soil sampling investigation, a sampling strategy should be developed
based on the objectives of the investigation (Section 5.5 of this SOP contains a discussion of soil
sampling strategies). After designing a soil sampling strategy, the appropriate equipment and
techniques must be used to conduct the investigation. This section discusses the sampling equipment
available and collection methods which have been shown to be technically appropriate.
Manual techniques and equipment, such as hand augers, are usually used for surf.Ice or
shallow, subsurface soil sampling. Power operated equipment is usually associated witb collecting
deep samples, but this equipment can also be used for collecting shallow samples when the auger hole
begins to collapse, or when the soil is so tight that manual auguring is not practical. This section
discusses the various sample collection methods employed by field investigators.
12.2 Equipment
Soil sampling equipment used for sampling trace contaminants should be constructed of inen
materials such as stainless steel. Ancillary equipment such as auger flights, post hole diggers, etc.
may be constructed of other materials since this equipment does not come in contact with tbe samples.
However, plastic, chromium, and galvanized equipment should not be used routinely in soil sampling
operations. Painted or rusted_ equipment must be sandblasted before use.
Selection of equipment is usually based on the depth of the samples to be collected, but it is
also controlled to a certain extent by the cbara=istics of the material. Manual. techniques and
equipment such as hand augers, are usually used for collecting surface or shallow, subsurf.!ce soil
samples. Power operated equipment is usually associated with deep sampling but can also be used for
shallow sampling when the auger hole begins to collapse or when the soil is so tight that manual
augering is not practical.
EISOPQAM 12 - 1 . .,_ May 1996
•
I
D
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
U.3 Sampling Methodology
This discussion· of soil sampling methodology reflecrs both the equipment usen
(required/needed) co collect cbe sample, as well as how the sample is handled and processed after
retrieval. Selection of equipment is usually based on the depcb of sampling, but ic is also controlled, to a certain extent, by cbe characteristics of cbe material. Simple, manual techniques and equipment, such as hand augers, are usually selected for surface or shallow, subsurface soil sampling. As cbe depcb of cbe sampling interval increases, some type of powered sampling equipment is usually needed co overcome torque induced by soil resistance and depcb. The following is an overview of the various sample collection metliods employed over three general depcb classifications: surface, shallow subsurface, and deep subsurface. Any of the deep collection methods described may be used co collect samples from the shallower intervals.
12.3.1 Manual (Hand Operated) Collection Techniques and Equipment
These methods are used primarily co collect surface and shallow subsurface soil samples.
Surface soils are generally classified as soils between the ground surface and 6 co 12 inches below
ground surface. The shallow subsurface interval may be considered co extend from approximately 12
inches below ground surface co a site-specific depth at which sample collection using manual methods
becomes impractical.
Surface Soils
Surface soils may be collected with a wide variety of equipment. Spoons, shovels, hand-augers, push cubes, and pose-hole diggers, made of cbe appropriate material, may be used co collect surface soil samples. As disrussed in.the section on powered equipment, surface soil samples may also be collected in conjunction with the use of heavy equipment.
Surface samples are removed from cbe ground and placed in pans, where mIJC1og, as appropriate (Section 5.13.8), o=irs prior co filling of sample containers. Section 12.4.1 contains specific procedures for handling samples for volatile organic compounds analysis. If a chick, maned root zone is encountered ac o~ near the surface, it should be removed before the sample is collected.
Subsurface Soils
Hand-augering is cbe most common manual· method used co collect subsurface samples.
Typically, 4--inch auger-buckets wicb cuning heads are pushed. and twisted into the ground and
removed as cbe buckets are filled. The auger holes are advanced one bucket ac a time. The practical
depth of investigation using a hand-auger is related co the material being sampled. In sands, augering is usually easily a=mplished, but the depth of investigation is controlled by the depth at which sands begin to cave. At this point, auger holes usually begin to collapse and cannot practically be advanced co lower depths, and further samples, if required, must be collected using some type of pushed or driven device. Haod-augeriog may also bea.Jme difficult in eight clays or cemented sands. Ac depths
approaching 20 feet, torquing of hand-auger extensions becomes so severe chat in resistant materials,
powered methods must be used if deeper samples are required. Some powered methods, discussed
lacer, are 001 acceptable for actual sample collection, but are used solely co gain easier a=s co the required sample depth, where liand-augers or push cubes are generally used co collect the sample.
EISOPQAM 12 • 2 . _ May 1996
When a venical sampling interval has been established, one auger-bucket is used to advance
the auger hole to the first desired sampling depth. If the sample at this location is to be a venical
composite of all intervals, the same bucket· may be used to advance the hole, as well as to collect
subsequent samples in the same hole. However, if discrete grab samples are to be collected ro
chara=iz.e each depth, a new bucket must be placed on ·the end of the auger extension immediately
prior to collecting the next sample. The top several inches of soil should be removed from the bucket
to minimize the chances of cross-contamination of the sample from fall-in of material from the upper
ponions of the hole.
Another hand-operated piece of soil sampling equipment commonly used to collect shallow
subsurface soil samples is the Shelbya, or "push rube". This is a thin-walled rube, generally of
stainless steel construction and having a beveled leading edge, which is twisted and pushed direaly
into the soil. This type of sampling device is panicularly useful if an undisrurbed sample is required.
The sampling device is removed from the push-head, then the sample is extruded from the rube into
the pan with a spoon or special extruder. Even though the push-head is equipped with a check valve to
help retain samples, the Shelby ru_be will generally not retain loose and watery soils, panicularly if
collected at lower _depths.
12.3.2 Powered Sampling Devices
Powered sampling devices and sampling aids may be used to acquire samples from any depth
but are generally limited to depths of 20 feet or less. Among the common types of powered equipment
used to collect or aid in the collection of subsurface soil samples are Little Beave~ type power augers;
split-spoon samplers ·driven with a drill rig drive-weight assembly or hydraulically pushed using drill
rig hydraulics; continuous split-spoon samplers; specialized hydraulic cone penetrometer rigs; and
back-hoes. The use of each of these is described below.
Power Augers
Power augers are commonly used to aid in the collection of subsurface soil samples at depths
where hand augering is impraaical. This equipment is a sampling aid and not a sampling device, and
20 to 25 feet is the typical lo_wer depth range. It .is used to advance a hole to the required sampling
depth, at which point a hand auger is usually used to collect the sample.
Drill Rigs
Drill rigs offer the capability of collecting soil samples from greater depths. For all praaical
purposes, the depth of investigation achievable by this method is controlled only by the depth of soil
overlying bedrock, which may be in excess of 100 feet.
When used in conjunaion with drilling, split-spoon samplers are usually driven either inside a
hollow-stem auger or inside an open borehole after rotary drilling equipment has been temporarily
removed. The spoon is driven with a 140-pound hammer through a distance of up to 24 inches and
removed. If geotechnical dara are also required, the number of blows with the hammer for each six-
inch interval should be recorded.
Continuous split-spoon samplers may be used to obtain five-foot long, continuous samples
approximately 3 to 5 inches in diameter. These devices are located inside a five-foot section of
hollow-stem auger and advanced with the auger during drilling. As the auger advances, the central
core of soil moves into the sampler and is retained until retrieval.
EISOPQAM 12 - 3 -, .. M•y 1996
I
I
I
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Cone Penetrometer Rigs
This method uses a standard split-spoon has been modified with a releasable tip which keeps
the spoon closed during the sampling push. Upon_arrival at the desired depth, the tip can be remotely
released and the push continued .. During the subsequent push, the released tip floats freely up· the inside of the spoon as the soil core displaces it. Split-spoon soil samples, therefore, can be collected
without drilling, as has historically been required, by· simply pushing the device to the desired depth.
... This technique is panicularly beneficial at highly co·ntaminated ·sites, because cuttings are not produced
as with drill rigs. The push rods are generally retrieved with very little residue. This results in
minimal exposure to sampling personnel and very little contaminated residue is produced as a result of
equipment cleaning.•
Back-Hoes
Back-hoes are often utilized in shallow subsurface soil sampling programs. Samples may
either be collected directly from the back-hoe bucket or they may be collected from the trench wall if
proper safety protocols are followed. Trenches. offer the ability to collect samples from very specific intervals and allow visual correlation with venically and horizontally adjacent material. Prior to collecting samples from trench walls, the wall surface must be dressed with a stainless steel shovel, spatula, knife, or spoon to-remove the surface layer of soil which was smeared across the trench wall as the bucket passed. If back-hoe buckets are not cleaned. according to the procedures described in Appendix B of this SOP, samples should be collected from material which has not been in contact with the bucket surface. . .
12.4 Special Techniques and Considerations
12.4.1 Collection of Soil Samples for Volatile .Organic Compounds (VOC) Analysis
These samples should be collected in a manner that minimizes disturbance of the sample. For
example, when sampling with a hand auger, the sample for .voe analysis may be collected directly
from the auger bucket or immediately after an auger bucket is emptied into the pan. The sample
should be placul in the appropriate container with no head-space, if possible, as is the practice with
water samples. Samples for voe analysis are not mixed.
12.4.2 Dressing Soil Surfaces
Any time a venical or near venical surface, such as is achieved when shovels or back-hoes are
used for subsurface sampling, is sampled, the surface should be dressed to remove smeared soil. This
is n=sary to minimize the effects of cross-contamination due to smearing of material from other levels.
12.4.3 Sample Mixing
It is =emely imponant that soil samples be mixed as thoroughly as possible to ensure that
the sample is representative of the interval sampled. Soil samples should be mixed as specified in Section 5.13.8. ·
EISOPQAM 12 -4 ,-.May 1996
12.4.4 Special Precautions for Trace Coniamiriant Soil Sampling
The procedures outlined in Section 5.13.7 should be followed .. All soil sampling equipment
used for sampling for trace contaminants should be constructed of stainless steel where possible. Pans
used for mixing should be made of Pyrexai (or equivalent) or glass. In no case. will chromium,
cadmium, or galvanized plated or coated equipment be used for soil sampling operations when
inorganic contamination is of concern. Similarly, no painted or plastic equipment should be used when
organic contaminants are of concern. All paint and primer· must be removed from soil sampling
equipment by sandblasting or other means before such equipment can be used for collecting soil
samples.
12.4.5 Specific Sampling Equipment Quality Assurance Techniques
Drilling rigs and other major. equipment used to collect soil samples should be identified so
that this equipment can be traeed through field records. · A log bool:: should be established for this
equipment so that all cleaning, maintenance, and repair procedures can be traced to the person
·. performing these procedures and to the specific repairs made. Sampling spoons, hand augers, Shelby
tubes, and other minor disposable type equipment are exempted from this equipment identification
requirement. All equipment used to collect soil samples should be cleaned as outlined in Appendix B
and repaired, if necessary, before being stored at the conclusion of field studies. Equipment cleaning
conducted in the field (Appendix B) or field repairs should be thoroughly documented in field records.
EISOPQAM 12 -5 ·"-:· May 1996
I
I
I
D
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
APPENDIXB
STANDARD FIELD CLEANING PROCEDURES
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVE:
• To remove contaminants of concern from sampling, drilling and other field equipment to
concentrations that do not impact study objectives using a standard cleaning procedure.
B.1 Introduction
Cleaning procedures in this appendix are intended for use by field personnel for cleaning sampling and other equipment in the field. Emergency field sample container cleaning procedures are also included; however, they should not be used unless absolutely necessary. Cleaning procedures for use at the Field Equipment Center (FEC) are in Appendix C.
Sampling and field equipment cleaned in accordance with these procedures must meet the minimum requirements for Data Quality Objectives (DQO) definitive data collection. Alternative field
decontamination procedures may be substituted as outlined in Section 5.12 when samples are to be
analyzed for data uses at a lower DQO level. Deviations from these procedures should be documented
in the approved study plan, field records, and investigative reports.
These are the materials, methods, and procedures to be used when cleaning sampling and other equipment in the field.
B.1.1 Specifications for Cleaning Materials
Specifications for standard cleaning materials referred to in this appendix are as follows:
• Soap shall be a standard brand of phosphate-free laboratory detergent such as Liquinox"'.
Use of other detergent must be justified and documented in the field logboolcs and
inspection or investigative reports.
• Solvent shall be pesticide-grade isopropanol. Use of a solvent other than pesticide-grade
isopropanol for equipment cleaning purposes must be justified in the srudy plan. Otherwise
its use must be documented in field logboolcs and inspection or investigation repom.
• Tap water may be used from any municipal water treatment system. Use of an untreated
potable water supply is not an a=ptable substitute for tap water.
• Analyte free water (deionized water) is tap water that has been treated by. passing through a
· Sta!Jdard deionizing resin column. At a minimum, the finished water should contain no
detectable heavy metals or other inorganic compounds (i.e., at or above analytical detection
limits) as defined by a standard inductively coupled Argon Plasma Spectrophotometer (ICP)
(or equivalent) scan. Analyte free water obtained by other methods is a=ptable, as long as
it meets the above analytical criteria.
EIBSOPQAM B • 1 · May 1996
• Organic/analyte free water is defined as tap water that has been treated with activated
carbon and deionizing units. A port.able system to produce organic/analyte free water under
field conditions is available. At a minimum, the finished water must meet the analytical
criteria of analyte free water and should contain no detect.able pesticides, herbicides, or
extractable organic compounds, and no volatile organic compounds above minimum
detect.able levels as determined by the Region 4 laboratory for a given set of analyses.
Organic/analyte free water obtained by other methods is accept.able, as long as it meets the
above analytical criteria.
• Other solvents may be substituted for a panicular purpose if required. For example,
removal of concentrated waste materials may require the use of either pesticide-grade
hexane or petroleum ether. After the· waste material is removed, the equipment must be
subjected to tbe standard cleaning procedure. Because these solvents are not miscible with
water, the equipment must be completely dry prior to use.
Solvents, laboratory detergent, and rinse waters used to clean equipment shall not be reused
during field decontamination.
B.1.2 Handling and Containers for Cleaning Solutions
Improperly handled cleaning solutions may easily become contaminated. Storage and
application containers must be constructed of the proper materials to ensure their integrity. Following
are accept.able materials used for containing the specified cleaning solutions:
' • Soap must be kept in clean plastic, met.al, or glass containers until used. It should be
I
I
I
D
I
I
I
I
I
poured directly from the container during use. I
• Solvent must be stored in the unopened original containers until used. They may be applied
using tbe low pressure nitrogen system fitted with a Teflona> nozzle, or using Teflon"' I
squeeze bottles.
• Tap water may be kept in clean tanks, hand pressure sprayers, squeeze bottles, or applied 1 directly from a hose.
• Analyte free water must be stored in clean glass, stainless steel, or plastic containers that
can be closed prior to use. It can be applied from plastic squeeze bottles. I
• Organic/analyte free water must be stored in clean glass, Teflon"', or stainless steel
containers prior to use. It may be applied using Teflon"' squeeze bottles, or with the I
portable system.
Note: Hand pump sprayers generally are not acceptable storage or application containers for the above
1 materials (with the exception of tap water). This also applies to stainless steel sprayers. All hand
sprayers have internal oil coated gaskets and black rubber seals that may contaminate the solutions.
B.1.3 Disposal of Solvent Cleaning Solutions I
Procedures for the safe handling and disposition of investigation derived waste (IDW),
including used wash water, rinse water, and spent solvents are in Section 5.15.
B.1.4 Equipment' Contaminated with Concentrated Wastes
EIBSOPQAM B-2 · ,May!996
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Equipment used to collect samples of hazardous materials or toxic wastes or materials from
hazardous waste sites, RCRA facilities, or in-process waste streams should be field cleaned before
returning from the study. At a minimum, this should consist of washing with soap and rinsing with
tap water. More stringent procedures may be required at the discretion of the field investigators.
EIBSOPQAM B-3 ·-.May 1996
B.1.5 Safety Procedures for Field Cleaning Operations
Some of the materials used to implement the cleaning procedures outlined in this appendix can
be harmful if used improperly. Caution should be exercised by all field investigators and all applicable
safety procedures should be followed. At a minimum, the following precautions should be taken in the
field during these cleaning operations:
• Safety glasses with splash shields or goggles, and latex gloves will be worn during all
cleaning operations.
• Solvent rinsing operations will be conducted in the open (never in a closed room).
• No eating, smoking, drinking, chewing, orany hand to mouth contact should be permined
during cleaning operations.
B.1.6 Handling of Cleaned Equipment
After field cleaning, equipment should be handled only by personnel wearing clean gloves to.
prevent re-contamination. In addition, the equipment should be moved away (preferably upwind) from
the cleaning area to· prevent recontamination. If the equipment is not to be immediately re-used it
should be covered with plastic sheeting or wrapped in aluminum foil to prevent re-contamination. The
area where the equipment is kept prior to re-use must be free of contaminants.
B.2 Field Equipment Cleaning Procedures
Sufficient clean equipment should be transported to the field so that an entire study can be
conducted without the need for field cleaning. However, this is not possible for some specialized
items such as portable power augers (Linle Beaver~. well drilling rigs, soil coring rigs, and other
large pieces of field equipment: In addition, particularly during large scale studies, it is not practical
or possible to transport all of the precleaned field equipment required into the field. In these instances,
sufficient pre-cleaned equipment should be transported to the field to perform at least one days work.
The following procedures are to be utilized when equipment must be cleaned in the field.
B.2.1 Specifications for Decontamination Pads
Decontamination pads constructed for field clean_ing of sampling and drilling equipment should
meet the following minimum specifications:
• The pad should be constructed m an area known or believed to be free of surface
contamination.
• The pad should not leak excessively.
• If possible, the pad should be constructed on a level, paved surface and should facilitate the
removal of wastewater. This may be a=mplished by either constructing the pad with one
corner· lower than the rest, or by creating a sump or pit in one corner or along one side.
Any sump or pit should also be lined.
E!BSOPQAM B-4 .• May 1996
I
I
m
D
g
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
• Sawhorses or racks constructed tci hold equipment while being cleaned should be high enough above ground to prevent equipment from being splashed.
EIBSOPQAM B-5 . ·-May 1996
• Water should be removed from ·the decontamination pad frequencly.
• A temporary pad should be lined with a water impermeable material with no seams within the pad. This material should be either easily replaced (disposable) or repairable.
At the completion of site activiti~, the derontamination pad should be deactivated. The pit or sump should be backfilled with the appropriate material designated by the site project leader, but only after all waste/rinse water has been pumped into containers for disposal. No solvent rinsates will be placed in the pit. Solvent rinsates should be collected in separate containers for proper disposal. See Section 5.15 of this SOP for proper handling and disposal of these materials. If the derontamination pad has leaked excessively, soil sampling may be required.
B.2.2 "Classic Parameter" Sampling Equipment
"Classic Parameters" are analyses such as oxygen demand, nutrients, certain inorganics, sulfide, flow measurements, etc. For routine operations involving classic parameter analyses, water quality sampling equipment such as Kemmerers, bucl::ets, dissolved oxygen dunl::ers, dredges, etc., may be cleaned with the sample or analyte-free water between sampling locations. A brush may be used to remove deposits of material or sediment; if necessary. If analyte-free water is samplers should be flushed at the next sampling location with the substance '(water) to be sampled, but before the sample is collected.
Flow measuring equipment such as weirs, staff gages, velocity meters, and other stream gaging equipment may be cleaned with tap water between measuring locations, if necessary.
The previously described procedures are not to be used for cleaning field equipment to be used for the collection of samples undergoing trace organic or inorganic constituent analyses.
B.2.3 Sampling Equipment used for the Collection of Trace Organic and Inorganic Compounds
The following procedures are to be used for all sampling equipment used to collect routine samples undergoing trace orgaaic or inorganic constituent analyses:
1. Clean with tap water and soap using a brush if necessary to remove paniculate matter and surface films. Equipment may be steam cleaned (soap and high pressure hot water) as an
alternative to brushing. Sampling equipment that is steam cleaned should be placed on racks or saw horses at least two feet above the floor of the derontamination pad. PVC or plastic items should not be steam cleaned.
2. Rinse thoroughly with tap water.
3. Rinse thoroughly with analyte free water.
4. Rinse thoroughly with solvent. Do not solvent rinse PVC or plastic items.
5. Rinse thoroughly with organic/analyte free waier. If organic/analyte free water is not
available, equipment should be allowed to completely dry. Do not apply a final rinse with analyte water. Organic/analyte free water can be generated on-site utilizing the ponable
system.
EIBSOPQAM B-6 ·--May 1996
I
I
D
D
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6. Remove the equipment from the decontaminarion area and cover with plasric. Equipment
srored overnight should be wrapped in aluminum foil and covered with clean, unused
plasric.
E!BSOPQAM B-7
B.2.4 Well Sounders or Tapes
1. Wash with soap and tap water.
2. Rinse with tap water.
3. Rinse with analyte free water.
B.2.5 Fu!~ Pump Cleaning Proceoure
CAUTION -To avoid damaging the Fultz"' pump:
• Never run pump when dry
• Never switch directly from the forward. to the reverse mode without pausing in the "OFF"
position
The Fu!~· pump should be cleaned prior to use and between each monitoring well. The following
proceoure is required:
1. Pump a sufficient amount of soapy water through the hose to flush out any residual purge
water.
2. Using a brush. scrub the exterior of the contaminated hose and pump with soapy water.
Rinse the soap from the outside of the hose with tap water. Rinse the hose with analyte-free
water and r=il onto the spool.
3. Pump a sufficient amount of tap water through the hose to flush out all the soapy water
(approximately one gallon).
4. Pump a sufficient amount of analyte-free water through the hose to flush out the tap water,
then purge with the pump in the reverse mode.
5. Rinse the outside of the pump housing and hose with analyte-free water (approximately 1/4
gal.).
6. Place pump and reel in clean plastic bag.
B.2.6 Goulds"' Pump Cleaning Procedure
CAUTION -During cleaning always disconnect the pump from the generator.
The Goulds'° pump should be cleaned prior to use and between each monitoring well.
The following proceoure is required:
1. Using a brush, scrub the exterior of the contaminated hose and pump with soap and tap
water.
2. Rinse the soap from the outside of the pump and hose with tap water.
3. Rinse the tap water residue from the outside of pump and hose with analyte-free water.
E!BSOPQAM B-8 ·) May 1996
I
I
I
B
D
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
4. Place the pump and hose in a clean plastic bag.
EIBSOPQAM B-9 . May 1996
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.2.7 Redi-Flo2"' Pump
The Redi-Flo2"' pump should be cleaned prior to use and between each monitoring well. The
following procedure is required:
CAUTION~ Make sure the pump is not plugged In.
1. Using a brush, scrub the exterior of the pump, electrical cord and garden hose with soap
and tap water. Do not wet the electrical plug.
2. Rinse with tap water.
3. Rinse with analyte free water.
4. Place the equipment in a.clean plastic bag.
To clean the Redi-Flo2"' ball check valve:
1. Completely dismantle ball check valve. Check for wear and/or corrosion, and replace as
needed.
2. Using a brush, scrub all components with soap and tap water.
3. Rinse with analyte free water.
4. Reassemble and re-attach the ball check valve to the Redi-Flo2"' pump head.
B.2.8 Automatic Sampler Tubing
The Silastic"' and Tygon"' tubing previously used m the automatic samplers may be field cleaned as follows:
1. Flush tubing with tap water and soap.
2. Rinse tubing thoroughly with tap water.
3. Rinse tubing with analyte free water.
B.3 Downhole Drilling Equipment
These procedures are to be used for drilling activities involving the collection of soil samples
for trace organic and inorganic constituent analyses, and for the construction of monitoring wells to be
used for the collection of groundwater samples for trace organic and inorganic constituent analyses.
B.3.1 Introduction
Cleaning and decontamination of all equipment should occur at a designated area
(decontamination pad) on the site. The decontamination pad should meet the specifications of Section
B.2.1.
EIBSOPQAM B -10 '~ May 1996
Tap water (potable) brought on the site for drilling and cleaning purposes should be contained
in a pre-deaned tank of sufficient size so that drilling activities can proceed without having to stop and
obtain additional water.
A steam cleaner and/or high pressure hot water washer capable of generating a pressure of at
least 2500 PSI and producing hot water and/or steam (200°F plus), with a soap comparonent, should
be obtained.
B.3.2 Preliminary Cleaning and Inspection
The drill rig should be clean of any contaminants that may have been transported from another
hazardous waste site, to minimize the potential for cross-contamination. Further, the drill rig itself
should not serve as a source of contaminants. In addition, associated drilling and decontamination
e,:iuipment, well construction materials, and e,:iuipment handling procedures should meet these
minimum specified criteria: ..
• All downhole augering, drilling, and sampling equipment should be sandblasted before use
if painted, and/or there is a buildup of rust, hard or caked marrer, etc., that cannot be
removed by steam cleaning (soap and high pressure hot water), or wire brushing.
Sandblasting should be performed prior to arrival on site, or well away from the
decontamination pad and areas to be sampled.
• Any portion of the drill rig, backhoe, etc., that is over the borehole (kelly bar or mast,
backhoe buckets, drilling platform, hoist or chain pulldowns, spindles, cathead, etc.) should
be steam cleaned (soap and high pressure hot water) and wire brushed (as needed) to
remove all rust, soil, and other material which may have come from other hazardous waste
sites before being brought on site.
• Printing and/or writing on well casing, tremie tubing, etc., should be removed before use.
Emery cloth or sand paper can be used to remove the printing and/or writing. Most well
material suppliers can supply materials without the printing and/or writing if specified when
ordered. · --
• The drill rig and other equipment associated with the drilling and sampling activities should
be inspected to insure that all oils, greases, hydraulic fluids, etc., have been removed, and
all seals and gaskets are intact with no fluid leaks.
• PVC or plastic materials such as tremie tubes should be inspected. Items that cannot be
cleaned are not acceptable and should be discarded.
B.3.3 Drill Rig Field Cleaning Procedure
u
I
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Any portion of the drill rig, backhoe, etc., that is over the borehole (kelly bar or mast, I
backhoe buclcetS, drilling platform, hoist or chain pulldowns, spindles, cathead, etc.) should be steam
cleaned (soap and high pressure hot water) between boreholes. ·
EIBSOPQAM B --11 '.-May 1996
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.3.4 Field Cleaning Procedure for Drilling Equipment
The following is the standard procedure for field cleaning augers, drill stems, rods, tools, and
associated equipment. This procedure does not apply to well casings, well screens, or split-spoon
samplers used to obtain samples for chemical analyses, which should be cleaned as outlined in Section
B.2.3. .
I. Clean with tap water and soap, using a brush if necessary, to remove particulate matter and
surface films. Steam cleaning (high pressure hot water with soap) may be necessary to
remove matter that is difficult to remove with the brush. Drilling equipment that is steam
cleaned should be placed on racks or saw horses at least two feet above the floor of the
decontamination pad. Hollow-stem augers, drill rods, etc., that are hollow or have holes
that transmit water or drilling fluids, should be cleaned on the inside with vigorous
brushing.
2. Rinse thoroughly with tap water.
3. Remove from the decontamination pad and cover with clean, unused plastic. If stored
overnight, the plastic should be secured to ensure that it stays in place.
When there is concern for low level contaminants it may be necessary to clean this equipment
between borehole drilling and/or monitoring well installation using the procedure outlined in Section
B.2.3.
B.4 Emergency Disposable Sample Container Cleaning
New one-pint or one-{Juart mason jars may be used to collect samples for analyses of organic
compounds and metals in waste and soil samples during an emergency. These containers would also
be acceptable on an emergency basis for the collection of water samples for extractable organic
compounds, pesticides, and metals analyses. These jars cannot be used for the collection of water
samples for volatile organic compound analyses.
The rubber sealing ring should not be in contact with the jar and aluminum foil should be
used, if possible, between the jar and the sealing ring. If possible, the jar and aluminum foil should be
rinsed with pesticide-grade isopropanol and allowed to air dry before use. Several empty bottles and
lids should be submitted to the laboratory as blanks for quality control purposes.
EIBSOPQAM B -12
APPENDIXC
F1ELD EQUIPMENT CENTER STANDARD CLEANING PROCEDURES
PERFORMANCE ORJECTIVE:
• To remove contaminants of concern from sampling, drilling and other field equipment to
concentrations that do not impact study objectives using a standard cleaning procedure.
C.1 Introduction
Cleaning procedures outlined in this appendix are intended for use at the Field Equipment
Center (FEC) for cleaning sampling and other field equipment prior to field use .. These procedures are
not intended to be used in the field. Cleaning procedures for use in the field may be found in
Appendix B.
Sampling and other field equipment cleaned in a=rdance with these procedures will meet the
minimum requirements for Data Quality Objective (DQO) Definitive Data Collection. Alternative
cleaning procedures may be substituted as outlined in Section 5.12 when samples are to be analyzed
for data to be used at a lower DQO level. Deviations from these procedures should be documented in
the approved study plan, field records, and investigative reports.
C.1.1 Specifications For Cleaning Materials
The specifications for standard cleaning materials referred to in this appendix are as follows:
• Soap shall be a standard brand of phosphate-free laboratory detergent such as Liquinox~.
• Disinfectant soap shall be a standard brand of disinfectant cleaner.
• Solvent shall_ be pesticide grade isopropanol.
• Tap water may be obtained from any spigot at the FEC.
• Nitric acid solution (10%) shall be made from reagent-grade nitric acid and deionized
water.
• Analyte free water (deionized water) is tap water that has been treated by passing it through
a standard deionizing resin column. At a minimum, it should contain no detectable heavy
metals or other inorganic compounds (i.e., at or above analytical detection limits) as
defined by a standard Inductively Coupled Argon Plasma Spectrophotometer (ICP) (or
equivalent) scan.
• Organic/analyte free water is defined as tap water that has been treated with activated
carbon and deionizing units. At a minimum, it must meet the analytical criteria of analyte
free water and should contain no detectable pesticides, herbicides, or extractable organic
compounds, and no volatile organic compounds above minimum detectable levels
EJBSOPQAM C -I ,May 1996
I
I
D
D
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I EIBSOPQAM
determined by the Region 4 laboratory for a given set of analyses. Organic/analyte free
water obtained by other methods is a=ptable, as long as it meets the above analytical
criteria.
C - 2 ; May 1996
• Other solvents may be substituted for a ·particular investigation if needed. Pesticide-grade
acetone or methanol are a=ptable. However, it should be noted that if pesticide-grade
acetone is used, the detection of acetone in samples collected with acetone rinsed equipment
is considered suspect. Pesticide-grade methanol is much more hazardous to use than either
pesticide-grade acetone or isopropanol, therefore its use is discouraged.
Solvents, nitric acid solution, laboratory detergent, and rinse waters used to clean equipment
cannot be reused.
C.1.2 Handling and Containers for Cleaning Solutions
Improperly handled cleaning solutions may easily become contaminated. Containers should be
constructed of the proper materials to ensure their integrity. Following are the materials to be used for
storing the specified cleaning materials:
• Soap should be ·kept in clean containers until use. It should be poured directly from the
container.
• Disinfeaant soap should be kept in clean containers until use. It should be poured directly
from the container.
• Solvents should be stored in the unopened original containers until used. Solvents may be
applied using the low pressure nitrogen system fitted with a Teflon.., nozzle, or by using
Teflon.., squeeze bottles.
• Tap water may be kept in clean tanks, hand pressure sprayers, squeeze bottles, or applied
directly from a hose.
• Analyte free water should be stored in cleaned containers that can be closed when not being
used. It may be applied from squeeze bottles.
• Organic/analyte free water should be stored in cleaned glass, Teflona>, or stainless steel
containers prior to use. It may be applied using Teflo_n.., squeeze bottles, or directly from
the system.
• Nitric acid should be kept in the glass container it is received in, and placed in squeeze
bottles prior to application.
C. 1.3 Disposal of Spent Cleaning Solutions
Procedures for safe handling and disposition of spent cleaning solutions, including washwater,
rinse water, spent acid solutions, and spent solvents are as follows:
Washwater
Since equipment is decontaminated before its return to the FEC, the washwater may be
disposed in the sanitary drain in the washroom. When large equipment (vehicles, augers, ete.) is
washed outside, it may wash onto the ground without recovery of the washwater.
EIBSOPQAM C -3 _May 1996
I
D
I
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Rinsewater
Since equipment is decontaminated before its rerurn to the FEC, the rinsewater may be disposed in the sanitary drain in the washroom. When large equipment (vehicles, augers, etc.) is rinsed outside, it may go onto the ground without recovery.
Nitric Acid·
Nitric acid cleaning solutions are to be diluted to a pH greater than 2.0, and flushed down the
sanitary drain in the washroom. If used outdoors, this material should be caprured and diluted to a pH greater than 2.0, and flushed down the sanitary drain in the washroom.
Solvent
All solvents used should be caprured, properly labeled, and stored on the premises of the FEC
until arrangements for proper disposal are made. Used solvents can be classified as either "solvent for recovery" or "solvent for disposal". Solvent for recovery is that which was used in the standard field cleaning or FEC cleaning of equipment. Solvent used for cleaning badly a:mtaminated equipment
(e.g., tar removal, etc.) should be designated for disposal. The two groups should. be labeled "For Recovery" or "For Disposal" and stored separately at the FEC. FEC personnel should notify the Hazardous Waste Disposal Officer in writing each month of the amount (in gallons) of each type (either Recovery or Disposal) of solvent. ·
C .1. 4 Safety Procedures for Cleaning Operations
Some materials used to implement the cleaning procedures outlined in this Appendix are
harmful if used improperly. Caution should be exercised and all applicable safety procedures shall be
followed. At a minimum, the following precautions shall be taken in the washroom during these
cleaning operations:.
• Safety glasses with splash shields or goggles, a neoprene apron, and neoprene gloves will
be worn during a!L cleaning operations. When cleaning heavy items such as hollow-stem
augers or other drill rig equipment, safety boots will be worn.
• All solvent rinsing operations will be conducted under a fume hood or in the open (never in
a closed rooin).
• No eating, smoking, drinking, chewing, or any hand to mouth contact shall be permitted
during cleaning operations.
C.1.5 Handling and Labeling of Cleaned Equipment
After cleaning, equipment should be handled only by personnel wearing clean latex gloves to prevent re-aintamination.
After the cleaned equipment is wrapped in aluminum foil and sealed in plastic, the date that the
equipment was cleaned should be written on the plastic. If the equipment was not cleaned according to
the procedures outlined in this appendix, this should also be noted on the plastic.
EIBSOPQAM C-4 • May 1996
C.1.6 Initial Processing of Returned Equipment
Field or sampling equipment that needs to be repaired will be identified with a "repair" tag.
Any problems encountered with the equipment and specific required repairs shall be noted on this tag,
as well as the date and the initials of the investigator. Field equipment or reusable sample containers
needing cleaning or repairs will not be stored with clean equipment, sample tubing, or sample
containers.
All plastic wrapped equipment, containers, and tubing not used in the field may be placed back
into stock after the following precautions are taken:
• Soap and hot water rinse plastic containers. Allow to air dry.
• If plastic wrapping leaks after soap/water rinse, remove the equipment and place it into the
standard cleaning process.
C.2 Trace Organic and Inorganic Constituent Sampling Equipment
Sampling equipment used to collect samples undergoing trace organic and/or inorganic
constituent analyses should be thoroughly cleaned. The following procedures are to be used.
C.2.1 Teflon"' and Glass
I
I
I
D
H
I
I
I
1. Wash equipment thoroughly with soap and hot tap water using a brush or scrub pad to I
remove any particulate maner or surface film.
2. Rinse equip_ment thoroughly with hot tap water.
3. Rinse equipment with 10 percent nitric acid solution. Small and awkward ei:iuipment such
as vacuum bonle insens and well bailer ends may be soaked in the nitric acid solution
instead of being rinsed with it. Fresh nitric acid solution should be prepared for each
cleaning session.
4. Rinse equipment thoroughly with analyte free water.
5. Rinse equipment thoroughly with solvent and allow to air dry for at least 24 hours.
6. Wrap equipment in one layer of aluminum foil. Roll edges of foil into a "tab" to allow for
easy removal. Seal the foil wrapped equipment in plastic and label.
When this sampling equipment is used to collect samples that contain oil, grease, or other hard
to remove materials, it may be necessary to rinse the ei:iuipment several times with pesticide-grade
acetone, hexane, or petroleum ether 10 remove the materials before proceeding with the first step. In
extreme cases, it may be necessary to steam clean the field ei:iuipment before proceeding with Step 1.
If the equipment cannot be cleaned utilizing these procedures, it should be discarded.
EIBSOPQAM C -5 -·• May 1996
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C.2.2 Stainless Steel or Steel
1. Wash equipment thoroughly with soap and hot tap water using a brush or scrub pad to
remove any particulate maner or surface film.
2. Rinse equipment thoroughly with hot tap water.
3. Rinse equipment thoroughly with analyte free water.
4. Rinse equipment thoroughly with solvent and allow to air dry for at least 24 hours.
5. Wrap equipment in one layer of aluminum foil. Roll edges of foil into a "tab" to allow for easy removal. Seal the foil wrapped equipment in plastic and label.
When this sampling equipment is used to aillect samples that aintain oil, grease, or other hard to remove materials, it may be n=ssary to rinse the equipment several times with pesticide-grade
acetone, hexane, or petroleum ether to remove the materials before proceeding with the first step. In extreme cases, it may be n=ssary to steam clean the field equipment before proceeding with Step 1. If the equipment cannot be cleaned utilizing these procedures, it should be discarded.
C.2.3 Reusable Composite Sample and Organic/Analyte Free Water Containers
These aintainers will be rinsed with organic/anal yte free water and the rinse water will be submitted to the Region 4 laboratory outlined in Appendix B.2.3. Approximately one percent of all such aintainers cleaned will be subjected to this procedure.
C.3 Automatic Wastewater Sampling Equipment
C.3.1 ISCO" and Other Automatic Samplers
• The exterior and ai;cessible interior (excluding the waterproof timing mechanism) portions
of the automatic samplers will be washed with soap and tap water then rinsed with tap
water.
• Desiccant in the flow meters should be checked and replaced, if n=ssary, each time the
aiuipment is cleaned.
• The face of the timing case mechanism will be cleaned with a clean damp cloth.
• Tubing (sample intake and pump tubing) will be discarded after each use.
• New precleaned, Silastic pump tubing (see Appendix C.4.1) will be installed.
C.3.2 ISCO" 1680, 2700, and 3700 Rotary Funnel, Distributor, and Metal Tube
1. Clean with hot tap water. soap, and a brush.
2. Rinse thoroughly with analyte free water.
EIBSOPQAM C -

6

.• May 19%
I
I
3. Replace in sampler.
I
I
I
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I -E!BSOPQAM C - 7 ._ May 1996
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C.3.3 All Automatic Sampler Headers
I. Disassemble header and using a bonle brush, wash with hot tap water and soap.
2. Rinse thoroughly with analyte free water.
3. Dry thoroughly; then reassemble header and wrap with aluminum foil.
4. Seal in Plastic
C.3.4 Reusable Glass Composite Sample Containers
I. Wash containers thoroughly with hot tap water and laboratory detergent, using a bonle
brush to remove particulate maner and surface film.
2. Rinse containers thoroughly with hot tap water.
3. Rinse containers with at least 10 percent nitric acid.
4. Rinse containers thoroughly with tap water.
5. Rinse containers thoroughly with analyte free water.
6. Rinse twice with solvent and allow to air dry for at least 24 hours.
7. Cap with aluminum foil or Teflon"' film.
When these containers are used to collect samples that contain oil, grease, or other hard to remove materials, it may be necessary to rinse the containers several times with pesticide-grade
acetone, hexane, or petroleum ether to remove the materials before proceeding with Step 1. Any
bonles that have a visible film, scale, or discolo_ration remaining after this cleaning procedure shall also be discarded.
C.3.5 Plastic Reusable Composite Sample Containers (2700 -5 gal., 3700 -4 gal.)
I. Wash containers thoroughly with hot tap water and laboratory detergent, using a bonle brush to remove particulate maner and surface film.
2. Rinse containers thoroughly with hot tap water.
3. Rinse containers with at least 10 percent nitric acid.
4. Rinse containers thoroughly with tap water.
5. Rinse containers thoroughly with analyte free water.
6. Cap with aluminum foil or Teflon"' film.
Any plastic composite sample containers that have a visible film, scale, or other discoloration
remaining after this cleaning procedure will be discarded.
EIBSOPQAM C-8
. ..
C.3.6 ISCO" 1680 Glass Sequential Sample Bottles
1. Rinse with 10 percent nitric acid.
2. Rinse thoroughly with tap water.
3. Wash in dishwasher at wash cycle, using laboratory detergent cycle, followed by tap and
anal yte free water rinse cycles.
4. Replace bottles in covered, automatic sampler base and cover with aluminum foil for
storage.
These ISCO" 1680 glass sequential sample bottles are not to be used for collecting samples for
GC/MS (or equivalent) analyses. The ISCO" 1680 bottles may be used for collecting samples for
GC/MS (or equivalent) analyses if the cleaning procedures outlined in Section C.3.7 are used.
C.3.7 ISCO" 1680, 2700, and 3700 Glass Sequential Bottles for GC/MS Analyses
1. Rinse with 10 percent nitric acid.
2. Rinse thoroughly with tap water.
I
D
I
I
I
I
I
3. Wash in dishwasher at wash cycle, using laboratory detergent cycle, followed by tap and I
analyte free water rinse cycles .
.4. Rinse twice with solvent and allow to air dry for at least 24 hours. I
5. Replace in covered, automatic sampler base; cover with aluminum foil for storage and mark
the base as follows: "Cleaned for organic analyses." I
C.3.8 Bottle Siphons for Composite Containers
Tubing should be rinsed with solvent and dried in the drying oven overnight before use. The
ends of the siphon should be capped with aluminum foil and/or Teflon~ film for storage. The tubing
will be sealed in plastic and labeled. The siphon should be flushed with sample thoroughly before use.
C.3.9 Reusable Teflon~ Composite Mixer Rods
1. Wash equipment thoroughly with soap and hot tap water using a brush or scrub pad to
remove any particulate mauer or surface film.
2. Rinse equipment thoroughly with hot tap water.
3. Rinse equipment with at least a 10 percent nitric acid solution.
4. Rinse equipment thoroughly with tap water.
5. Rinse equipment thoroughly with analyte free water.
6. Rinse equipment thoroughly with solvent and allow to air dry for at least 24 hours.
7. Wrap equipment in one layer of aluminum foil. Roll edges of foil into a "tab" to allow for
easy removal. Seal the foil wrapped e!juipment in plastic and label.
EIBSOPQAM C - 9 --May 1996
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
When this sampling equipment is used to coiiecr samples that contain oil, grease. or other hard to remove materials, it may be necessary to rinse tbe equipment several times with pesticide-grade
acetone, hexane, or petroleum ether to remove the materials before proceerling with Step 1. In extreme cases, it m.ay be necessary to steam clean the. field equipment before proceeding with Step l. If the equipment cannot be cleaned utilizing these procedures, it should be discarded.
C-4 Cleaning Procedures for Tubing
C.4.1 Silasti~ Pump Tubing
The Silasti~ pump tubing in the automatic samplers and peristaltic pumps should be replaced after each study. After installation, the exposed ends should be capped with clean, unused aluminum
foil.
C.4.2 Teflon"' Sample Tubing
Use only new Teflon"' tubing which has been precleaned as follows for the collection of samples for trace organic compound or ICP analyses:
I. Teflon"' tubing shall be precut in 10, 15 or 25-foot lengths before cleaning.
2. Rinse outside of tubing with solvent.
3. Flush interior of tubing with solvent.
4. Dry overnight in the drying oven.
5. Coil. Cap ends with aluminum foil. Wrap tubing in one layer of aluminum foil. Roll
edges of foil into a "tab" to allow for easy removal. Seal the foil wrapped tubing in plastic
and label.
C.4.3 Stainless Steel Tubing
1. Wash with soap and hot tap water using a long, narrow, bottle brush.
2. Rinse equipment thoroughly with hot tap water. ·
3. Rinse equipment thoroughly with analyte free water.
4. Rinse equipment thoroughly with solvent and allow to air dry for at least 24 hours.
5. Cap ends with aluminum foil. Wrap tubing in one layer of aluminum foil. Roll edges of foil into a "tab" to allow for easy removal. Seal the foil wrapped tubing in plastic and date.
When this sampling equipment is used to collect samples that contain oil, grease, or other hard to remove materials, it may be necessary to rinse the equipment several times with pesticide-grade
acetone, hexane, or petroleum ether to remove the materials before proceeding with Step 1. If the
equipment cannot be cleaned utilizing these procedures, it should be discarded.
EIBSOPQAM C -10 .. ,May 1996
C.4.4 Glass Tubing
C.5
New glass tubing should be cleaned as follows:
1. Rinse thoroughly with solvent.
2. Air dry for at least 24 hours.
3. Wrap tubing completely with aluminum foil and seal in plastic (one tube/pack) to prevent
contamination during storage.
Cleaning Procedures for Miscellaneous Equipment
C.5.1 Well Sounders and Tapes
1. Wash with soap and tap water.
2. Rinse with hot tap water.
3. Rinse with analyte free water.
4. Allow to air dry overnight.
5. Wrap equipment in aluminum foil (with tab for easy removal) seal in plastic, and date.
C.5.2 Fu!~ Pump
CAUTION: To avoid damaging the Fultz pump:
• Never run pump when dry.
• Never switch directly from forward to reverse mode without pausing in the "OFF" position.
Cleaning:
1. Pump a sufficient amount of hot soapy water through the hose to flush out any residual purge
water.
· 2. Using a brush or scrub pad, scrub the exterior of the contaminated hose and pump with hot
soapy water.· Rinse hose with analyte free water and recoil onto the spool.
3. Pump a sufficient amount of tap water through the hose to flush out soapy water
(approximately one gallon).
4. Pump a sufficient amount of analyte-free water through the hose to flush out the tap water,
then empty pump and hose by placing pump in reverse. Do not allow pump to run dry.
5. Rinse the pump housing and hose with analyte free water. •
6. Place pump and reel in clean polyethylene bag or wrap in clean polyethylene film. · Ensure
that a romplete set of new rotors, two fuses and a set of cables are artached to the reel.
EIBSOPQAM C -11 ;May 1996
I
I
I
D
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C.5.3 Goulds~ Pump
CAUTION -Never plug the pump in while cleaning.
Cleaning:
1. Remove garden hose {if attached), and clean separately.
2. Using a brush or scrub pad, scrub the· exterior of the hose, el=rical cord and pump with soap and.tap water. Do not wet the el=rical plug.
3. Rinse with anal yte free water.
4. Air dry.
.
5. Place pump and hose in clean plastic bag and label.
C.5.4 Redi-F1o2~ Pump
CAUTION -Make sure that the controller is not plugged in.
CAUTION -Do not wet the controller.
Controller Box Cleaning:
I. Wipe the controller box with a damp cloth. Immediate! y remove any excess water..
2. Let the controller box dry complete! y.
Pump Cleaning:
CAUTION -Make sure that the pump is not plugged in.
I. Remove garden hose (if attached) and ball check valve. Clean these items separately.
2. Using a brush or scrub pad, scrub the exterior of the el=rical cord and pump with soap and tap water. Do not wet the el=rical plug.
3. Rinse with tap water.
4. Rime with analyte free water.
5. Completely air dry.
6. Place e!Juipment in clean plastic bag.
EIBSOPQAM C -12 ',.May 1996
To clean the Redi-Flo2"' ball check valve: ·
1. Completely dismantle ball check valve. Check for wear and/or corrosion, and replace as
needed.
2. Using a brush, scrub all components with soap and hot tap water.
3. Rinse with anal yte-free water ..
4. Completely air dry ..
5. Reassemble the ball check valve and re-attach to Redi-Flo2"' pump head.
Note: The analyte-free water within the Redi-Flo2"' pump head should be changed at the FEC upon
return from the field a=rding to the manufacturer's instructions.
C.5.5 Little Beaver"'
The engine and power head should be cleaned with a power washer, steam jenny, or hand
washed with a brush using soap to remove oil, grease, and hydraulic fluid from the exterior of the unit.
Do not use degreasers. Rinse thoroughly with tap water.
Auger flights and bits should be cleaned as follows:
1. Inspect thoroughly. If severe rust, corrosion, paint, or hardened grout 1s present, the
equipment will require sandblasting prior to cleaning.
2. Clean with tap water and soap, using a brush if necessary, to remove particulate maner and
surface films. Steam cleaning (high pressure hot water with soap) may be necessary to
remove maner that is difficult to remove with the brush. Augers that are steam cleaned
should be placed on racks or saw horses at least two feet aboveground.
3. Rinse thoroughly with tap water.
4. Completely air dry. Remove and wrap with clean, unused plastic. Return to storage.
At the direction of the project leader or the Qualiry Assurance Officer, this equipment may be
cleaned as specified in Section C.2.2 prior to use.
C.5.6 Drill Rig, Grout Mixer, and Associated Equipment
• A thorough interior and exterior cleaning of the drill rig is required at the end of each study.
The exterior (including undercarriage) should be washed with soap and tap water and then
rinsed with tap water. The steam jenny may be used.
• The pump and tank on the drill rig should be flushed with tap water until clear, and then
drained.
• The pump on the grout mixer should be flushed with tap water until clear, then drained.
EIBSOPQAM C -13 :~ May 19%
I
I
D
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
• The grout mixer should be washed with soap and tap water. The steam jenny may be used.
EIBSOPQAM C -14 ,.May 1996
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Drilling equipment (tools, rods, augers, etc.} should be cleaned as follows:
I. Inspect thoroughly. If severe rust, corrosion, paint, or hardened grout is present the equipment may require sandblasting prior to cleaning.
2. Clean with tap water and soap, using a brush if n=sary, to remove paniculate matter and surface films. Steam cleaning (high pressure hot water with soap) may be n=sary to remove matter that is difficult to remove with the brush. Drilling equipment that has been
steam cleaned should be placed on racks or saw horses at least two feet above ground.
Hollow-stem augers, drill rods, etc., that are hollow or have holes that transmit water or
drilling fluids, should be cleaned on the inside and outside.
3. Rinse thoroughly with tap water.
4. Let completely air dry. Remove and cover with clean, unused plastic and label.
At the direction of the project leader, Quality Assurance Officer, or drill rig operator, this equipment may be cleaned as specified in Section C.2.2 prior to use.
C.5.7 Miscellaneous Sampling and Flow Measuring Equipment
Flow measuring equipment such as weirs, staff gages, velocity meters, and other stream gaging equipment, and other miscellaneous sampling equipment shall be washed with soap and hot tap water, rinsed with hot tap water, rinsed thoroughly with analyte free water, and completely air dried before being stored. This procedure is not to be used for equipment utilized for the collection of samples for trace organic or inorganic constituent analyses.
C.5.8 Field Analytical Equipment
Field instruments for in-situ water analysis should be wiped with a clean, damp cloth. The probes on these instruments (pH, conductivity, DO, etc.), should be rinsed with analyte-free water and air dried.
Any desiccant in these instruments should be checked and replaced, if n=sary, each time the equipment is cleaned.
C.5.9 Ice Chests and Shipping Containers
Ice chests and reusable containers shall be washed with soap (interior and exterior) and rinsed with tap water and air dried before storage. If in the opinion of the field investigators the container is severely contaminated with concentrated waste or other toxic material, it shall be cleaned as thoroughly
as possible, rendered unusable, and properly disposed.
C.5.10 Pressure Field Filtration Apparatus
1. Wash equipment thoroughly with soap and hot tap water using a brush to remove any
paniculate matter or surface film.
2. Rinse equipment thoroughly with hot tap water.
3. Rinse equipment with 10 percent nitric acid solution.
EIBSOPQAM C -15 ·. May 1996 ·:•
4. Rinse equipment thoroughly with analytefree water.
5. Rinse equipment thoroughly with solvent and allow to air dry for at least 24 hours.
6. Assemble the apparatus and cap both the pressure inlet and sample discharge lines with
aluminum foil to prevent contamination during storage.
7. Wrap equipment in one layer of aluminum foil. Roll edges of foil into a "tab" to allow for
easy removal. Seal the foil wrapped equipment in plastic and date.
During steps I through 5 as outlined above and immediately after assembling, pressure should
be applied to the apparatus after each rinse step {water and acid) to drive the rinse material through the
porous glass filter holder in the bottom of the apparatus.
When this sampling equipment is used to collect samples that contain oil, grease, or other hard
to remove materials, it may be necessary to rinse the equipment several times with pesticide-grade
acetone, hexane, or perroleum ether to remove the materials before proceeding with the first step. In
extreme cases, it may be necessary to steam clean the field equipment before proceeding with Step I. If
the equipment cannot be cleaned utilizing these procedures, ·it should be discarded.
C.5.11 Organic/Analyte Free Water Storage Containers
NOTE: These containers will be used only for transporting organic/ana!yte free water.
I. Wash containers thoroughly (interior and exterior) with hot tap water and laboratory
detergent, using a bottle brush to remove paniculate matter and surface film.
2. Rinse containers thoroughly with hot tap water.
3. Rinse containers with at least 10 percent nitric acid.
4. Rinse containers thoroughly with tap water.
5. Rinse containers thoroughly with analyte free water.
6. Rinse containers thoroughly with solvent and allow to air dry for at least 24 hours.
7. Cap with aluminum foil or Teflon'" film.
8. Store in plastic bags.
When transj)oning organic/analyte free water to the field, use only containers cleaned as
specified above. Thoroughly rinse the interior of the container with organic/analyte free water prior to
filling. Cap with one layer of Teflon'" film, one layer of aluminum foil, and label the container as
"organic/analyte free water" and include the date it was prepared. Do not store the organic/analyte free
water at the FEC for more than three days.
EIBSOPQAM C -16 . May 1996
I
n
D
g
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C.5.12 Ponable Solvent Rinse System
1. Replace Teflon~ tubing if necessary. Wash nozzle and tubing linings with hot, soapy water.
2. Rinse with analyte-free water.
3. Wrap nozzle and tubing ends with aluminum foil.
C.5. 13 Splash Suits
CAUTION: Splash suits should be inspected for wear or damage. Ir, after consultation with the Branch Safety Officer, the suit cannot be repaired, it should be discarded.
1. Wash and brush suit thoroughly inside and out with a brush in hot tap water and soap.
2. Rinse suit thoroughly inside and out with tap water.
3. Hang suit up until completely dry.
4. Fold suit and place in clean, clear plastic bag and tap shut. Mark the suit's size on the bag.
C.5.14 SCBA Facemasks
CAUTION: Facemasks should be inspected for wear or damage. Ir, after consultation with the
Safety Officer, the facemask cannot be repaired, it should be discarded.
1. Wash facemask thoroughly inside and out with hot tap water and disinfectant soap. Use only
soft brushes. Do not use scouring pads of any rype.
2. Rinse facemask thoroughly inside and out with tap water.
3. Hang facemask up u_ntil completely dry.
4. Place facemask in plastic bag and rerurn to SCBA case.
C.5.15 Garden Hose
1. Brush exterior with soap and tap water
2. RiIL<;e with tap water.
3. Flush interior with tap water until clear (minimum of one gallon).
4. Let completely air dry.
5. Coil and place in clean plastic bag.
EIBSOPQAM C • 17 . May 1996
C.5. 16 Portable Tanks for Tap Water
1. Scrub interior and exterior with soap and tap water.
2. Rinse with tap water.
3. Let completely air dry.
4. Close.
C.5.17 Vehicles
Vehicles utilized by field investigators should be washed (if possible) at the conclusion of each
field trip. This should minimize contamination of equipment or samples due to contamination of vehi-
cles.
When vehicles are used in conjunction with hazardous waste site inspections, or on studies
where pesticides, herbicides, organic compounds, or other toxic materials are known or suspected to be
present, a thorough interior and exterior cleaning (using soapy tap water) is ·mandatory at the conclusion
of such investigations. It shall be the responsibility of the field investigators to see that this procedure is
followed. Personnel involved will use appropriate safety measures.
Vehicles shall be equipped with trash bags and/or trash containers to facilitate vehicle cleaning.
Field investigators are responsible for keeping field vehicles clean by removing trash and other debris.
Contaminated trash and equipment should be kept separate from ordinary trash and should be properly
disposed on-site or upon rerum (Section 5 .15).
C.6 Preparation or Disposable Sample Containers
C.6.1 Introduction
No disposable sample container (with the exception of the glass and plastic composmng
containers) may be reused. All disposable sample containers will be stored in their original packing
containers. When packages of uncapped sample containers are opened, they will be placed in new
plastic garbage bags and sealed to prevent contamination during storage.
Specific predeaning instructions for disposable sample containers are given m the following
sections.
C.6.2 Plastic Containers used for "Classical" Parameters
Plastic containers used for oxygen demand, nutrients, classical inorganics, and sulfides have no
precleaning requirement. However, only new containers may be used.
EIBSOPQAM . C -18 . May 1996
n
D
u
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C.6.3 Glass Bottles for Semi-Volatile GC/MS Analytes
These procedures are to be used only if the supply of precleaned, cenified sample bottles is
disrupted. The Quality Assurance Officer will instruct personnel in the proper implementation of these
procedures. •
If desired, pesticide-grade methylene chloride may be substiruted for pesticide-grade
isopropanol. In addition, 1:1 nitric acid may be substiruted for the 10% nitric acid solution.
When these sample containers are cleaned and prepared, they should be cleaned in standard sized
lots of 100 to facilitate the quality control procedures outlined in Section 5.14.
1. Wash bottles and jars. Teflon"' liners, and caps in hot tap water and soap.
2. Rinse three tirn~ with tap water.
3. Rinse with 10% nitric acid solution.
4. Rinse three times with analyte free water.
5. Rinse bottles, jars, and liners (not caps) with solvent.
6. Oven dry bottles, jars, and liners at l25°C. Allow to cool.
7. Place liners in caps and close containers.
8. Store in contaminant-free area.
C.6.4 Glass Bottles for Volatile GC/MS and TOX Analyses
These procedures are to be used only if the supply of precleaned, cenified sample bottles is
disrupted. The Quality Assurance Officer will instruct personnel in the proper implementation of these
procedures.
When these sample containers are cleaned and prepared, they should be cleaned in standard sized
lots of 100 to facilitate the quality control procedures outlined in Section 5.14.
I. Wash vials, bottles and jars, Teflon· liners and septa, and caps m hot tap water and
laboratory detergent.
2. Rinse all items with analyte free water.
3. Oven dry at 125°C and allow to cool.
4. Seal vials, bottles, and jars with liners or septa as appropriate and cap.
5. Store in a contaminant free area.
EIBSOPQAM C -19 •; May 19%
C.6.5 Plastic Bottles for ICP Analytes
These procedures are to be used only if the supply of precleaned, certified sample bottles is
disrupted. The Quality Assurance Officer will instruct personnel in the proper impl~mentation of these procedures.
When these sample containers are cleaned and prepared, they should be cleaned in standard sized lots of 100 to facilitate the quality control procedures outlined in Section 5.14.
I. Wash bottles and caps in hot tap water with soap.
2. Rinse both with 10% nitric acid solution.
3. Rinse three times with analyte-free water.
4. Invert bottles and dry in contaminant free environment.
5. Cap bottles.
6. Store in contaminant free area.
EIBSOPQAM C -20 · May 1996
I
I
D
R
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
APPENDIXD
SAMPLE SIIlPPING PROCEDURES
D.1 Introduction
Samples collected during field investigations or in response to a hazardous materi,
must be classified prior to shipment, as either environmental or hazardous materials sa1
general, environmental samples include drinking water, most groundwater and ambient sun
soil, sediment, treated municipal and industrial wastewater effluent, biological specimei
' samples not expected to be contaminated with high levels of hazardous materials.
Samples collected from process wastewater streams, drums, bulk storage tanks, soil,
sediment, or water samples from areas suspected of being highly contaminated may require shipment
as dangerous goods. Regulations for packing, marking; labeling, and shipping of dangerous goods by
air transpon are promulgated by the International Air Transpon Authority (IA TA), which is equivalent
to United Nations International Civil Aviation Organization (UN/ICAO) (1). Transponation of
hazardous materials (dangerous goods) by EPA personnel is covered by EPA Order 1000. 18 (2)
D.2 Shipment or Dangerous Goods
The project leader is responsible for determining if samples collected during a specific field
investigation meet the definitions for dangerous goods. If a sample is collected of a material that is
listed in the Dangerous Goods List, Section 4.2. IA TA, then that sample must be identified, packaged,
marked, labeled, and shipped according to the instructions given for that material. If the composition
of the collected sample(s) is unknown, and the project leader knows or suspects that it is a regulated
material (dangerous goods), the sample may not be offered for air transpon. · If the composition and
propenies of the waste sample or highly contaminated soil, sediment, or water sample are unknown, or
only panially known, the sample may not be offered for air transpon.
In addition, the shipment of prepreserved sample containers or bottles of preservatives (e.g.,
NaOH pellets, HCL, etc.) which are designated as dangerous goods by IATA is regulated. Shipment
of nitric acid is forbidden on· all aircraft. Dangerous goods must not be offered for air transpon
without contaaing the Division dangerous goods shipment designee.
D.3 Shipment or Environmental Laboratory Samples
Guidance for the shipment of environmental laboratory samples by personnel is provided in
a memorandum dated March 6, 1981, subject "Final National Guidance Package for Compliance with
Depanrnent of Transponation Regulations in the Shipment of Laboratory Samples" (3). By this
memorandum, the shipment of the following unpreserved samples is not regulated:
• Drinking water
• Treated effluent
• Biological specimens
• Sediment
• Water treatment plant sludge
• POTW sludge
EIBSOPQAM D -I . _May 1996
"
In addition, the shipment of the following preserved samples is not regulated, provided the amount of preservative used does not exceed the amounts found in 40 CFR 136.3 ( 4) (see Appendix A). It is the shippers' (individual signing the air waybill) responsibility to ensure that proper amounts of preservative are used:
• Drinking water
• Ambient water
• Treated effluent
• Biological specimens
• Sediment
• Wastewater treatment plant sludge
• Water treatment plant sludge
Samples determined by the project leader to be in these categories are to be shipped using the following protocol, developed jointly between US-EPA, OSHA, and DOT. This procedure is documented in the "Final National Guidance Package for Compliance with Department of Transportation Regulations in the Shipment of Environmental Laboratory Samples" (3).
Untreated wastewater and sludge from PO1W's are considered to be "diagnostic specimens" (not environmental laboratory samples). However, because they are not considered to be etiologic
agents (infectious) they are not restricted and may be shipped using the procedures outlined below.
Environmental samples should be packed prior to shipment by air using the following procedures:
1. Allow sufficient headspace (ullage) in all bottles (except VOC containers with a septum
seal) to compensate for any pressure and temperature changes (approximately 10
percent of the volume of the container).
2. Be sure the lids on all bottles are tight (will not leak).
3. Place bottles in separate and appropriately sized polyethylene bags and seal the bags
with tape (preferably plastic el=ical tape). Up to three voe bottles may be packed
in one Whirl-Pak container.
4. Optionally, place three to six voe vials in a quan mer.al can and then fill the can with
verrnirnlite.
5. Select a sturdy cooler in good repair. Sea.tre and tape the drain plug with fiber or duct
tape. Line the cooler with a large heavy duty plastic bag.
6. Place two to four inches of vermia.tlite in the bottom of the cooler and then place the
bottles and cans · in the cooler with sufficient space to allow for the addition of
verrnia.tlite between the bottles and cans.
7. Put "blue ice" (or ice that has been "double bagged" in heavy duty polyethylene bags
and properly sealed) on top of and/or between the samples. Fill all remaining space
between· the bottles or cans with vermia.tlite.
8. Sea.trely fasten the top of the large garbage bag with tape (preferably plastic el=ical
tape).
EIBSOPQAM D -2 May 19%
D
0
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
9. Place the Chain--0f-Custody R=rct· and the CLP Traffic Report Fann (if applicable)
into a plastic bag, and tape the bag to the inner side of the cooler lid.
10. Close the cooler and_ seairely ·tape (preferably with fiber tape) the top of the cooler
shut. Chain--0f-custody seals should be affixed to the top and sides of the cooler within
the securing tape so that the cooler cannot be opened without breaking the seal.
11. Shipping containers must be marked "THIS END UP", and arrow labels which
indicate the proper upward position of the container should be affixed to the container.
E!BSOPQAM
A label containing the name and address of the shipper should be placed on the
outside of the container. Labels used in the shipment of hazardous materials (e.g.,
Cargo Only Air Craft, Flammable Solids, etc.) are not pennined to be on the outside
of containers used to transport environmental samples.
D -

3

_,,May 1996
D.4
I.
2.
3.
4.
References
Dangerous Goods Regulations, International Air Transport Authority (IATA). 31st. Edition,
Effective January 1, 1995.
EPA Order 1000.18, February 16, 1979.
"Final Regulation Package for Compliance with DOT Regulations in the Shipment of
Environmental Laboratory Samples,· Memo from David Weitzman, Work Group Chairman,
Office of Occupational Health and Safety (PM-273), US-EPA, April 13, 1981.
40 CFR 136.3. July 1, 199_4. See Table 11, Footnote 3.
E!BSOPQAM D-4 May 19%
I
I
D
0
u
m
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
APPENDIX B
TARGET ANAL YTE LIST FOR INORGANIC ANALYSES
AND
TARGET COMPOUND LISTS FOR ORGANIC ANALYSES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Analyte
Aluminum
Antimony
Arsenic
Barium
Beryllium
Cadmium
Calcium
Ch=-omium
Cobalt
Cop?e!:"
r=o:1
Lead
Hagnesium
H2nganese
He=-=u=y
tt i = ke l
?o::ass iu-:7.
Seleniur.i
Sil ve·.:-
Sodiu:ci
Tha!!it.:::-.
Va:,adiwr..
Zinc
cyar.ide
✓
INOKG;..NIC Tr'.?..G:::'T AN',:'....I..YT::: LIST (TA.!.) -TA3LZ l
Con::=ac:: Aecui=ed
Detec::ion tir.ii::1 ,2
200
60
10
200
5
5
5000
10
50
25
100
J
5000
15
0.2
~o
5000
5
10
5000
10
50
20
10
(lj Su::Jje::.:. :::o ::he .:-es:::=.:.::::,ior.s spe=.!:fie::i i:i ='.xhi!:t.:.r.s D a:id :::, 2:iy a:ialy::i-::a! ·rr,.e::~cd spe=i::ied .:..n ::.L~D.::.o, Exhibi:: D ::iay :Je c::ili::ed as long as ::~e ~o=~me~::ed ins:::umen: o: me::hod de::e=::ion limi::s mee:: ::he Con:::-ac-:: ~equired De:ect.!cn Li.~.!.: (C?...:LJ requi:-emen.::.s. Highe:-de::ect.io:1 lirni::s may only be ~sed in ::he iollc~ing circu::is::an:e:
(2 I
If ~he sa~ple concen::raLio~ exceeds five times :he de:e=:lon lici: o! ~he ins:=umen: □= rne:jod :~ use, :he value may be =epo=:ed even :hough the inst=umen: o= me:~od decec:ion li~i: may no: equal :he Con:=ac: Aequi=eC De:ec:io~ Li~~=. ~his i5 illus:=a:ed in :he exa~?le belo~:
Ke:hod in use= !C?
Ins==ume~t De=e==ion L:~ic {IDL)
sa~?le concen==a=ion = 220
Con:=ac: ~ecci=ed De:e:=io~ ~ic:= {C~DL) J
The value o~ 220 ma! be =e?c==e~ even =hou;~ th~ ins=ru~en~ detection limi~ is g=e~:e= =han CA~~-The ins==u~en: □

=

me:hod de:ec:ion limi~ mus: be docu~en=~d as desc=ibe~ in Sx~!bl:s 3 and~-
The C~DLs a=e :he m~nimc~ levels of de:e::ion a::ep:able unde: :he co~~rac: S:a=e~en: o! ~o:;:.
C-2 IL~.O~ .O
\
l
.:'CDD/PCDF . CAS N'l!::lber
2]78-TCDD 1746-01-6 2378-TCDF 51207 -Jl-9
12378-:?cCDF 57117-41-6 12]78-:?cCDD 40]21-76-4 23478-?cCDF 57117-Jl-4
123478-::.xCDF 7064B-25-9 l.23670-:-:_::::CJJ? 57117-.L..L.-9 1234 7 8-E:::CDD 39227-23-6 123678-ExCDD 57653-85-7 123789-li:<CDD 19408-74-J 234678-:'.;cCDF 60851-]4-5 123789-SCDF 72918-21-9
1234678-;;?CDF 67562-]9-4 1234678-E?DD 35022-.46-9 11JL. 78 9-H?CD? 5567J-_e9-7
OCDD 3258-87-9 OCDF 39001-02-0
Quancicac!.on
t:a'C:er 5oil
(ny'L) (ug/Kg)
10 l.O
10 l.O
25 2.5
25 2.5
25 2.5
25 2.5
25 2.5
25 2.5
25 2.5
25 2.5
25 2.5
25 2.5
25 2.5
25 2.5
.25 2.5
.so 5.0
50 5.0
1 Lir.iic.s-·
?1-y' . Ci.e=:ic~l
Ash U..a.s-:::e-
(ug/Kg) (u,;;:<;;)
. 1.0 10
1.0 10.
2.5 25
2.5 25
2.5 25
2.5 25
2.5 25
2.5 25
2.5 25
2.5 25
2.5 25
2.5 25
2.5 25
2.5 25
2.5 25
5.0 50
5.0 50
-All C?...QL values l.i...s~ed he=e a=e based on L½e ~ec ~ei&n: oL L½e s.a=?le ..
C~e=i.::..:i.l ·-·;;..::;::e i::cl:.:C::e.=:; ::..½.c. =-.:::.=-:-:.ce:s of oils. s:::.ll:Jo::::==s. oily slcc!;e. :,:c c .fu.cl oil, oil-l~cl!.d .:;oil, .=......,cl s·..i=::.=..ce \.·,;;.::~= he.a~.·ily c:::in::..a.=i..:1.a:::ed t..:i~~ ::..½.e.:s:e ~~ice.::; .
C-2
I
D
u
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l. 0
1.
2.
) .
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14 .
15 .
15.
l 7.
l 8 .
19.
20.
21.
22.
2 J.
25.
27.
28.
29.
JO.
J l .
J 2 .
J J .
Volatiles
Chloromethane
Bromomethane
Vinyl Chloride
chloroethane
Methylene Chloride
Acetone
Carbon Disulfide
1, 1-Dichloroethene
1,1-Dichloroethane
1,2-Dichloroethene
(total)
Chloroform
1,2-Dichloroethane
2-3utanone
l,!,l-Trichloroethane
Carbon Tetrachloride
3romodichloromethane
1,2-Dichloropropane
cis-1, 3-Dichloro;,ropene
Trichloroethene
Dibromochloromethane
!,1,2-Trichloroethane
Benzene
trans-l, 3-
Dichloropropene
3ro:nofo:-w
4-Methyl-2-;,entanone
2-:-!exanone
Tetrachloroethene
1,1,2,2-
Tet=achloroethane
Toluene
Chloro.benzene
E:thylbenzene
S tyre,1e
:<ylenes ( tot.a.l)
C.-\S Number
74-87-J
74-8)-9
75-01-4
75-00-)
75-09-2
67-64-1
75-15-0
75-)5-4
75-3~-3
540-59-0
67-65-)
107-05-2
78-9)-)
71-55-5
55-2]-5
75-27-,
73-87-5
10051-01-5
79-01-5
124-43-1
79-00-5
71-,3-2
10051-02-5
75-25-2
108-10-1
591-78-5
127-18-4
79-34-5
108-88-3
108-90-7
100-~l-~
100-42-5
1))0-20-7
C-3
Wate:-
ug/L
10
l 0
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
~xhi~it c --Seccio~ l
Volati~es (VO.;)
Q~antitation ~iwits
Low
Soil
ug/Kg
10
10
l O
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
l 0
10
10
10
l 0
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Ned.
Soil
ug/Kg
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
12 0 0
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
12 0 0
12 0 0
1200
1200
12 0 0
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
12 0 0
1200
On
Colu:n:1
( ng l
(SOI
( so I
( 5 O I
( 50 I
( 5 o I
( 5 O I
( 5 O I
( 5 0 I
( 5 0 I
( 5 O I
( 5 O I
I 5 O I
(50)
( 5 O I
(50)
( 5 0 I
(50)
(50)
( 5 O I
( 5 O I
( 5 O I
( 5 O I
( 5 0 I
( 5 O I
( 5 O I
( 5 0 I
( 5 0 I
( 5 O I
( 5 O I
( 5 O I
( 5 O I
(50)
(501
OL~0J.0
Exhi~it C --Section 2 Se:;iivo.!.atiles (Si/OA)
2. 0 SEMIVOLATILES TARGET COMPOUND LIST AND CONT~ACT REQUIRED QUANTITATION LIMITS
l 4 .
JS.
35.
]7.
l 8.
l 9.
40.
41.
42.
4l.
4 4 .
49.
so.
51 .
52.
5.l .
5 S.
56.
57.
58.
5 9 .
50.
61 .
62.
6 J .
6 S .
6 5 .
5 7 .
Semi volatiles
Phenol
bis-(2-Chloroethyl)
ether
2-Chlorophenol
1,3-Dichlorobenzene
1,4-Dichlorobenzene
1,2-Dichlorobenzene
2-Hethylphenol
2. 2 '-oxybis {!-
Chlorop:-opane) i
4-Hethylphenol
N-Nitroso-di-n-
propyla'71ine
Hexachloroethane
Nitrobenzene
Iso;,horone
2-Nitro?henol
2,4-Diraethylphenol
bis{2-Chloroethoxy)
methane
2.4-Dichlorophenol
!,2,4-T=ich.!.oro-
Naphthalene
4-Chloroaniline
Hexachlorojutadiene
4-Chloro-3-
methyl?henol
2-trethylnaphthalene
Hexachlorocyclo-
pentcdiene
2,4,6-Trichlorophenol
2, 4. 5-Trichlorophenol
2-Chlorona;ihthalen~
2-Nitroaniline
Dimethylphthalate
Acena;ihthylene
2, 6-Dinitrotoluene
3-Nitroaniline
Acenaphthene
2,4-Dinitrophenol
CAS Number
108-95-2
111-44-4
95-57-8
541-7]-l
106-46-7
95-50-1
95-48-7
108-60-1
106-44-5
621-64-7
67-72-1
98-95-J
78-59-1
38-75-5
105-67-9
111-91-1
120-3]-2
120-82-1
91-20-3
106-47-3
37-63-J
59-50-7
91-57-6
77-47-4
88-05-2
95-95-4
91-53-7
88-74-4
131-1!-J
208-96-8
506-20-2
99-09-2
83-32-9
51-28-5
ug/L
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
l O ·
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
25
10
25
10
10
10
25
10
25
Quantitation Limits
Low Med. On
Soil Soil Coluran
ug/Kg
J J 0
JJO
J J 0
JJO
JJO
J J 0
J J 0
JJO
JJO
330
JJO
]JO
J J 0
JJO
JJO
JJO
JJO
J 3 0
JJO
JJO
JJO
JJO
JJO
JJO
]JO
3 3 0
JJO
8 J 0
330
JJO
JJO
8]0
JJO
8]0
ug!Kg
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
25000
10000
25000
10000
10000
10000
25000
10000
25000
(ng)
( 2 0)
( 2 0)
( 2 0 I
( 2 0)
( 2 0 J
( 2 0)
I 2 o J
( 2 0)
( 2 0)
( 2 o I
( 2 0)
I 2 o J
(2 0)
( 2 0)
( 2 0 I
( 2 0)
( 2 0)
( 2 0)
( 2 0)
( 2 0)
( 2 0)
( 2 0)
( 2 0)
( 2 0)
( 2 o I
( 5 O I
( 2 0)
( 50 J
( 2 0)
( 2 0 J
( 2 O I
( 5 0 J
( 2 O I
( 5 O I
1?=eviously known by the nam~ bis(2-Chloroisop=opyl) ether.
C-4 OL,!OJ.O
I
0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6 3.
6 9.
70.
71.
72.
7 J.
7 4 ,
75.
75.
77.
78.
7 9 .
so.
81.
82.
a J .
a 4 .
8 5 .
35.
37.
33.
3 9 .
90.
9 ! .
9 2 .
93.
Se:nivolatiles CAS Nu:n:Je r
4-Nitrophenol 100-02-7
Dibenzofuran 132-64-9
2, 4-Dinitrotoluene 121-14-2 Oiethylphthalate 84-65-2
4-Chlorophenyl-7005-72-l
phenyl ether
Fluorer:.e 86-73-7
4-Nitroaniline i°00-01-6 4,6-Dinitro-2-534-52-l
methylphenol
N-N i t::oso-85-30-5
diphenyla::iine
4-Bromophenyl-101-55-J phenyleti:er
~exachloro~enzene 113-74-1
?entachlorophenol 87-86-5 ?hen2.nthrene 85-01-8
Anth::acene 120-12-7
Carbazole 85-74-8 Di-n-butylphthalate 34-7~-2
~luo::anthene 206-44-0
?y:ene 129-00-0
Butylbenzylphthalate 35-53-7 3' J' -91-9~-L Dichlo::obenzidine
3enzo(a)anth::acene 55-SS-J
Ch:r~rsene 213-01-9 bis ( 2-:::chylhexyl} 117-31-7 phthclate
Di-n-oct lphthalate 117-84-0
3enzo(b) luo=anthene 205-99-2
Be:-izo(kl luo::anthene 207-08-9
C-5
Wate:
ug/L
25
10
10
10
10
10
25
25
10
10
10
25
10
10
10
10
10
10
l 0
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
~x~:jit C --Se::i~~ 2
Se::i.~·✓ola.:.iles (s·,.:o.:..)
Qu=ntitatio~ Limits
Lo'°' ~ed. Oo
Soil Soil Col ...:::i:1
ug/:<g ug / :<g (cg I
830 25000 ( 5 D)
330 10000 ( 2 0)
3 3 0 10000 ( 2 0)
330 10000 ( 2.0 I J 3 0 10000 ( 2 0)
J J 0 10000 ( 2 0)
830 25000 ( 5 O I
830 25000 ( 5 0)
J J 0 10000 ( 2 0)
J J 0 10000 ( 2 0)
330 10000 ( 2 0)
8 Jo 25000 ( 5 0)
330 10000 ( 2 O I
3 3 0 10000 ( 2 o I
3 3 0 10000 ( 2 0)
J J 0 10000 ( 2 0)
3 3 0 10000 ( 2 0 I
3 3 0 10000 ( 2 o I
330 10000 ( 2 O I
330 10000 ( 2 DI
J J 0 10000 ( 2 O I
]30 10000 ( 2 0)
J J 0 10000 ( 2 0)
l J 0 10000 ( 2 0).
]30 10000 ( 2 o I
330 10000 ( 2 0)
Oc~0J.0
.•
~xhibit C --Section 2
Se~ivolatiles (SVQ;J
Semi volatiles
9 4 . Benzo{a)pyrene
9 5. Indeno(l, 2, 3-cd)-
pyrene
96. Oibenzo (a, h) -
anthracene
9 7. Benz o ( g, h, i J pe iy l en e
\-later
CAS Nuj.lbe.r ug/L
50-32-8 1 0
193-)9-5 1 0
53-70-) 10
191-24-2 1 0
C-5
QL!a.1ti.tction Li::tits
Lo·..,r ~~ed. On Soil soil Colu:.i.n
ug / :-:g ug/i<g (ng)
330 10000 ( 2 o I 330 10000 ( 2 O I
330 100~0 ( 2 O I
330 10000 ( 2 O I
OLMOJ.O
n
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l . 0
98.
9 9.
10 0.
101.
102.
!OJ.
l O 4.
105.
106.
107.
l O 8.
l O 9 .
110.
111 .
112 .
11).
114.
1 1 -__ J_
116.
117.
l l 3 .
l l 9 .
120 .
121.
12 2.
12 J .
12 4 .
125.
?EST!CIDES/A~OCLORS TA~CE? CO~?OUND LIST AND CONT~ACT ~EQUE~ED
QUANTIT,\TION LIMITS 1•1
Quantitation Li~its
Water Soil On CoLur:in ?esticides/Aroclors CAS Nu::i:>e r ug/L ug/,g l?gl
alpha-BHC 319-84-6 0.050 ! . 7 5 beta-BHC )19-85-7 0.050 1. 7 5 delta-BHC 319-86-3 0.050 l. 7 5 garnma-BHC (Lindanal 58-89-9 0. 0 50 ! . 7 5 Hepcachlor 76-44-3 0.050 1. 7 5
Aldrin )09-00-2 0.050 1. 7 5 Heptachlor epo:<ide1 lllOH-57-J 0.050 l. 7 5 Endosulfan I 959-98-S 0.050 ! . 7 5 Dieldrin 60-57-1 0 . 10 ) . ) l 0 4,4'-DD2 72-55-9 0. l O l . l 10
Endrin 72-20-8 0.10 ) . ) 10 Endosulfan II ))2!)-55-9 0. l 0 J.) 10 4,4'-DDD 72-54-8 0 . l 0 ) . ) 10 Endosulfan sulfc.te 10)1-07-8 0. 10 ) . ) 10 4,'i'-DDT 50-29-J 0.10 ) . ) l 0
Methoxychlor 72-43-5 0.50 l 7 50 Endrin }:etone 53494-70-5 0. l 0 ) . J 10 Endrin aldehyde 7421-9)-4 0.10 ) . ) 10 alpha-Chlordane .5103-71-9 0.050 l. 7 5 gc.rnrna-Chlordane 5103-74-2 0.050 1. 7 5
Toxaphene 3001-)5-2 5.0 170 500 Aroclo::--1.015 1267~-!l-2 l . 0 l l !00 .-\roclor-1221 l!!0:!.-23-2 2. 0 57 200 Aroclor-12J2 llli!l-16-5 l . 0 ) J 100 .!.roclo.r-12<!2 53459-2!-9 1. 0 )] 100
Aroclor-1243 12072-29-5 ! . 0 ) J DO A.roclor-125<! 11097-69-l 1. 0 )] 00 A::oclo::--1250 11095-32-5 l. 0 )] 00
1There is no differentiation bec~een the ?:e?aration o[ low and medium soil sa~ples in this ~ethod for the analysis of pesticides/Aroclo:s.
JT~e lower re?ortin~ limit for ?esticide instru~ent ~lanks shall be one-ha!E the C~QL values for water sa~9les.
~Only the ezo-e?oxy iso~er liso:er 31 of ~e?tachlor e?oxide is re?orted on the data reporting !or=s (Exhi~it 3).
C-7 OLMOJ .0